EMT CBCS SYllabus

LIST OF COURSES

Name of the Course

ni

ve

Script Writing and Video Production Digital Compositing Audio Engineering Audio Engineering and Production Lab Graphics and Animation Graphics and Animation Lab Web Designing Advertising Introduction to 3D Animation Digital Photography Media Laws and Ethics Photography Lab Light and colors Visual Arts Lab Video Editing Principles of Cinematography Digital Color Correction Digital TV and Digital Video Engineering Video Compression Techniques Digital Video Processing Satellite Broadcasting Video Production Lab Video Post Production Lab Visual Effects Lab Introduction to Digital Audio Audio Sampling and Synthesis Digital Music Computer Based Music Production Studio Acoustics Audio Program Production Advanced Audio Technologies Post Production Techniques in Audio Digital Audio Effects Audio Signal Processing

U

1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1

Credits 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0

rs ity

Version

ru

Ka

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

Course Code 14MT2001 14MT2002 14MT2003 14MT2004 14MT2005 14MT2006 14MT2007 14MT2008 14MT2009 14MT2010 14MT2011 14MT2012 14MT2013 14MT2014 14MT2015 14MT2016 14MT2017 14MT2018 14MT2019 14MT2020 14MT2021 14MT2022 14MT2023 14MT2024 14MT2025 14MT2026 14MT2027 14MT2028 14MT2029 14MT2030 14MT2031 14MT2032 14MT2033 14MT2034

Name of the Course Introduction to Digital Media Photography Theory & Practice Cinematography Electronic Media Management Principles of Audio Engineering REVISED VERSION COURSES

ny

Sl.No

Course Code 16MT1001 16MT2001 16MT2002 16MT2003 16MT2004

a

Sl. No 1 2 3 4 5

Credits 3:0:0 3:1:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0

ru

0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 0:0:1 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 0:0:4 0:0:2 0:0:2 2:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0

U

ni

ve

rs ity

Computer Based Music Production Lab Audio Post Production Lab Live Sound Reinforcement Lab Computer Animation 3D Modeling and Texturing 3D Lighting 3D Video And Graphics Rendering Techniques Motion Capture Computer Animation Algorithms 3D Animation Lab 2D Animation Lab Java 2D/3D Based Computer Graphics Lab 3D Modeling and Texturing Lab Game Art 2D Game Design 3D Game Design Game Programming Online Gaming Game Engine Dynamics for Game Developers 3D Game Development 2D Game Design Lab 3D Game Design Lab Mobile Gaming Lab History of art and design Media Orientation Lab Media and communication Film Structure and emotion System Sound :Theory and Production Basic computers Typography Typography lab Introduction to Animation Visual Arts lab – I Visual Arts lab -II (Animatics) Stop motion Animation Principles and Techniques of Design Photography basics Screenplay and Script writing Digital Photography-1 Visual effects for Animation Form and Colors Elements of film and video

a

1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1

ny

14MT2035 14MT2036 14MT2037 14MT2038 14MT2039 14MT2040 14MT2041 14MT2042 14MT2043 14MT2044 14MT2045 14MT2046 14MT2047 14MT2048 14MT2049 14MT2050 14MT2051 14MT2052 14MT2053 14MT2054 14MT2055 14MT2056 14MT2057 14MT2058 14MT2059 14VC2001 14VC2002 14VC2003 14VC2004 14VC2005 14VC2006 14VC2007 14VC2008 14VC2009 14VC2010 14VC2011 14VC2012 14VC2013 14VC2014 14VC2015 14VC2016 14VC2017 14VC2018 14VC2019

Ka

35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

ru

3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:1 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:1 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0

U

ni

ve

rs ity

Creative photography techniques Lens, light and colors Types of Animation Advertising TV Program Production Digital photography-II Layout and Story boarding for Animation 2D Animation techniques Editing techniques Illustration Lab Video production lab Video post production lab Photography Lighting Lab 3D Animation Software 3D animation for tools and Application Creative Suit Lab I Principles of Animation Sound for Animation Visual Effects for Animation Animation in Advertising 2D Animation Production Lighting and Texturing Rendering techniques 3D modeling 3D Animation lab 2D Animation lab Cinematography Film appreciation Performing Art Types of photography Live Sound Writing Directing and Producing Documentary film Indian Cultural and Liberal Arts Film Techniques and Aesthetics Lighting for Digital video Visual effects Direction Visual Effects lab Television production Lab Sound in Media Live Sound Introduction to Sound Design Voice in Cinema Radio Programme Production

a

1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1

ny

14VC2020 14VC2021 14VC2022 14VC2023 14VC2024 14VC2025 14VC2026 14VC2027 14VC2028 14VC2029 14VC2030 14VC2031 14VC2032 14VC2033 14VC2034 14VC2035 14VC2036 14VC2037 14VC2038 14VC2039 14VC2040 14VC2041 14VC2042 14VC2043 14VC2044 14VC2045 14VC2046 14VC2047 14VC2048 14VC2049 14VC2050 14VC2051 14VC2052 14VC2053 14VC2054 14VC2055 14VC2056 14VC2057 14VC2058 14VC2059 14VC2050 14VC2060 14VC2061 14VC2062

Ka

79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

ru

3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:4 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:4 0:0:1 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:1 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0

U

ni

ve

rs ity

Sound for Animation Sound for Interactive Media Sound Effects and Foley Music for Motion Picture Basic Acoustics Audio post production techniques lab Audio for video lab Visual Design and Culture Ergonomics Photo Journalism Travel photography Macro photography Fashion and Wedding photography Lab Set and Costume for Photography Advertising photography Lab Composition Lab Outdoor Photography Techniques Portrait Photography Lab Photo documentation Lab Digital image manipulation lab Photography lighting Techniques lab Advanced Typography Communication Design Package Designing Lab Graphic Design Visual arts and principles of design Printing Technology Composition Lab Interactive design Advertising Production Lab Creative suit lab – II Design and Animation lab 3D Video and Graphics Research Methodology Marketing Management Principles of Cinematography Lighting Techniques Media culture and communication Research Methodology Lab Cinematography Lab Ad Film Making Lab Event and Media Management Authoring and Virtual Reality Documentary Production

a

1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1

ny

14VC2037 14VC2063 14VC2064 14VC2065 14VC2066 14VC2067 14VC2068 14VC2069 14VC2070 14VC2071 14VC2072 14VC2073 14VC2074 14VC2075 14VC2076 14VC2077 14VC2078 14VC2079 14VC2080 14VC2081 14VC2082 14VC2083 14VC2084 14VC2085 14VC2086 14VC2087 14VC2088 14VC2089 14VC2090 14VC2092 14VC2093 14VC2094 14VC3001 14VC3002 14VC3003 14VC3004 14VC3005 14VC3006 14VC3007 14VC3008 14VC3009 14VC3010 14VC3011 14VC3012

Ka

123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14VC3013 14VC3014 14VC3015 14VC3016 14VC3017 14VC3018 15VC3001 15VC3002 15VC3003 15VC3004 15VC3005 15VC3006

1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1

Sports casting Advanced Animation Social Marketing Documentary Film Lab Digital Music Production Lab Lighting and Production Design Lab Technical Writing Media Writing Lab World Cinema Media Psychology Semiotics and Rhetorics Acting and Directing Lab

3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2

rs ity

167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178

16MT1001 INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL MEDIA

ve

Credits: 3:0:0

a

U

ni

Course Objective:  To impart the rudiments of Electronic Media to a general Engineering audience.  To equip students with the necessary skills to carry out small tasks using media software’s  To inculcate the significance of citizen journalism to students.

Course Outcomes: Upon completing the course students will be able to,  Exhibit the different aspects of media through popular freeware.  Design and showcase small tasks in Electronic Media and create their own portfolios to illustrate ideas creatively.

Ka

ru

ny

Course Contents: Video : Concept making - The pre production process- Basic elements in production, Post production Process - Introduction to video equipments.

Graphics: Print Design Vs Digital Design – Elements of Graphic Design –– Vector Vs Raster Graphics – Design principles – Working with Color.

Mobile : Planning for the blog - installing and setting up a blog, building community, writing and creating conversation, building personal blog – Overview of Mobile App development- Choices and Design – Do’s and Donts of App development Photography: Overview on Photography – Exposure triangle –types of cameras – making a career in photography – categories of photography – Filters – Lenses – Digital Dark Room.

Audio:Basic Principles – Analog vs Digital – Basics of Audio - Application of Digital Audio – Digital audio Equipments –– Audio Post production for Video.

Advertising: Understanding advertising today-The foundations of advertising -The advertising Environment - Audience Definition, Research, and Planning – Audience analysis and buyer behaviour Advertising Research- Objectives, Strategy and Plans- Intercultural and International Advertising References: 1. Martha Mollison, “producing videos- A Complete Guide”, Allen & Unwin, 2003 2. Marcia Kuperberg, “Guide to Computer Animation: for tv, games, multimedia and web”, Focal Press, 2012.

3. Isaac Sharpe, “Apps: App Design and App Development Made Simple”, CreateSpace Independent Publishing Platform, 2015

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

4. Mark Galer, “Introduction to Photography-A Visual Guide to the Essential Skills of Photography and Lightroom” Focal Press 2016.

5. Ken Pohlmann, “Principles of Digital Audio”, 3rd edition, McGraw-Hill, 1995 6. Courtland L. Bovee, “Advertising Excellence” McGraw Hill Publications, Delhi, 2001.

16MT2001 PHOTOGRAPHY THEORY & PRACTICE Credits: 3:0:0

ve

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To explore the evolution of photography over the centuries.  To appraise on the basic concepts of photography.  To operate the various photographic equipment.

Course Outcomes:  The students will explore on how the camera works & to use it.  The students can operate various accessories available for photography.  The students will apply the basic techniques for taking good photos.

U

ni

Course Description: The art & science of photography – The history of photography – Cameras, Film & Chemical processing – Camera Accessories – Lighting for photography – Colour Concepts – Colour Temperature - Lens, focus & focal length – Film Speed, Shutter & Aperture – Filters – Electronic Flash - Digital Photography – Image Sensors - Basic controls and functions of a camera – Grammar of good photography – Composing, Framing, Depth of Field, Rule of Third – Camera Shots & angles – Creative techniques – Digital storage medium & file formats.

ny

a

References: 1. John Hedgecoe, “The Book of Photography”, Dorling Kindersley, 2005.

2. John Hedgecoe, “The Art of Digital Photography”, Dorling Kindersley, 2006.

3. Kirk Tuck, “Minimalist Lighting”, Amherst Media, 2009.

4. Tomang, “Digital Photography Essentials”, Dorling Kindersley, 2011.

5. Ralph E. Jacobson, Sidney F. Ray, Geoffrey G. Attridge, Norman R. Axford – “The Manual of Photography”, Focal Press 2001

ru

16MT2002 CINEMATOGRAPHY

Credits: 3:0:0

Ka

Course Objectives:  To appraise the students with the 5C’s of Cinematography.  To explore the aesthetics of Cinematography.  To keep the students updated with the latest techniques in Cinematography.

Course Outcomes:  The students will acquire the time tested concept of applying 5 Cs in their production.  The students will get trained to industry standards in cinematography.  The students can formulate their own ideas with regard to Cinematography and explore them.

Course Description: Camera Angle – Scene, Shot & Sequence –Types of Camera Angles – Subject size, Subject Angle & Camera Height – Scene requirements Continuity – Cinematic Time & Space – Filming the Action – Scene Direction – Different types of Action Axis – Cutting – Types of Editing – Sound Flow – Close Ups

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

– Extreme, Over the Shoulder, Types of close ups – Composition – Still vs. Motion Picture Composition – Composition Rules –Balance, Unity & Eye Scan – Framing

rs ity

References: 1. Joseph V.Mascelli, “The 5Cs of Cinematography”, Silman-James Press, 2001.

2. Ivan Cury, “Directing & Producing for Television”, Focal Press, 2007.

3. David Stump, “Digital Cinematography Techniques”, Focal Press, 2014.

4. Kris Malkiewicz, “Cinematography”, Simon &Sehuster, 2005.

5. Sonja Schenk & Ben Long, “The Digital Filmmaking Handbook”, Course Technology, 2012.

16MT2003 ELECTRONIC MEDIA MANAGEMENT Credits: 3:0:0

ni

ve

Course Objectives:  To appraise the students with the elements in media management.  To explore the qualities of a media manager.  To keep the students updated with the latest techniques in media management.

Course Outcomes:  The students will acquire the management quality in media.  The students will get trained to industry standards as a media manager.  The students can apply their skills in media management.

U

Course Description: Broadcast station management- financial management - human resource management - broadcast programming - broadcast sales - broadcast promotion and marketing - broadcast regulations - managing the cable television system - public broadcast station management - entry into the electronic media business

ru

ny

a

References: 1. Peter K. Pringle, Michael F. Starr, “Electronic Media Management”, Focal Press, 2006.

2. B. K. Chaturvedi, “Media Management” Global Vision Pub House, 2009 3. Promotion& Marketing for Broadcasting Cable of the web by Eastman, Susantylen 4. Consumer Behavior by Leon G. Schiffman and Leslie Lazar Kanuk, Prentice Hall India 5. Essentials of Management by Harold Koonz and Heinz Weihrich, Mac Graw Hills, 2001 16MT2004 PRINCIPLES OF AUDIO ENGINEERING

Credits: 3:0:0

Ka

Course Objectives:  To acquire broad knowledge about the various characteristics of sound.  To demonstrate the process of doing sound reinforcement.  To offer fundamental understanding of digital audio.

Course Outcomes:  The student will become familiar with all the audio jargons.  The student will be able to setup for live sound reinforcement or studio production.  The student will display entrepreneurship skills in setting up studios and giving solutions as consultants.

Course Description: Sound theory - Analog audio - Microphones - Electronic level control - Signal processors- Dynamic processors - Effect processors - Audio lines and Patch bays - Analog Recording devices and systems -

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

ATR - The fundamentals of Magnetic Digital Audio– Analog vs Digital – ADC/DAC - Digital mixers Basics of live sound engineering - Basic PA systems - Full Range sound Reinforcement systems - Choice of Equipment - Signal flow - FOH - MOH – MIDI – Latest trends in Sound reinforcement.

rs ity

References: 1. Ken Pohlmann, “Principles of Digital Audio”, 3rd edition, McGraw-Hill, 2010.

2. David Simons, “Analog Recording”, 3rd Edition, Backbeat Books, 2006.

3. Paul White, “Basic Live Sound”, Sanctuary Publications, 2003.

4. F. Alton Everest, “Master Handbook of Acoustics”, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill Publishing, 2001 5. Frederick N Martin, John Greer N Clark, “Introduction to Audiology”, 9th Edition, 2003 6. 6. Michael Talbot-Smith, “Sound Engineering Explained”, 2nd Edition, Focal Press, 2002.

7. Douglas Self, Richard Brice, Ben Duncan, John Linsley Hood, Ian Sinclair, Andrew Singmin,DonDavis, Eugene Patronis, John Watkinson, “ Audio Engineering”, Focal Press, 2009.

14MT2001 SCRIPT WRITING AND VIDEO PRODUCTION Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

a

U

ni

ve

Course Objectives:  To provide students with a strong foundation of crafting a script and to explore in the media industry.  To provide technical and aesthetic skill in video production this enables them to encounter any practical problems in industry.  To develop the graduates as team player and to equip them with media ethics in writing by which the students will be the responsible citizens.

Course Outcomes:  To utilize the comprehensive knowledge about the script writing involved in the high standard media productions.  To produce high standard media productions with creative and technical aspects.  The function of multi- disciplinary teams also executed.

ru

ny

Course Description: The proposal outline – Visual Treatment – Film Treatment – The Shooting Script – Writing Narration – The Story Treatment – The Art of Confrontation – Confrontation Dynamics – Dialogue Devices – Master Scene Script– The story board – Story Outline – Proposal Outline – Script Discussion – Characterization – Story Treatment – Basic Shots –Angles and Camera Movement – Lighting and Colors – Single and Multi-camera Production –Budgeting –Identifying sponsors – Producer – Casting – Hiring Crew – Sets – Props – Location Scouting – Scheduling

Ka

References Books: 1. Steven Katz “Film Directing: Cinematic Motion”, Focal Presspublishers, 2004 2. Antony Friedman “Writing for media”, Focal press, 2006 3. J Michael Straczynski, “The Complete Book of Scriptwriting”, F+W Media, 2002 4. Linda Aronson, “Scriptwriting Updated: New and Conventional Ways of Writing for the Screen”, LigarePvt Ltd, 2000 5. Paul Wheeler, “Digital Cinematography”, Focal Press, 2001

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14MT2002 DIGITAL COMPOSITING Credits: 3:1:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  Explore, illustrate and enable the student to implement the fundamental concepts in compositing.  Instruct the student and help them evaluate the basic pipeline of Visual effects.  Equip students to compare, contrast and make creative choices.

Course Outcomes:  Students will acquire concepts about the latest trends and technologies involved in digital compositing.  Ability to apply the mathematical concepts learnt for basic filter design, optimal colour Manipulations and glitch free tracks.  Ability to coordinate and work as teams to seamlessly integrate virtual elements onto real world footage.

ni

ve

Course Description: Digital representation of visual information - Image Generation, Pixels, Components, Channels, Spatial Resolution, Colour Manipulations, Spatial filters, geometric transformations, Expression Language, Filtering - image tracking and stabilization - Film formats - Aspect Ratio - Format Conversion Pipeline creating elements and integration techniques Lighting, Interactive Colour and lighting, light wrapping, Shadows, digital colour matching, spill suppression, Atmosphere, camera characteristics.

ny

a

U

References: 1. Ron Brinkmann, The Art and Science of Digital Compositing, Second edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2008.

2. Steve Wright, Digital Compositing for Film and Video, Focal Press, 2006.

3. Dough Kelly, Digital Composting in-Depth, Coriolis, 2000.

4. Lee Lanier, Professional digital Compositing: Essential Tools &Techniques, Wiley Publishing Inc, 2010. 5. Lee Lanier, Digital Compositing with nuke, Focal Press, 2012.

14MT2003 AUDIO ENGINEERING

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Ka

ru

Course Objectives:  To equip a basic knowledge on characteristics of sound.  To employ the process of live sound reinforcement.  To acquire a basic understanding about digital audio, perceptual coding and midi.

Course Outcomes:  Ability to analyze and select the right audio equipment for any given application.  Ability to take up sound reinforcement projects and analyzing the electrical requirements.  Ability to solve problems faced by people in recording industry and to provide optimum solutions for the same.

Course Description: Sound theory - Analog audio - Microphones - Electronic level control - Signal processors- Dynamic processors - Effect processors - Audio lines and Patch bays - Analog Recording devices and systems ATR - The fundamentals of Digital audio– Analog vs Digital – ADC/DAC - Digital mixers - Basics of live sound engineering - Basic PA systems - Full Range sound Reinforcement systems - Choice of Equipment - Signal flow - FOH - MOH – MIDI – Latest trends in Sound reinforcement.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

rs ity

References: 1. Ken Pohlmann, “Principles of Digital Audio”, 3rd edition, McGraw-Hill, 2010.

2. David Simons, “Analog Recording”, 3rd Edition, Backbeat Books, 2006.

3. Paul White, “Basic Live Sound”, Sanctuary Publications, 2003.

4. F.Alton Everest, “Master Handbook of Acoustics”, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill Publishing, 2001.

5. Frederick N Martin, John Greer N Clark, “Introduction to Audiology”, 9th Edition, 2003 6. Michael Talbot-Smith, “Sound Engineering Explained”, 2nd Edition, Focal Press, 2002.

14MT2004 AUDIO ENGINEERING AND PRODUCTION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14MT2003 - Audio Engineering

(Version 1.1)

ni

ve

Course Objectives:  To provide knowledge in the terms and techniques of audio production.  To implement various trends and technologies in Audio engineering and production.  To analyze the procedure for setting up the studio for a recording session.

Course Outcomes:  Ability to identify and formulate techniques used in handling audio software.  Ability to handle equipments, setting up for a recording and Troubleshooting.  To apply the acquired knowledge in computing and representing the working signal flow of a basic studio set up.

U

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes producing ADR, MIDI recording, Foley Recording.

ny

a

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Directorand notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14MT2005 GRAPHICS AND ANIMATION

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Ka

ru

Course Objective  To provide students with a strong foundation in animation techniques so that they will be able to apply their knowledge practically and creatively for graphics and animation industries.  To provide opportunity for students to work as part of teams for attaining relevant engineering and creative aspects involved in 2D animation production.  To provide technical foundations for involving in complex animation applications.

Course Outcome  To utilize acquired knowledge on various types of animation, compositing techniques and post production in 2D Animation.  To Enable the student to analyze and interpret creative concepts which can be applied to graphics, animation and gaming.  To Design graphical components with creative and engineering aspects like lighting, sound required to develop animations.

Course Description: Basic geometric objects - Interpolators for continuous changes, implementations - Lines and pixel graphics - Structural algorithms - Drawing arbitrary curve - Antialiasing– Areas - texts and colours -

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

Geometric transformations - Animating moving objects - Projections - modeling 3D objects - Surface modeling - Normal vectors - Clipping volumes - Algorithms for visible surface determination Illumination and shading: Light sources – Reflections – textures - particle systems - Dynamic surfaces Interaction - Collision detection - Sound effects- Steroscopic viewing - Homogeneous coordinates and transformation - Interpolations.

rs ity

References: 1. Aaron E. Walsh ,DougGehringer , “Java 3D API Jump-Start”, Prentice Hall, 2001 2. LeenAmmeraal ,Kang Zhang, “Computer Graphics for Java Programmers”, John Wiley & Sons,2007.

3. Frank Klawonn, “Introduction to Computer Graphics Using Java 2D and 3D”, Springer, 2008.

4. PatricNaughton , Herbert Schildt, “The Complete Reference “Java 2”,Third edition Tata McGraw Hills, 2001.

5. Jonathan B. Knudsen , “Java 2D Graphics”, O'reilly Media , 2005.

ve

14MT2006 GRAPHICS AND ANIMATION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite:14MT2005 - Graphics and Animation

(Version 1.1)

Ka

ru

ny

a

U

ni

Course Objectives:  To provide practical knowledge in analyzing and implementing basics concepts of flash.  To provide basic practical knowledge to students regarding character, background designing and animation.  To provide practical knowledge of basic concepts of graphics designing using java.

Course Outcomes:  Ability to design sprites and apply design techniques creatively and develop animations using Adobe flash.  Ability to illustrate and interpret concepts of designing and animation practically.  To enable students to employ designing aspects of 2D/3D graphical objects using java programming.

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes creating a flash movie and graphics using Java scripting.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14MT2007 WEB DESIGNING

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Course Objectives:  To acquire knowledge on basic importance of the web as a medium of communication and creating an effective web page, including an in-depth consideration of information architecture.  Implement and interpret basic web analytics and employ graphic design principles that relate to web design and learn how to implement these theories into practice as the field evolves.  Develop skills in analyzing the usability of a web site and embedding social media content into web pages to promote societal transformation.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

Course Outcomes:  To utilize basic acquired knowledge and design and experiment withadvanced features in HTML, PHP and JavaScript.  To assess an ability to apply interactive design and development principles in the construction of WebPages and websites of varying complexity.  To design a web component with engineering solutions to meet desired needs of society and solving contemporary issues.

rs ity

Course Description: Introduction to internet and world wide web –Basic html – XHTML - Cascading style sheet –inline and embedded style sheet-Linking style sheets- positioning elements-user style sheets JAVA Script– Arrays – Expressions – Control Structures – Functions – DHTML - Object model and collections- event modelevent on click-event on load-error handling with on error-event bubbling-filters and transitions – PHP ASP .

U

ni

ve

References: 1. David Crowder and RhonaCrowder,“Web Design with HTML/Flash/JavaScript & Ecommerce BIBLE”, Wiley DreamTech India Pvt. Ltd,2001 2. Thomas A. Powell, “HTML: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill, 2001.

3. H.M. Deitel, P.J. Deitel, “Internet & World Wide Web – How to program”, 3rd Ed., et al.,Prentice Hall, 2003.

4. Danny Goodman, Michael Morison, Paul Novitski, “Java Script Bible”, Wiley Publication, 7th Edition 5. David Flanagan, “JavaScript: The Definitive Guide”, O'Reilly Media, Inc, 7th Edition, 2011.

14MT2008 ADVERTISING (Version 1.1)

a

Credits: 3:0:0

ru

ny

Course Objectives:  To get acquainted with meaning of advertising  To gain an insight to advertising as an industry  To interpret the process of communication in advertising Course Outcomes:  To enable students to apply the advertising concepts practically.  Students will be able to apply latest concepts related to advertising industry.  Students will be effective in conducting PR and advertising campaigns.

Ka

Course Description: Understanding advertising today - The foundations of advertising - Audience Definition, Research, and Planning - Objective, Strategy and Plans- Intercultural and International Advertising - Creative Process Creative Strategy – Art Production – Print Production – Electronic Production - Media Planning - Public relations and special communications- local advertising –from plan to results - Copy writing for radio & TV - Visual communication – Television art Direction – Broadcast production – Effective Web DesignSales Promotion & Special Advertising- Consumer & Trade – Retail advertising.

References: 1. Courtland L. Bovee, “Advertising Excellence” McGraw Hill Publications, Delhi, 2001.

2. Sean Brierley, “The Advertising and Hand book”, New York, 2000.

3. McGraw Hill, “Principles of Advertising and IMC”, McGraw Hill, 2000.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

4. John McDonough, Karen Egolf, “Encyclopedia of Advertising”, Fitzroy Dearborn, 2003.

5. Tony Yeshin, “Advertising”, McGraw Hill, Cengage Learning EMEA, 2006.

6. Otto Kleppner, “Fundamentals of Advertising”, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2000.

14MT2009 INTRODUCTION TO 3D ANIMATION Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ve

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To identify and utilize concepts involved in creating animations.  To provide broad knowledge in procedures that lead to the completion of a fully rendered 3 Dimensional computer animation.  To identify and implement 3D animation production techniques.

Course Outcomes:  To utilize the acquired knowledge to understand and implement analytics used in designing and developing 3D Animation software to its merit.  Ability to model and design animations based algorithms to meet desired needs of industries.  To design, model and employ techniques required for texturing 3D characters.

U

ni

Course Description: Pre Production process – Production scheduling - Modeling basics –coordinate systems –viewing windows – Geometric primitives –transformations –common modeling techniques –hierarchies – Booleans and trims - The camera –Lights –Surface characteristics –shading algorithms –rendering algorithms –background images –Surface texture mapping –solid texture mapping –final rendering –Key framing –interpolations –parameter curve editing –dope sheet editing –kinematics –motion plans –shape deformations –Animation Techniques - Virtual sculpting - texturing – Post Production Process

ru

ny

a

References: 1. Michael O’Rourke, “Principles of Three – Dimensional Computer animation”, 3rd edition, W.W. Norton & company, 2003.

2. John Vince, “Essential Computer Animation”, springer UK, 2000.

3. John Edgar Park, “Understanding 3D animation using Maya”, Springer Science & business Media. Inc, 2005.

4. Marcia Kuperberg, Martin W. Bowman, “Guide to Computer Animation: For Tv, Games, Multimedia and Web”, Focal press, 2002.

5. Andy Beane, “3D Animation Essentials”, John Wiley & Sons, 2012.

14MT2010 DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHY

Ka

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Course Objectives:  Introduces students to the basic concerns in digital photography as a fine art medium.  It teaches the students to relate to the computer as a digital darkroom.  Includes digital imaging techniques of scanning, color correction, retouching, composition, content and Lighting techniques.

Course Outcomes:  Students will be evaluated upon achievement of technical and aesthetic excellence.  Students will apply the mechanics of exposure to control light and influence the final product.  Students will apply principles of composition to produce professional images.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

Course Description: Introduction to Photography – History and Development – Types of Camera – Types of Lenses – Lighting – Filters – Photo Composition – Elements of Composition – DSLR Camera – Introduction to Digital Photography – Image Sensors – Areas of Photography – Digital Darkroom – Image Processing – Enhancing Images – Manipulating Images – Sharing Images – Equipment and Resources

rs ity

References: 1. John Hedgecoe, “The Book of Photography”, Dorling Kindersley, 2005.

2. John Hedgecoe, “The Art of Digital Photography”, Dorling Kindersley, 2006.

3. Michael Langford &EfthimiaBilissi, “Advanced Photography”, Focal Press, 7th Edition, 2008.

4. Bruce Barnbaum, “The Art of Photography”,Rockynook, 2010.

5. Tomang, “Digital Photography Essentials”, Dorling Kindersley, 2011.

14MT2011 MEDIA LAWS AND ETHICS Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

U

ni

ve

Course Objectives:  To enable students to derive an insight into Indian Constitution and Media Norms  To enable students to get acquainted with rights, privileges and duties of Media Professionals.  To enable students to know the latest trends in Media codes of conduct Course Outcomes:  Students will be able emulate high professional ethics.  The student will be able to apply the concerned rules and regulations.  Students will be adept with media laws as well as their responsibilities.

ny

a

Course Description: Overview of the Indian Constitution - Fundamental rights - Duties of citizens - Directive principles of state policy, Functions of Executive - Acts: PRB, Video, Broadcasting, Copyright, Advertising, Cyber space - TRAI, - Cinematographic Act 1952, - Right to information and Official Secrets Act, Autonomy and PrasarBharati Act, Broadcasting Bill.

Ka

ru

References: 1. Neelamalar. M, “Media Laws and Ethics”, Prentice Hall of India, 2009.

2. Basu, Law of the Press in India, Practice Hall of India, 2003.

3. Radha Krishna Murthi, Indian Press Laws, Indian Publishers, Distributors, 2001.

4. Philip Patterson, Lee Wilking, Media Ethics, Issues Capes, McGraw Hill, 2004.

5. Clifford G.Christians, Media Ethics, Cases and Moral Reasoning, Pearson, 2006.

6. Leslie, Mass Communication Ethics, Thomson Learning, 2004.

7. Basu, Introduction to Indian constitution, Practice Hall of India, 2003.

14MT2012 PHOTOGRAPHY LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14MT2010 Digital Photography

(Version 1.1)

Course Objectives:  To instruct students in the operation of a DSLR camera, processing and making prints.  To utilize natural light, available light, external camera flashlight, studio strobe light to achieve well lit images.  To demonstrate the creative process through discourse, to improve thought process.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

rs ity

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course the student will  Be able to identify essential mechanisms for capturing an image  Be able to manipulate aperture setting and describe related phenomenon.  Be able to manipulate shutter speed and describe related phenomenon.  Be able to predict with general accuracy the outcome of a photograph based on availablelightand camera settings.  Be able to execute photographic assignments independently.

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes areas such as lighting, composition and different genres of photography for both indoor as well as outdoor.

ve

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14MT2013 LIGHT AND COLORS Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

a

U

ni

Course Objectives:  To provide an overview on light and color theories.  To indicate the role of color and light in media.  To provide knowledge for color usage in visual effects.

Course Outcomes:  Student will be enabled to apply their knowledge in the area of creative use of light.  Student will also be enabled to apply their knowledge in media applications.  Students will acquire the theoretical base for practicing preparation of color images.

ru

ny

Course Description: Direction and Quality of Light: The basics – Looking at light – Light determines form – Types of Lighting/Qualityof Light – Light as Seen by the Eye and by Film or Sensors and the Inverse Square Law – The colour wheel andcolour sphere – Colour Composition – Colour and Emotion – Colour Contrast and Tone – Light and Colour Control– Subjectivity and Mood of Colour – Creative use of Colours – Use of colours in Media – Colour effects – DigitalPainting – Optical illusion – Visual mixing – Experience in rendering Methods

Ka

References: 1. Neil Van Niekerk, “Direction and Quality of Light”, Amherst Media, 2013.

2. Bruce Barnbaum, “The Art of Photography”,Rockynook, 2010.

3. Tom Fraser Adam Banks , “The complete guide to color”, The Illex Press Ltd.,2004 4. Norman Koren, “Color management and color science: Introduction”, 2004.

5. Kelly Dempski& Emmanuel Viale, “Advanced lighting and materials with shaders, Worldware Publishing”, 2005.

6. Color Management , Bruce Fraser, Chris Murphy and Fred Bunting, 2003.

7. Ralph Donald, Riley Maynard and Thomas span, Fundamentals of Television Production, Pearson, 2008.

8. Kirk Tuck, “Minimalist Lighting”, Amherst Media, 2009.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14MT2014 VISUAL ARTS LAB Credits: 0:0:2

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To develop the ability of sketching skills.  To help the students in their visual arts production.  To provide hands-on experience in visual arts.

Course Outcomes:  The students will able to classify different types of drawing techniques.  The students will show their skills in handling basic drawing tools.  The students will be able to develop a drawing from ground level.

ve

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes drawing basic shapes, composing and portraying still life through drawing.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14MT2015 VIDEO EDITING

ni

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ny

a

U

Course Objectives:  To enable students with the basics of video and film editing.  To provide knowledge of editing and narration.  To develop theoretical knowledge for the students to become professional editors Course Outcomes:  The students will get thorough knowledge on the techniques of video and film editing  The students will have Professionally sound knowledge editors would be created  The Students will get updated till the recent trends and technology in editing

Ka

ru

Course Description History of Film Editing –Editing Basics –Experiments in Editing –Understanding the Footage –– The Shot – The meaning of the Shot – Continuity - The practice of Editing – Principles of Editing – Goals of Editing – Sound Editing – Editing for the Genre – Editing for Aesthetics – Editing for Dramatic Emphasis – Transitions and Edit Categories – General Practices for Editors – The Final Cut – New Technologies – Montage and its Applications References: 1. Roy Thompson & Christopher Bowen, Grammar of the Edit, Focal Press, 2nd Edition, 2009.

2. David Bordwell , Kristin Thompson, “Film Art: An Introduction”, McGrawHill, 9th Edition, 2012.

3. KarelReisz& Gavin Millar, The Technique of Film Editing, Focal Press, 2nd Edition, 2010.

4. Ken Dancyger, The Technique of Film & Video Editing, Focal Press, 5th Edition, 2011.

5. James Monaco,How to read a Film, Oxford University Press, 3rd edition, 2000.

6. Roger Crittenden, Fine Cuts: The Art of European Film Editing, Focal Press, 2006.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14MT2016 PRINCIPLES OF CINEMATOGRAPHY Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To communicate effectively through visuals and able them to use techniques of Cinematography.  To equip student with aesthetics and technology in the field of Cinematography.  To keep the students updated with the techniques in cinematography.

Course Outcomes:  The students will master the time tested concept of applying cinematography in their production techniques.  The students will have the ability to contribute for the media industry in the field of cinematography.  To acquire the skill of judging the continuity of complex story telling involved in the field of cinematography.

ve

Course Description: Camera Angle: Types of Camera Angles – Scene requirements Continuity – Cinematic Time & Space – Duration of the Shot: Filming the Action – Scene Direction – Different types of Action Axis – Cutting – Close Ups – Extreme, Over the Shoulder, Types of close ups – Composition: Photographic Image – Composition Rules – Balance, Unity & Emphasis– Types of Editing – Sound Flow.

a

U

ni

References: 1. Joseph V. Mascelli, “The 5Cs of Cinematography”, Silman-James Press, 2001.

2. Ivan Cury, “Directing & Producing for Television”, Focal Press, 2007.

3. Dan Ablan, “Cinematography and Directing”, New Riders, 2000.

4. “Cinematographer’s Field Guide”, Kodak Entertainment Imaging, 2000.

5. Sonja Schenk & Ben Long, “The Digital Filmmaking Handbook”, Course Technology, 2012.

ny

14MT2017 DIGITAL COLOUR CORRECTION Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Ka

ru

Course Objectives:  To provide students with a strong foundation about human perception of colors which will enable them to explore various techniques involved in colour correction.  To provide fundamentals of various types of colors and illustrate techniques involved in their correction by conveying simple cost-effective solutions.  To promote student awareness of creative color correction techniques.

Course Outcomes:  Ability to analyze color in a video and utilize the acquired knowledge in implementing analytics and tools used in color correction.  To acquire comprehensive knowledge about colors theory and explore tools involved in  Student will gain knowledge on color correction.

Course Description: Visual perception - Color Theory – The color Era of world Cinema - The Primary color correction - Tonal Range Primer – Alterative Displays and Tools for Analysis – Tonal Correction Tools – Main toolsHistograms - Curves tab - Luma Range Display – color control Primer - Balancing an Image – Analysing color cast – color control tools –The Secondary color correction – Color Vector Isolation – Color

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

Secondary Curves – secondaries with the pros – vignettes – Spot Color Correction – Correcting shots – Telling the Story – Matching Shots –Creating Look

rs ity

References: 1. Steve Hullfish, “The Art and techniques of Color correction”, Focal Press, 2008 2. Steve hullfish, Jaime Fowler, “Color correction for video” second Edition, Focal Press, 2009 3. Alexis Van Hurkman’s, “Color Correction Handbook” Peachpit, 2011.

4. Jack James, “Digital Intermediates for Film and Video”, Elsevier, 2006.

14MT2018 DIGITAL TELEVISION AND DIGITAL VIDEO ENGINEERING Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)

a

U

ni

ve

Course Objectives:  To Overview the current and emerging trends in digital television.  Comparing the different standards of digital television.  Providing an overview on digital television signals over layered protocol Course Outcomes:  Student will be able to identify techniques involved in digital television broadcasting and transmission.  Student will be able to monitor basics and principles of digital television systems.  Student will be able to identify the new standards for compression and transmissions which are used in new TV applications.

Course Description: Basics of television- eye brain mechanism, scanning standards, digital video fundamentals, Digital televisiontransmission- transmission lines for digital television-Transmitting antennas for digital television- patterns, types ofdigital television antennas, dtv networking and transport technologiesNetworking and transmission protocols, transport technologies. Channel coding and modulation for dtvpicture quality analysis,International system for digital television- mpeg-2 systems layer, wimax.

Ka

ru

ny

References: 1. Michael Robin, Michael Poulin “Digital Television Fundamentals”, McGraw Hill 2nd Edition, 2000.

2. Gerald W.Collins, “Digital Television Transmission”, John Wiley & Sons 2001 3. Marcelo S. Alencar, “Digital television Systems”, Cambridge University Press 2009.

4. Walter Fisher. “ Digital Video And Audio Broadcasting Technology”, Springer 2nd Edition, 2008.

5. Keith Jack, “Video De-mystified”, LLH Technology Publishers, Second Edition, 2001.

14MT2019 VIDEO COMPRESSION TECHNIQUES

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Course Objectives:  To introduce principles and current technologies of video compression.  To analyze digital image and video compression techniques.  Providing an overview on digital video signal compression over streaming media.

Course Outcomes:  Student will be able to identify techniques involved in digital video standards and their compressiontechniques.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

 

Student will be able to implement a complete video compression system to achieve a specific task.

Student can analyze and interpret the results of video compression system.

Course Description: Compression- lossy and lossless, Video sampling and synthesis- entropy coding, JPEG- Encoding and Decoding,motion JPEG, Motion compensation- motion vectors, block matching, motion estimators, MPEG I- MPEG IIMPEG IV-MPEG 7-MPEG 21, DV compression, wavelets, streaming media.

ve

rs ity

References: 1. Peter Symes, “Video Compression De-mystified”, McGraw Hill 2nd Edition, 2001.

2. Peter Symes, “Digital Video Compression”, McGraw Hill 2nd Edition, 2001.

3. Yun Q. Shi, Huifang Sun, “Image and Video Compression for Multimedia Engineering”, CRC Press 2001.

4. Raymond Westwater, “Real-Time Video Compression: Techniques and Algorithms”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2003.

5. Keith Jack, “Video De-mystified”, LLH Technology Publishers, Second Edition, 2001.

14MT2020 DIGITAL VIDEO PROCESSING

(Version 1.1)

ni

Credits: 3:0:0

ru

ny

a

U

Course Objective:  To provide basic knowledge on algorithmic aspects of digital video processing and important industrial applications.  To identify and implement video communication, human-computer interaction and video surveillance algorithms.  To analyze and implement mathematical modeling of video.

Course Outcome:  Ability to equip and employ acquisition and format of digital video signals.  To apply and explore motion estimation techniques including optical flow estimation and block matching algorithms.  Ability to design and implement various video processing tasks including Denoising, restoration and super-resolution algorithms

Ka

Course Description: Video formation, perception and representation- Video capture and display- digital video-notation-itur.bt.601,digital video formats, Fourier analysis and human visual system response- space signals and systems, video sampling- Sampling of video signals ,Filtering operations in cameras and display devices, video modeling and 2d - motion estimation- two-dimensional motion models, two-dimensional motion estimation-optical flow- multi resolution , waveform based coding and video compression standardsvideo compression standards-video telephony with h.261 and h.263-h.261 overview-h.263.

References: 1. J.R.Ohm , “Multimedia Communication Technology”, Springer Publication. 2004.

2. David R Bull, “Video Coding for Mobile Communications”, Academic Press, 2002. 2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology 3. A.I.Bovik , “Handbook on Image and Video Processing”, Academic Press, 2005.

4. Tekalp, Digital Video, Prentice Hall, Second Edition,2004.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

5. Keith Jack, “Video De-mystified”, LLH Technology Publishers, Second Edition, 2001.

14MT2021 SATELLITE BROADCASTING Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To analyze the advanced developments in satellite technology in Broadcasting  To obtain the concept of Systems and operation of satellite Broadcasting  To discover the techniques of Satellite and internet broadcast program productions.

Course Outcomes:  Student will explore knowledge on satellite Broadcasting in India  Student will obtain skills on approaches and patterns in Satellite stations  This will provide skills on Practical application on internet and satellite broadcasting.

ve

Course Description: Over view of Broadcasting- birth of radio/TV network-Digital and HD revolution-Satellite and Cable – Mobile music-Digital transmission- Structure and management- Satellite Programming- News and research- Digital network- Production techniques- Digital audio & Television broadcasting- Consulted and Syndicated Production Future trends in Satellite Broadcasting.

a

U

ni

References: 1. Michael C, Keith,The Radio Station: Broadcast Satellite and Internet,Focal Press: 8th edition, 2009 2. Valerie Geller, Beyond Powerful Radio: A Communication Guide to the internet Age, Focal Press, 2011 3. Steve Warrem , Radio Station, Focal Press,2004.

4. Angela Wadia, Broadcasting Management in India, Kanishka Publishers, 2007.

5. K.N.Raja Rao, Fundementals of Satellite Communication,PHI Learning Pvt Ltd,2004.

ny

14MT2022 VIDEO PRODUCTION LAB

Credits: 0:0:2

(Version 1.1)

Ka

ru

Course Objectives:  To acquire knowledge about the intricate process involved in production of various genres of videos.  To clarify the student to choose the right type of shots to give the story with continuity to the audience.  To detect and understand the problems one faces during the creation of a video project help students to find solutions.

Course Outcomes:  The students can produce and deliver creative video projects.  The students will measure and master the portrayal of scenes conceived in their mind.  The ability to justify the framing by the students will improve as in the industry.

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes making Video production with concepts such as Documentary, Short film, Advertisements by learning types of shots and angles.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14MT2023 VIDEO POST PRODUCTION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14MT2001 Script Writing and Video Production

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives: To appraise the students learn and develop the editing sense required to create elegant projects.  To investigate identify and rectify problems in the video footage.  To construct students to learn basic techniques of editing used in the industry.

Course Outcomes:  The performance of the students in the sense of editing will improve, as they would have edited hours of footage.  The students will recognize their talent while making use of the software in a professional manner.  Students are developed to inspect right sense of choosing transitions.

ve

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes to learn the basic user interface of video editing software and to rough cut the videos and also to add transitions with the footages.

ni

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

U

14MT2024 VISUAL EFFECTS LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14MT2001 Script Writing and Video Production

(Version 1.1)

Ka

ru

ny

a

Course Objectives:  To develop in students the foundation skills of the tools and techniques used in the visual effects industry with sustainability.  To provide students with a strong foundation to analyze and interpret specializations in the creation of 2D/3D computer animated elements for digital visual effects  To assess 2D and 3D tracking of live action and CGI elements.

Course Outcomes:  Ability to use advanced CG tools required to apply design techniques creatively  Students will be enabled to create preliminary 3D CG representations of environments, visual effects.  Students will be enabled to create motion picture sequences that is visually and technically representative of final production imagery.

Course Description: Experiments based upon CG representation, create motion picture sequence, 2D and 3D tracking will be dealt with.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14MT2025 INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL AUDIO Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To introduce the fundamental concepts in conversion of analog audio into digital audio.  To understand and analyze various perceptual coding techniques.  To introduce various digital audio interconnection techniques.

Course Outcomes:  Students will be able to demonstrate skills in conversion of analog audio to digital audio.  Students will be able to analyze and interpret audio compression formats and their algorithm.  Students will be able to solve problems faced while conversion to digital audio.

ve

Course Description: Fundamentals of Digital Audio-Sampling Theorem-AliasingQuantization-Dither-DigitalAudio Recording-Pulse Code Modulation - Reproduction Processing-DAC Converter-OutputSample and Hold Circuit-Output Low pass filter-Impulse Response-Digital Filter - Psychoacoustics-Physiology of Human Ear-Data Reduction Coding-MPEG1 Audio Satandard - PC Buses and Interfaces-Sound Cards-Digital Audio Extraction-PC Audio SoftwareApplications

ni

References: 1. Ken Pohlmann, Principles of Digital Audio, McGraw Hill, Fourth Edition, 2000. Reference 2. Peter Kirn, Real World Digital Audio, Peachpitt Press, Ist Edition, 2006 3. John Watkinson, Introduction to Digital Audio, Focal Press, Second Edition , 2002

U

14MT2026 AUDIO SAMPLING AND SYNTHESIS Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Ka

ru

ny

a

Course Objectives:  To analyze the basic maths and electronic implementation of sound synthesis techniques with applications.  To enable students to understand and work with complex synthesis based software’s to create samples of multiple timbres.  To serve as an introduction to world of sound analysis and design.

Course Outcomes:  Students will develop the capacity to analyze sounds, break them into fundamental waveforms and recreate them by building them up from these waves.  The student would be able to set up, manage, diagnose and troubleshoot sampling and synthesis software.  The student would have understood the basics necessary for the creation of sound.

Course Description: Sound synthesis - Digital signal and sampling - Tape Techniques- Experimental versus Popular musicelectro acoustic music - Fundamental principles of electronics and acoustics - Analog synthesis techniques - Digital synthesis techniques - hybrid techniques - Synthesis applications – multi-timbrality polyphony - GM-on-board effects - Controllers - drum machines - Sequencers - workstations – accompaniment - groove boxes - studios on computers – Analysis - future of synthesis.

References: 1. Martin Russ, Sound synthesis and sampling, Focal Press, 3rd edition, 2009.

2. Sam McGuire, Roy Pritts, Audio Sampling - A Practical Guide, Focal Press, Ist Edition, 2008.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

3. Eduardo Miranda, Computer Sound Design: Synthesis techniques and programming, Focal press, 2nd edition, 2002.

4. Nick Collins, Introduction to Computer Music, Wiley, 2009.

5. Michael Prager, Reason 6 Power!,Cengage Learning, 2012.

14MT2027 DIGITAL MUSIC Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ve

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To analyze music production via mathematical models.  The provide knowledge on techniques and concepts involved in producing music using acoustics, algorithms and system models.  To implement and illustrate broad-based exposure to musical notes, formats and analyzing musical instruments mathematically.

Course Outcomes:  Ability to design and develop simple algorithms using professional software for producing music.  Ability to identify engineering aspects involved in composing music and analysis.  Ability to apply mathematical foundations, algorithmic principles, and music theory in the modeling and design of musical instruments and Synthesizers

U

ni

Course Description: Introduction - Waves and Harmonics - Sound, The human ear, sine waves - Harmonic motion, Vibrating strings - Fourier’s theory of harmonic analysis - Mathematician’s Guide to the Orchestra - Wave equation for strings, Initial conditions, bowed string, Wind instruments, The drum, horn, THE BELL, Acoustics: Consonance and dissonance and Scales and temperament -Pythagorean scale, the cycle of fifths, Eitz’s notation - Digital Music: WAV AND MP3 FILES, MIDI Synthesis, the Yamaha DX7 and FM synthesis, C Sound, FM synthesis using CSound, Simple FM instruments.

ru

ny

a

References: 1. Dave Benson, Music: A Mathematical Offering, Cambridge University Press,2006.

2. Miller Puckette, The Theory and Technique of Electronic Music, World Scientific Publishing Co., 2007.

3. John Fauvel , Raymond Flood, Robin Wilson, “Music and Mathematics: From Pythagoras to Fractals”, Oxford University Press, 2006.

4. David Wright, “Mathematics and Music”, Library of Congress Publications, 2009.

14MT2028 COMPUTER BASED MUSIC PRODUCTION

Ka

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Course Objectives:  To help the students in the functioning of digital audio workstations.  To provide knowledge on MIDI ,VSTi and VSTe.  To train students in mixing tracks.

Course Outcomes:  The students will be able to comprehend the various functions in DAW’s.  The students will be able to compare the VSTi’s and analyze the better quality.  The students will acquire knowledge in mixing music tracks and assess the quality of it.

Course Description: Introduction to DAW: Hardware and software needed, Mac & PC platform for DAW-Hardware and software set up for music production : PCI cards - USB – Fire Wire/ i link - PCMCIA Cards - Audio

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

interfaces - MIDI interface types and features – Sound Card Driver installation basics - Surface controller setup – MIDI - MIDI implementation charts - Creating a new song/MIDI file - Recording types-Common MIDI Recording Problems and their Solutions - Analog and Digital audio recording - Basic track recording - dubbing - Wet vs Dry recording –Virtual MIDI instruments - Preparing tracks for audio editing-Mixing, Mastering and Archiving

rs ity

References: 1. Zack Price, “Beginner’s guide to computer based music production”, Cherry lane music Company, 2004.

2. Martin Russ, “Sound Synthesis and Sampling”, Third Edition, Focal Press, 2009 3. Francis Rumsey, Tim McCormick, “Sound and Recording: An Introduction”, Fifth edition, Focal Press, 2006 4. Andrea Pejrolo, “Creative sequencing techniques for Music Production”, Focal Press, 2005.

5. Emile D Menache “The Desktop Studio: A Guide to Computer-based Audio Production”, Hal Leonard Corporation, 2002.

14MT2029 STUDIO ACOUSTICS

ve

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ny

a

U

ni

Course Objectives:  To acquire broad knowledge on the mathematical concepts of acoustics.  To demonstrate the behavior of sound inside an enclosed space and the problems caused by reflecting surfaces inside a room are discussed.  To put sound theory into practice by designing studios that will sound good.

Course Outcomes:  The students will be able to analyze the room environment and measure the parameters that are necessary for achieving sound solution.  Students will be able to design audio and video studios which are acoustically treated.  Students will be able to identify problems in existing studios and give engineering solutions for the same.

ru

Course Description: Sound, decibels and hearing – Acoustic requirements for an audio studio - Sound isolation principles – Room acoustics & controlling sound inside room – Designing a neutral listening room – Rooms with characteristic acoustics – Variable acoustics – Loudspeakers behavior in rooms – Methods of flattening room response – Different Control rooms – Live End Dead End Approach in listening rooms – Response disturbance due to mixers & furniture – Surround Sound – Mobile Control Room.

Ka

References: 1. Philip Newell, Recording Studio Design, Focal Press, 2007 2. F Alton Everest, The Master Handbook of Acoustics, McGraw Hill, 2000 3. Ken Pohlmann, Handbook of Sound Studio Construction: Rooms for Recording and Listening, McGraw Hill, 2012 4. William M. Hartmann, Principles of Musical Acoustics, Springer, 2013 5. Oswald Leroy & Mack A. Breazeale, Physical Acoustics: Fundamentals and Applications, Springer 2012

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14MT2030 AUDIO PROGRAM PRODUCTION Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To provide students knowledge about creative recording techniques.  To demonstrate recording process for different types of program.  To provide skills to create records that meet broadcast standards.

Course Outcomes:  Students will implement the knowledge in the art of recording.  Students will be enabled to record audio programs of various types.  Student will be able to effectively communicate with artist and engineers in production process.

ve

Course Description: The Recording Studio – The Control Room – The people who make it all happen – The recording Process – Tools and Techniques – MIDI and Electronic Music Technology – Synchronization – The art and technology of Mixing – Mixing Styles – Mechanics of Mixing – Signal Processing – Noise reduction – Monitoring - Mastering – Multimedia and the Web – Digital Audio Workstation

U

ni

References: 1. David Miles Huber, Robert E. Runstein, "Modern Recording Techniques”, Focal Press, Eighth Edition, 2014.

2. Bobby Owinski, “The Mixing Engineers handbook”, Thomson Course Technology, Second Edition, 2006 3. Andrea Pejrolo, “Creative sequencing techniques for Music Production”, Focal Press, 2005.

3. Emile D Menache “The Desktop Studio: A Guide to Computer-based Audio Production”, Hal Leonard Corporation, 2002.

14MT2031 ADVANCED AUDIO TECHNOLOGY

a

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Ka

ru

ny

Course Objectives:  To increase the knowledge of the students in the Field of Audio.  To introduce innovative concepts in Audio.  To introduce students to research in multidisciplinary areas using audio technology.

Course Outcomes:  Students would acquire the knowledge of latest advancement in the field of Audio.  Students will engage in multidisciplinary areas of research involving audio technology.  Students will come up with innovative ideas to make products that will impact the society at large.

Course Description: Latest trends in Input Transducers, Cable and transmission standards, Latest trends in Analog and digital mixers, Audio interface technologies, Amplifier technologies, Output Transducer Technologies: Line arrays, Surround Sound systems-Effect processing technologies-dynamics processing-Sequencer technologies-Virtual Instrument Studios-Pitch Correction technologies- Noise removal technologies.

References: 1. Glen Ballou, Electroacoustic Devices: Microphones and Loudspeakers, Focal Press, 2009.

2. Douglas Self, Audio Engineering Explained, Focal Press, 2010.

3. John Eargle , The Microphone Book, Focal Press, 2005.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

4. Martin Russ, “Sound Synthesis and Sampling”, Third Edition, Focal Press, 2009.

5. Technology Trends in Audio Engineering, AES. 6. Mike Collins, A Professional Guide to Audio Plug-ins and Virtual Instruments, Focal press, 2003.

14MT2032 POST PRODUCTION TECHNIQUES IN AUDIO Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ve

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To focus on the advanced operation of DAWs in a professional post production environment.  To provide technical insight into both hardware and software used in Audio post production.  To use surround sound design and mixing, field recording, ADR and Foley to complete the post production workflow.

Course Outcomes:  Students will emphasize on mixing layered tracks in the creation of a coherent sound mix that is capable of creating and augmenting the emotional drive of a film.  Students will practice the use of sound effects libraries, the live recording of sound effects (including foley tracks) and atmospheres, editing and cleaning production dialogue.  Students will develop a dynamic, diverse and professional-quality portfolio linked to industry standards to improve their employability.

U

ni

Course Description: Problems with Sound Quality – Lipsync Problems - Edit and Mix Problems – Random Strangenesses Planning the Track - Different Media Are Heard Differently - Spread Things Around - Preproduction for Postproduction - The Postproduction Sequence – Transfer Technology - Digital Audio Transfers - Voiceover Recording and Dialog Replacement - Editing Dialog - Finding and Editing Music - Working with Sound Effects - Equalization - Dynamics Control - Time-Domain Effects - Time and Pitch Manipulation Noise Reduction - Stereo Simulation - The Mix – After the Mix.

ru

ny

a

References: 1. Jay Rose, “Audio Post Production for Digital Audio”, 2002.

2. Stanley R. ALten, “Audio in Media”, Wadsworth, 2005.

3. Michael Talbot-Smith, “Sound Engineering Explained”, Focal Press, 2002.

4. Zach Price, “Beginners guide to Computer based Music Production”, Cherry Lane Music company, 2004.

14MT2033 DIGITAL AUDIO EFFECTS

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Ka

Course Objectives:  To gain a critical understanding of the equipment and practices of modern recording techniques and audio production.  To develop practical and creative approaches to creating, processing and mixing recordings.  To analyze the uniqueness of various effect processors and their operation.

Course Outcomes:  Students will be introduced to the theory and practice of the professional recording arts.  Students will understand how audio is recorded at a professional level and how it is manipulated using effects processors.  Students will be able to perform high level processing of audio signals.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

Course Description: Introduction, Filters- basic filters, equalizers, time varying filters, Delays- structures and audio effects, Modulators, Demodulators, Non linear processing: basic effects, 3D with headphones and loudspeakers, reverb, Time segment processing : pitch shifting, time stretching, Time frequency processing: phase vocoder and effects, Spectral and filter processing : LPC, cepstrum, feature extraction, FX and transformations.

rs ity

References: 1. UdoZolzer , “DAFX: Digital Audio Effects”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2011.

2. Geoffrey Francis,"The Audio Effects Workshop”, CengageLearning ,2011.

3. Will Pirkle,”Designing Audio Effect Plug-Ins in C++: With Digital Audio Signal Processing Theory”, Focal press, 2013.

4. David Sonnenschein , “Sound Design: The Expressive Power of Music, Voice and Sound Effects in Cinema”, Michael wiese productions, 2001.

5. RicViers,"The Sound Effects Bible: How to Create and Record Hollywood Style Sound Effects”, Michael wiese productions, 2008.

ve

14MT2034 AUDIO SIGNAL PROCESSING Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

a

U

ni

Course Objective:  To provide a basic knowledge on hardware systems used in Digital Audio Signal Processing.  To discuss and analyze algorithms for processing digital audio signals.  To provide solutions to problems faced in Digital Audio Signal Processing.

Course Outcome:  Ability to choose the optimum system for Digital Audio Signal Processing.  Ability to adept, analyze and implement the various algorithms used in Digital Audio Signal Processing.  Ability to have a clear approach to research areas in Digital Audio Signal Processing.

ru

ny

Course Description: Studio Technology – Digital Transmission Systems – Storage Media – Signal Quantization – Dither – Spectral Shaping of quantization – Number Representation – A/D and D/A conversion methods – AD Converters – DA Converters - Audio Processing System – Equalizers - Room Simulation - Dynamic Range Control - Sampling Rate Conversion - Synchronous Conversion - Asynchronous Conversion Interpolation Methods - Audio Coding.

Ka

References: 1. Udo Zölzer, “Digital Audio Signal Processing”, John Wiley & Sons, 2nd Edition, 2008 2. Yiteng (arden) Huang, Jacob Benesty, “Audio Signal Processing For Next-Generation Multimedia Communication Systems”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2004.

3. Mark Kahrs, Karlheinz Brandenburg, “Applications Of Digital Signal Processing To Audio And Acoustics”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2002.

4. Andreas Spanias, Ted Painter, Venkatraman Atti, “Audio Signal Processing And Coding”, WileyInterscience, 2006

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14MT2035 COMPUTER BASED MUSIC PRODUCTION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14MT2028 - Computer Based Music Production

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To appraise the basic functioning of a digital audio workstation and its intricate workings.  To expose the students to the use of MIDI and digital audio tools in music production.  To demonstrate the power of insert/send effects and enable the student to reproduce them flawlessly.

Course Outcomes:  Will enable the students to become aware of the creative possibilities in music production.  They will be able to analyze the audio content, make creative decisions and apply digital tools efficiently in music production.  Students will be able to adopt and implement efficiently the fundamental technologies in Computer based music production.

ve

Course Description: List of experiment based upon Instrument Miking techniques, Vocal Miking Techniques, Insert and Send Effects, Equalization, Mixing and Mastering.

ni

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

(Version 1.1)

U

14MT2036 AUDIO POST PRODUCTION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14MT2032 - Post Production Techniques in Audio

Ka

ru

ny

a

Course Objectives:  To introduce various options available to improve the quality of sound.  To impart various techniques in solving the technical and creative problems in audio post production.  To obtain guideline and technical tips in setting up a reliable audio post setup.

Course Outcomes:  The student will have understanding about the requirements for a good audio post setup.  The student will obtain systematic approach to any audio post production.  The Students will understand various practical options that are available to improve the quality of soundtrack.

Course Description: Experiments based upon ADR, Foley insert, Mixing and Mastering will be dealt with.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Directorand notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14MT2037 LIVE SOUND REINFORCEMENT LAB

Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14MT2003 – Audio Engineering

(Version 1.1)

Course Objectives:  To portray how indoor & outdoor public address system functions in different environments.  To illustrate the behavior of sound in a variety of acoustic environments.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology



ve

rs ity

To demonstrate the techniques for optimally handling equipment to give clarity in speech & music performance.  To explain and illustrate the fundamental technicalities of microphones, audio amplifiers & loudspeakers are explained.

Course Outcomes:  The students will be able to plan, coordinate, execute and troubleshoot a live sound reinforcement system for a variety of scenarios.  They will be able to deliver good quality audio to the audience by choosing the right equipments& tweaking the listening area for optimum presentation of sound.  They will recognize the functions of every equipment in the signal chain and will be able to guide their subordinates while rigging the system.

Course Description: Experiments based upon basic miking techniques for outdoor performances for effective sound reinforcement, Speaker calibration and Testing will be dealt with.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14MT2038 COMPUTER ANIMATION

(Version 1.1)

ni

Credits: 3:0:0

ny

a

U

Course Objectives:  To provide students with knowledge on the latest animation techniques.  To implement and introduce various modeling metHoDologies.  To employ and understand algorithms and techniques involved in modeling.

Course Outcomes:  Ability to model based on the acquired knowledge by understanding and implementing algorithms used in animations.  Ability to estimate and formulate latest Modeling techniques involved in animation  Ability to identify the advantages and disadvantages of using simulation, procedural animation, motion capture, and hand designed animations, with respect to both online and offline applications

Ka

ru

Course Description: The nature of animation – Applications – Basics of Computer Graphics – Movement Control – The Human/ Computer Interface – Hardware Considerations – Software – Language Considerations – State of the art –simulation – Soft Modeling – Synthetic Humans - Introduction to Computer animation – Technical background - Interpolating values – Interpolation based animation – Kinematic Linkages – Motion Capture – Physically Based animation – Fluids: Liquids and Gases, Modeling and Animating Human Figures, Facial Animation, Behavioural Animation – Special Modes of Animation.

References: 1. Rick Parent, Computer Animation: Algorithms and Techniques, Newnes, 2012.

2. Stuart Mealing, The Art and Science of Computer Animation, Intellect Books, 1998.

3. John Vince, 3D Handbook of Computer Animation, Springer,2002.

4. Rick Parent, David S. Ebert, et al., ‘Computer Animation Complete: All-in-One: Learn Motion Capture, Characteristic, Point-Based, and Maya Winning Techniques’, Morgan Kaufmann, 2009 5. Isaac V. Kerlow, The Art of 3D: Computer Animation and Effects, John Wiley & Sons, 2004 6. Frederic I. Parke, Keith Waters, Computer Facial Animation, A K PETERS Limited (MA), 2008.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14MT2039 3D MODELING AND TEXTURING Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To provide students with a strong foundation to compute various animation techniques.  To demonstrate and design modeling , texturing techniques and the technologies involved in animation  To identify and implement shading and image mapping algorithms and techniques used in the field of animations.

Course Outcomes:  Ability to model based on the acquired knowledge by understanding and implementing algorithms used in modeling and texturing.  To analyze and assess various modeling and texturing techniques.  To compute, design and implement modeling and texturing algorithms for 2D/3D material design

U

ni

ve

Course Description: Introduction to Digital Modeling – Understanding a Modeler’s Role – Preparing for Modeling – Four Fundamentals of a Digital Model – Digital Modeling Methods – Professional Modeling practices – Polygon Modeling – Subdivision Surface Modeling – Modeling a stylized character – Modeling for print graphics – Digital Sculpting – Game Modeling – Materials – Shaders – Material creation Interfaces – Image Maps and Procedural Maps - Light Surfaces – Complex Materials – Mapping and Unwrapping – Rendering – Applying the correct Material and 2D texture – Applying 3D textures and Projections – Creating custom connections and Applying color utilities- Automating a scene with sampler notes.

ru

ny

a

References: 1. William Vaughan, Digital Modeling, New Riders, 2011.

2. Nikos Sarris, Michael G. Strintzis, 3D Modeling and Animation: Synthesis and Analysis Techniques for the Human Body, Idea Group Inc (IGI), 2005.

3. Ami Chopine, 3D Art Essentials: The Fundamentals of 3D Modeling, Texturing, and Animation, Taylor & Francis, 2011.

4. Dennis Summers, Texturing: Concepts and Techniques, Cengage Learning, 2004.

5. Bill Fleming, Mastering 3d Texturing, Elsevier Science & Technology Books, 2006.

6. Lee Lanier, “Advanced Maya Texturing and Lighting, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.

14MT2040 3D LIGHTING

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Ka

Course Objectives:  To demonstrate on human eye perception techniques in shapes, colors and illusions.  To explain and explore lighting concepts required for animation.  To employ and explore various Lighting Techniques.

Course Outcomes:  Ability to analyze and assess different types of lights available for animation  Ability to systematize and implement lighting module for a complete 3D model.  Ability to apply photography and cinematography techniques to animation.

Course Description: Nature of Light - The Physiology of Seeing and Perception – Anatomy of the Eye – Light Pathways in the Eye – Processing Visual Information – Sensing Movement – The Seven Eye Movements – The Vestibular

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

System – Monocular Cues – Fundamentals of Photography and Cinematography – Colors and Materials – Computer Graphics – Basic Lighting Techniques – Applied Lighting Techniques – Lighting Situations .

rs ity

References: 1. Arnold Gallardo, 3D Lighting History, Concepts & Techniques, Charles River Media, 2001.

2. Darren Brooker, Essential CG Lighting Techniques, Taylor & Francis, 2003 3. David A. Parrish, Inspired 3D lighting and compositing, Premier Press, 2002 4. Jeremy Birn, Digital Lighting and Rendering, New Riders,2013 5. JohalGow, 3D Lighting and Rendering: A Professional Approach to Learning 3ds Max, Maya and XSI, Elsevier Science & Technology Books 14MT2041 3D VIDEO AND GRAPHICS Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ve

Course Objectives:  To provide students with the concepts required to understand the steps and procedures that lead to the creating a 3D Video  To provide complete knowledge on the concepts of graphics followed in the 3D Graphics system.  To employ and explore concepts of Video Kinematics essential in streaming and editing.

U

ni

Course Outcomes:  Ability to assess the student’s progress towards achieving a 3D Video of high standards.  Ability to interpret and design professional 3D Video and Graphics for multi disciplinary fields.  Ability to resolve industry competent in the 3D film making industry.

ny

a

Course Description: Introduction to 3D video – Multi camera systems for 3D Video Production – Studio – 3D Video Production – 3D Surface Texture Generation – Estimate of 3D Dynamic lighting Environment with reference objects – Visualization of 3D Video – Behaviour Unit model for Content based Representation and edition of 3D video – Model based complex Kinematic motion estimation – 3D video editing - 3D display systems – 3D Content creation – 3D applications – Advance 3D video streaming applications.

Ka

ru

References: 1. Takashi Matsuyama, ShoheiNobuhara, Takeshi Takai, Tony Tung, “3D Video and Its Applications” Springer, 2012.

2. Guan-Ming Su, Yu-chi Lai, Andres Kwasinski, Haohong, “3D Visual Communications”, WangJohn Wiley & Sons, 2012.

3. Steven J. Gortler, “Foundations of 3D Computer Graphics”, MIT Press, 2012.

4. David P. Luebke, “Level of Detail for 3D Graphics”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2003.

5. Jonas de Miranda Gomes, Luiz Velho, Mario Costa Sousa, “Design and Implementation of 3D Graphics Systems”, CRC Press, 2012.

14MT2042 RENDERING TECHNIQUES

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Course Objectives:  To integrate and interpret images, instead of geometric primitives, to increase realism while maintaining real time performance the various stages in Rendering.  To provide students with the knowledge on how to use panoramas, imposters, and texture maps, collisions accelerated algorithms to render scene details for which geometry is not available.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

rs ity

 To explore the requirements needed to create a realistic virtual environment.

Course Outcomes:  Ability to analyze and appraise real time and non real time rendering algorithms for graphical computing in complex media industries.  Ability to interpret and research on the impact of graphics for software and hardware optimizations  Ability to formulate the impact of engineering solutions for building efficient algorithms and hardware acceleration for realistic rendering.  Ability to create the pipeline required for rendering.

ve

Course Description: Introduction to realtime and nonrealtime rendering-Graphics Rendering pipeline-Graphics processing unit-Transforms-Visual Appearance-Texturing Basics-Advanced Shading-Illumination-image based Effects-NonPhotorealistic Rendering-Polygons & Surfaces Basics-Acceleration Algorithms-Pipeline optimization-Intersection Test Methods-Collision detection-Graphics Hardware-NonReal Time Rendering-Setting up the network based renderer-Rendering in Layers and Passes-Production pipelineLatest Trends in rendering .

a

U

ni

References: 1. Tomas Akenine-Möller, Eric Haines, Naty Hoffman, Real-Time Rendering, Third Edition, A K Peters,2008.

2. Jeremy Birn, Digital Lighting and Rendering, New Riders, 2014.

3. Jennifer O'Connor, Mastering mental ray: Rendering Techniques for 3D and CAD Professionals, Sybex, 2010.

4. Markus Kuhlo, Architectural Rendering with 3ds Max and V-Ray: Photorealistic Visualization, Focal Press, 2013.

5. Thomas Driemeyer, Rendering with Mental Ray®,Springer, 2005.

ny

14MT2043 MOTION CAPTURE

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Ka

ru

Course Objectives:  To provide students the basic knowledge on theory and practice of motion capture technology using the 3D computer animation production process  To design creative and technically sound motion capturing techniques utilizing the flowcharts and motion diagrams  To employ and integrate motion capture techniques along with animation.

Course Outcomes:  Ability to utilize and interpret various types of Motion captures applications with high standards.  Ability to createMocap projects by imbibing basic acquired knowledge on motion analysis and capture studios.  To implement and demonstrate motion capture techniques.

Course Description: An overview and History of Motion Capture – Preproduction and preparation of capture – Pipeline – Cleaning and Editing data – Skeleton Editing – Data Application: Props - Data Application : Decomposing and composing motions - Integrating data with character rigs – Hand motion capture – Facial Motion capture – Puppetry capture – Mocap data and Math - The Motion List - Flowcharts And Motion Diagrams -The Motion Database - Directory Structure And Filenaming Convention - Markers

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

And Marker Configuration - Selecting A Motion Capture Studio - Motion Performers - Stunt Coordination, And Directing - Final Preparations Before The Capture Session - The Motion Capture Session - Post Production .

rs ity

References: 1. Midori Kitagawa, Brian Windsor, MoCap for Artists: Workflow and Techniques for Motion Capture, Taylor & Francis, 2008.

2. Matthew Liverman, The Animator's Motion Capture Guide: Organizing, Managing, and Editing, Charles River Media, 2004.

3. Alberto Menache, Understanding Motion Capture for Computer Animation, Elsevier, 2011.

4. AravindSundaresan, Towards Markerless Motion Capture: Model Estimation, Initialization and Tracking, ProQuest, 2007.

5. Derek Doeffinger, Creative Shutter Speed: Master the Art of Motion Capture, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.

14MT2044 COMPUTER ANIMATION ALGORITHMS

(Version 1.1)

ve

Credits: 3:0:0

a

U

ni

Course Objectives:  To provide students with a comprehensive knowledge about Computer Animation algorithms in the fields of engineering mathematics, Media productions and Computer Sciences.  To illustrate and compute technologies of Computer Animation Algorithms.  To describe and design algorithms creatively using models and kinematics of animations Course Outcomes:  To interpret and implement principles of Computer Animation.  To design and develop Computer Animation Algorithms required for computing animation.  Ability to understand the impact of engineering solutions in the field of graphics and animation resolving motion perception and kinematics.

ru

ny

Course Description: Motion perception – The heritage of animation - Animation Production – Technical Background Interpolation values - Interpolation Based Animation- Kinematic Linkages - Forward Kinematics – Inverse Kinematics- Motion Capture – Physically Based Animation – Fluids: Liquids and Gases Modeling and Animating Human Figures – Facial Animation – Behavioural Animation – Special Models for Animation.

Ka

References: 1. Rick Parent, “Computer Animation Algorithms and Techniques”, Elsevier, 2012.

2. Rick Parent, Morgan Kaufmann, “Computer Animation Algorithms and Techniques”, Elsevier, 2007.

3. Garth Gardner , “Computer Graphics and Animation: History, Careers, Experts Advice”, Garth Gardner Company, Incorporated (GGC), 2002.

4. Kevin Cunningham, “Computer Graphics: From Concept to Consumer” Scholastic Library Publishing, 2013.

5. Martin J. Davis, “Computer Graphics”, Nova Science Publishers, 2011

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14MT2045 3D ANIMATION LAB Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ve

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To provide knowledge on fundamental concepts involved in various aspects of 3D Animation software.  Providing students to assess designing process of 3D animation via concepts like kinematics.  To adept students with experimenting on techniques used in 3D animation process.

Course Outcomes:  Ability to import 3D characters of high standards and animate them.  Ability to provide behavioral characteristics to the 3D models.  Ability to design and develop animations with professional grade attaining real time projects for multi-disciplinary fields.

Course Description: The Experiments will include Maya interface tools rendering camera and animation techniques.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester

14MT2046 2D ANIMATION LAB

ni

Credits: 0:0:2

(Version 1.1)

ru

ny

a

U

Course Objectives:  To examine and discuss narrative, conceptual design and aesthetic possibilities in 2D animation.  To utilize animation fundamentals such as timing, movement, squash, stretch to plan, develop and manage the production of small 2D animations from concept to final output.  To perform experiments on adobe after effects to interpret basic Methodology of post production techniques.

Course outcomes:  Ability to analyze and design creative concept and character using 2D animation.  To build and develop animations with professional qualitywhich recognizes the need in the fields of advertisement, films etc.  Ability to combine techniques of animation and after effects in order to achieve standard production for multi-disciplinary fields.

Ka

Course Description: Experiments will include Flash Layout, Motion Tween, Shape tweening, Motion guide, Action scripting using Flash Basic effects in Adobe after effects.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14MT2047 JAVA 2D/3D BASED COMPUTER GRAPHICS LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14CS2040 -Programming in Java

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To provide students with practical knowledge on graphical implementation in Java 2D/3D.  To program and create shapes polygons and texturing.  To equip students with 2D/3D graphical world representations.

Course Outcomes:  Ability to program and design 2D geometrical objects.  Ability to create 3D shapes and provide texturing, rotation and animation  Ability to implement graphic algorithms using java platform.

ve

Course Description: Lab Experiments based upon: Lines, pixel graphics, shapes, polygons, arcs, 3D translation, rotation and texturing, Animation.

ni

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14MT2048 3D MODELING AND TEXTURING LAB (Version 1.1)

U

Credits: 0:0:2

ru

ny

a

Course Objectives:  To provide students practical knowledge with a strong foundation to compute various animation techniques and metHoDologies in 3D Modeling.  To demonstrate practical design modeling, texturing techniques and the technologies involved animation and Texturing.  To demonstrate knowledge and understanding of concepts and terms learned in 3D Modeling.

Course Outcomes:  Ability to visualize and demonstrate an idea and express it in 3D Graphics in the fields of computer and media industries  The students will be able to demonstrate an understanding of principles of design and colors and apply them effectively in multi disciplinary areas  Ability to model and texture

Ka

Course Description: The Lab exercises will include exercises on Creating basic 3D shapes in various modeling techniques such polygon, splines, nurbs etc. The course will be concluded by submission of a project in 3D Modeling and Texturing.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14MT2049 GAME ART Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To incorporate the artistic management of the game projects.  To explore the production of digital images for universe.  To demonstrate the character, animation, interface design and execution.

Course Outcomes:  Students will be enabled to design attractive visuals that allow players to be completely submerged in another universe.  Students will be enabled to gain a comprehensive understanding in main lines of graphic design production.  To grasp the techniques on how to manage and develop game project.

ve

Course Description: Traditional graphics Anatomy - Graphical research - Study of work of Arts, General culture – Game analysis –intentions – Character design & composition – History of gaming Creation process - support, media, Ergonomicsand design of interfaces, 2D Graphics Applications and specific tools - Special effects Assembly – animation –direction, Prototyping Intentions and validation of concepts - Game Design Initiation - Level Design Initiation.

a

U

ni

References: 1. Chris Solarski, “Drawing Basics and Video Game Art”, Watson-Guptill, 2012.

2. Fred S. Kleiner Gardner's, “Art through the Ages” 2012.

3. Tristan Donovan , “Replay: The History of Video Games”, 2010.

4. David Franson and Andre LaMothe “2D Artwork and 3D Modeling for Game Artists”, 2002.

5. Jesse Schell, “The Art of Game Design”, 2008.

ny

14MT2050 2D GAME DESIGN

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Ka

ru

Course Objectives:  To provide broad knowledge on how to design, program, and analyze games creatively.  To identify and formulate aesthetics and pre-requisites required for game designing.  To illustrate and utilize physics and mathematical concepts required for game environments and game development.

Course Outcomes:  To apply the acquired knowledge to employ creative designing capability of 2D games.  To design and develop 2D games on various platforms and demonstrate high standards in game production industries.  To design 2D sprites and provide them behavioral characteristics to interact in 2D game environment.

Course Description: 2D game engine- design, Directx control, dev projects, 2D Rendering- creating and testing sprites, transparency, Animation- sprites and transforms, Input – keyboard, mouse, Font, Audio- designing and testing, Physics- collisions, Math- angle and velocity, Threading, scripting.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

References: 1. Jonathan S. Harbour, “Advanced 2D Game Development”, PTR Publishers, 2009.

2. Briar Lee Mitchell, “Game Design Essentials”, Wiley Publishers, 2012.

3. Ernest Adams, “Fundamentals of Game Design”, Pearson Education, 2012.

4. Jeannie Novak, “Game Development Essentials: An Introduction”, Delmar Cengage Publishers, 2012.

14MT2051 3D GAME DESIGN (Version 1.1)

rs ity

Credits: 3:0:0

ni

ve

Course Objectives:  To provide broad knowledge on how to design, program, and analyze 3D games creatively.  To identify and formulate aesthetics and pre-requisites required for game designing, character creation and game story writing.  To illustrate and utilize physics and mathematical concepts required for game environments and 3D game development.

Course Outcomes:  To apply the acquired knowledge to design a particular genre of game by interpreting the metHoDologies of game productions.  To formulate and apply their skills on concepts like camera movement and dynamics of game designing.  Ability to design various levels, sound effects and HUD used in games with media ethics.

U

Course Description: Game genres, composing game sounds, game story development, 3 C’s – character, camera and controls, HUD and icon design, elements of combat, getting powers in games, multiplayer games, music notes, cut scenes, designing characters and enemies.

ny

a

References: 1. Scott Rogers, “Level Up! The Guide to Great Video Game Design”, John Wiley Publishers, 2010.

2. Jesse Schell, “The Art of Game Design: A book of lenses”, Morgan Kauffman Publishers, 2008.

3. Bob Bates, “Game Design”, Cengage Learning, 2004.

ru

14MT2052 GAME PROGRAMMING

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Ka

Course Objectives:  To describe how to design, program, and analyze games using Action Script 3.0 and Adobe Flash.  To observe the aesthetics and pre-requisites required for 2D game programming.  To differentiate physics and mathematical concepts required for game environments and 2D game development.

Course Outcomes:  Students will be enabled to have the capability of designing 2D games using Action Script 3.0.  Ability to illustrate and interpret concepts of gaming and animation practically.  Students will be able to create sprites with animations and interface them in a game with their programming skills.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

Course Description: Introduction to Action Script 3.0, buttons, movie clips, loops, game logic, Animations, game plan andimplementation, Maths and Physics for Games, realistic movements, Adventure game, High Score Games, sounds,Network programming.

rs ity

References: 1. HamsaSuri, Lakshmi Prayaga, “Beginning Game Programming with Flash”, Thomson core Publishers,2007 2. Gary Rosenzweig, “Action Script 3.0 Game Programming”, Que Publishers, 2012.

3. Ernest Adams, “Fundamentals of Game Design”, Pearson Education, 2012.

4. EmanueleFeronato, “Flash Game Development”, Packt Publishers, 2011.

5. Charles Kelly, “Programming 2D Games”, CRC Press Publishers, 2012.

14MT2053 ONLINE GAMING Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

U

ni

ve

Course Objectives:  To increase the knowledge of the student regarding online gaming.  To examine and elaborate the differences between various genres of online games.  To help interpret the inner workings of an MMO. Course Outcomes:  Students will be able to appraise any online game.  Students will be able to comprehend the basic creation parameters involved in the creation and commission of an online game.  Students will be able to create and host a basic experimental online multiplayer game.

ny

a

Course Description: Introduction, Evolution of online games, HTML5 games, Flash games, FPS, RPG, MMO, Examples, Basic Internet architecture-latency, jitter, loss and latency compensation, Broad band access networks, game servers, Various characteristics of games, Parts of an MMO, Core Idea generation, Creating the realm for MMO, Compiling, Adding media to the game, Creating actors, Items, Working with the world editor, Post processing, Scripting, Putting all together.

Ka

ru

References: 1. Jason Darby, "Wizards and Warriors: Massively Multiplayer Online Game Creation”, Cengage learning, 2012.

2. Grenville Armitage, Mark Claypool, Philip Branch, “Networking and Online Games: Understanding and Engineering Multiplayer Internet Games”, Wiley publishing inc, 2006.

3. George SkaffElias,Richard Garfield, ”Characteristics of Games”, MIT,2012.

4. Thor Alexander,”Massively Multiplayer Game Development”, (ver. 1 & 2), Charles River Media, 2003.

5. Aaron C Callahan, “Make Your Own MMORPG Paperback”, Fose Media, 2011.

14MT2054 GAME ENGINE Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Course Objectives:  To provide students with knowledge on how to design and create a video game engine that can be used to create gaming applications on the PC with media ethics.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology



rs ity

To program and build a complete game engine, including graphics, physics, programming, audio, AI, data structures and memory management.  To lead game industries with concepts of developing consoles required for game environments and 3d game development.

Course Outcomes:  Ability to design basic 3D games engines to lead game industries as the field evolves.  Ability to apply knowledge and information for designing and develop static script models with portal rendering systems relating 3D game engine design.  Ability to use knowledge skills and engineering tools to designing and develop relating 3D game engines.

Course Description: Overview of Game engine- game splash screens, User interface- Keyboard, Mouse, Joystick, Developing consoles, Camera and object movement- object animations, shading, texturing, 3D objects- skybox, landscape, particle system, Camera, Artificial intelligence, Game audio- Game physics- vehicle dynamics.

U

ni

ve

References: 1. Marshall Harrison, “Introduction to 3D Game Engine Design Using DirectX 9 and C#”, Apress Publishers, 2003.

2. David H. Eberly, “3D Game Engine Design: A Practical Approach to Real-Time Computer Graphics”, Morgan Kauffman Publishers, 2001.

3. Jason Gregory, Jeff Lande, Matt Whiting, “Game Engine Architecture”, CRC Press, 2009.

4. Jeannie Novak, “Game Development Essentials: An Introduction”, Delmar Cengage Publishers, 2012.

14MT2055 DYNAMICS FOR GAME DEVELOPERS Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ru

ny

a

Course Objectives:  To examine the physics that a game programmer would need to develop a professional-game.  To demonstrate the basic concepts in physics and modeling with physical attributes.  Ability to examine the physics engines.

Course Outcomes:  Students will recognize the concept of basic concepts of physics in games.  Students will acquire a comprehensive understanding of how to program a game with application of principles of physics.  Students will predict the techniques on physics engines on their game development.

Ka

Course Description: Basic Newtonian mechanics - basic kinematics – projectiles – collisions – sports simulations – cars and motorcycles– boats and things that float –airplanes – rockets and missiles – physics of solids – explosions – lasers – parabolic and montecarlo simulations.

References: 1. Grant Palmer, “Physics for Game Programmers”, 2005.

2. David H. Eberly, “Game Physics”, 2010.

3. Ian Millington, “Game Physics Engine Development: How to Build a Robust Commercial-Grade Physics Engine for your Game”, 2010.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14MT2056 3D GAME DEVELOPMENT Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ve

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To design, program, and analyze 3D games using unity 3d game engine with relevant engineering and creative aspects.  To provide opportunity to work as teams on multiple disciplines in various 3D game genres.  To illustrate and utilize physics and mathematical concepts required for game environments and 3d game development.

Course Outcomes:  To utilize the acquired knowledge to implement analytics used in the field of game design and development using unity 3D as development tool.  To design and develop 3D games on various platforms by defining and demonstrating concepts of collisions, triggering, scripting etc.  Ability to design and import 3D models into unity and provide them behavioral characteristics to interact in 3D game environment.

ni

Course Description: Overview of Unity engine- views and tools, Game Assets, Terrains – building and painting textures, placing trees and lights, importing textures, prefabs, Importing 3D characters into unity, Scriptingoperators, loops and functions, Character and state controller- first person controller, third person controller, Animations in unity 3d, Triggering and collisions, GUI, Audio control, Publishing the game.

ny

a

U

References: 1. Michelle Menard, “Game Development with Unity”, Cengage Publishers, 2012 2. Briar Lee Mitchell, “Game Design Essentials”, Wiley Publishers, 2012.

3. Ernest Adams, “Fundamentals of Game Design”, Pearson Education, 2012.

4. Jeannie Novak, “Game Development Essentials: An Introduction”, Delmar Cengage Publishers, 2012.

5. Sue Blackman, “Beginning 3D Game Development with Unity 4: All-in-one, multi-platform game development”, APress Publishers, 2012.

ru

14MT2057 2D GAME DESIGN LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14MT2050 – 2D Game Design

(Version 1.1)

Ka

Course Objectives:  To conduct experiments for designing and programming 2D games creatively using action script 3.0 and flash interface by utilizing trends followed by gaming industries.  To employ game designing skills by visualizing relationship between theory and practice for gaming industries  To utilize and implement important game concepts of physics like collision detection, gravity etc and HUD. Course Outcomes:  To utilize the knowledge in implementing and designing 2D game via series of experiments assessing creativity and engineering aspects.  Ability to apply and explore programming skills required in developing a 2D game with essential media ethics demonstrating high creative standards.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology



To design and control characters by performing experiments to provide the design with a component of artificial intelligence.

Course Description: Experiments based upon 2D Game design concepts will be dealt with.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

rs ity

14MT2058 3D GAME DESIGN LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14MT2051 – 3D Game Design

(Version 1.1)

U

ni

ve

Course Objectives:  To provide opportunity for students to work as team to perform experiments on fundamental concepts involved in 3D game development techniques.  To employ game designing skills by visualizing relationship between theory and practice for gaming industries.  To provides in depth step by step process of game development by conducting and performing experiments using JavaScript programming language. .Course Outcomes:  To design and experiment on developing a 3D game using JavaScript programming skills and Unity 3D interface.  Ability to create first person and third person shooter game.  Ablility to design and control characters and provide them artificial intelligence.

a

Course Description: Experiments based upon 3D Game design concepts will be dealt with.

ny

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

ru

14MT2059 MOBILE GAMING LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14CS2040 - Programming in Java

(Version 1.1)

Ka

Course Objectives:  To provide knowledge on fundamental concepts involved in mobile game development techniques by conducting and performing experiments as teams.  Providing students to assess designing and programming aspects of 2D mobile games using Action Script 3.0 and Flash CS6.  Provides in depth and step by step process of game development and mobile gestures using Action Script programming language.

Course Outcomes:  Ability to create 2D games on Android mobile phones with professional standards  Ability to control the sprites with Accelerometer and touch sensors incorporated in mobile devices

2016 Electronics and Media Technology



Ability to design a game and provide behavioral characteristics with gesture controls like swipe, tap, pinch etc for gaming and mobile application development industries.

Course Description: Experiments based upon mobile gaming lab concepts will be dealt with.

rs ity

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2001 HISTORY OF ART AND DESIGN Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ni

ve

Course Objectives: 1. To enable students to explore the evolution of art and design.

2. To enable students to appreciate the development of writing from ancient ages.

3. To enable students to gain an insight into the evolution of printing.

Course Outcomes: 1. The students will discover the link from prehistoric art to modern art.

2. Students will be able to apply the nuances of pictorial writing to typography and visual art.

3. Student will gain a sound foundation in art, design and origins of printing.

ny

a

U

Course Description: Prehistory of art – ancient styles –middle ages –gothic art forms-the isms – realism – impressionismspointillism –baroque- renaissance –pop art. History of design: Contemporary Overview -From Preprint to Incunabula - Incunabula through Renaissance -The Half History - Mass Medium -Font comparison - Art/craft/career - Through New and Nouveau - Rumors of war - Modernizing - The Avant-Garde through The Ring - Bauhaus - The International Style, The Many Moderns - Home growing -50s, 60s, 70s - Public messages, private meanings. Indian arthistory. Students have to create any one of the product design history with timeline.

Ka

ru

References: 1. “History of Graphic Design”- http://www.d.umn.edu.

2. Norman, Donald: “A Design of Everyday Things”, MIT Press, 1990.

3. Papanek, Victor; “Design for the Real World”, Thames and Hudson, London, 1995 4. Meggs, Philip; “A History of Graphic Design”, John Wiley & Sons, 1998 5. Trivedi, Kirti (ed.); “Indian Symbology”, IDC, 1987 6. Raizman, David; “History of Modern Design”, Publisher: Prentice Hall, 2004

14VC2002 MEDIA ORIENTATION LAB

Credits: 0:0:1

Course Objectives:  To understand the basic elements of Media Organizations and institutions.  To understand the media culture and its structure and way of functioning.  To learn to differentiate various media and their scope Course Outcomes:  The students will be able to relate media institutions and media industries.  The students learn the skills to approach various media as a profession.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

(Version 1.1)



The students will be able to assess the effects of media on public.

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes to study about media organization structure and function.

rs ity

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 6 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2003 MEDIA AND COMMUNICATION Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ni

ve

Course Objectives:  To acquire a sound foundation into the fundamentals of communication.  To assimilate the basic concepts, models and theories of communication  To trace the evolution of communication media and gain an insight into the latest trends.

Course Outcomes:  Students shall identify the basics of the communication.  Students shall acquire an insight into latest trends in communication and media studies.  Students acquire an orientation towards research.

a

U

Course Description: Communication – Process – Settings – Characteristics – Models – Emerging Trends – Perspectives – Historical and Cultural Context – Role of media in Newspapers – magazines – Books – Radio - Motion Pictures – Broadcast Television – Cable, Satellite and Internet Television – The Internet and the World Wide Web – Newsgathering and Reporting – Public Relations – Advertising – Regulations of Media – Ethics – Impact of Media – Social Effects of Mass Communication – Future of Media and Communication – The More You Know, The More You See.

Ka

ru

ny

References: 1. Joseph R. Dominick, “The Dynamics of Mass Communication”, 10th edition, McGraw Hill Higher Education, 2008 2. Paul Martin Lester,“Visual Communication: Images with Messages”, Cengage Learning, 2013 3. Keval J. Kumar, “Introduction to Mass communication”, Jaico Publishing House, 1999.

4. Linje Manyozo, “MediaCommunication and Development”: Three Approches,Sage Publication, 2012.

5. Paddy Scannell, “Media and Communication”, Sage Publications, 2007.

14VC2004 FILM STRUCTURE & EMOTION SYSTEM

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:  To analyse and appraise the various modes of discourse in films  To theorize the structural characteristics of films  To explore the psychological connections with films through emotion system Course Outcomes:  The student will be able to explore and dissect structure of film narration  The students can examine the narrative aspects of film  The students will be able to connect psychologically with films

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

(Version 1.1)

Course Description: The screen research and development - The screen story – essence of screen story – the log line – conflict – form, format and formula. – the structure of screen play – the three act screenplay – the screen – plot points – the character – plot vs character – characteristics – action speak more than words – character types – the dialogue – functions of dialogue – voice over – sub plots – flashbacks – theme breaking the rules – how screen writers break them and why genre – script to screen analysis

ve

rs ity

References: 1. Greg M. Smith, “Film Structure and the Emotion System”, Cambridge University Press, 2. 2003.

3. David Bordwell & Kristin Thompson, “Film Art An Introduction”, 8th edition, McGraw 4. Hill, 2008.

5. Sarah Casey Benyahia, Freddie Gaffney & John White, “As Film Studies The Essential 6. Introduction”, Routledge, 2006.

7. Nitzan Ben Shaul, “Hyper-Narrative Interactive Cinema”, Rodopi, 2008.

8. James Monaco, “How to read a film”, Oxford University Press, 2009.

14VC2005 SOUND: THEORY AND PRODUCTION Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ny

a

U

ni

Course Objectives:  To acquire broad knowledge about the various characteristics of sound.  To demonstrate the process of doing sound reinforcement.  To offer fundamental understanding of digital audio.

Course Outcomes:  The student will become familiar with all the audio jargons.  The student will be able to setup for live sound reinforcement or studio production.  The student will display entrepreneurship skills in setting up studios and giving solutions as consultants.

ru

Course Description: Sound theory - Analog audio - Microphones - Electronic level control - Signal processors- Dynamic processors - Effect processors - Audio lines and Patch bays - Analog Recording devices and systems ATR - The fundamentals of Magnetic Digital Audio– Analog vs Digital – ADC/DAC - Digital mixers Basics of live sound engineering - Basic PA systems - Full Range sound Reinforcement systems - Choice of Equipment - Signal flow - FOH - MOH – MIDI – Latest trends in Sound reinforcement.

Ka

References: 1. Ken Pohlmann, “Principles of Digital Audio”, 3rd edition, McGraw-Hill, 2010.

2. David Simons, “Analog Recording”, 3rd Edition, Backbeat Books, 2006.

3. Paul White, “Basic Live Sound”, Sanctuary Publications, 2003.

4. F. Alton Everest, “Master Handbook of Acoustics”, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill Publishing, 2001 5. Frederick N Martin, John Greer N Clark, “Introduction to Audiology”, 9th Edition, 2003 6. Michael Talbot-Smith, “Sound Engineering Explained”, 2nd Edition, Focal Press, 2002.

7. Douglas Self, Richard Brice, Ben Duncan, John Linsley Hood, Ian Sinclair, Andrew Singmin, Don Davis, Eugene Patronis, John Watkinson, “ Audio Engineering”, Focal Press, 2009.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2006 BASIC COMPUTERS Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  This course aims at providing students learn the basics of computer science and its components.  The course provides knowledge on understanding the basic concepts of computer organization and networking.  The course provides information regarding basic concepts of Photoshop.

Course Outcomes:  With successful completion of the course, students will be able to apply their skills on concepts like operating systems and computer security.  The students will be able to able to solve real world implementations using Photoshop skills  Students acquire the basic practices with Photoshop

ve

Course Description: Introduction, data storage, computer organization, computer networks, operating systems, data structure, data compression, security, theory of computation, artificial intelligence, exploring Photoshop 6, workspace, basics,making selections, retouching , painting, creating good images : RBG, histogram, adjusting curves and mid -tones, layers, filters, creating images for web and video: adding text, styles, slices and attributes.

U

ni

References: 1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Foundations of Computer Science”, Cengage Learning Publishers, 2007.

2. Jennifer Smith, “Adobe Photoshop CS6 Digital Classroom”, Wiley Publishers, 2013.

3. Nell Dale, “Computer Science Illuminated”, Jones & Bartlett Publishers, 2012.

4. WAGmob, “Computer Science- simpleNeasyBook”, WAGmob Publishers, 2013.

5. J. Glenn Brookshear, “Computer Science: An Overview”, Addison Wesley Publishers, 2008.

a

14VC2007 TYPOGRAPHY (Version 1.1)

ny

Credits: 3:0:0

Ka

ru

Course Objectives:  To impart the knowledge of typography  To understand the basic anatomy of types.  To help the students work with types.

Course Outcomes:  The students will gain knowledge in typography design  The type design aspects will become appropriate.  The students will also be able to apply the typography in their production.

Course Description: Study of Typography - History - Classification - Anatomy and usage of various letterforms. Theoretical andapplicable principles of letterforms - Expressive Typography - Compositions with type - spacingStudy of Indian language scripts- Calligraphic experiments in Indian Language scripts. Typography in different contexts: New media – Posters – Signage – Books – Mailers -Motion graphics etc. Study of grids and layouts.Students have to create abooklet with typography concept.

References: 1. Ruegg, Ruedi&Frohlich, Godi: “Basic Typography”, ABC edition, Zurich.1972 2. Schmid, Helmut; “Typography Today”, SeibundoShinkosha, 1980.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

3. Naik, Bapurao.S; “Typography of Devanagari”. Directorate of Languages, Bombay. 1971 4. McLean, Ruari; “Manual of typography”. Thames and Hudson.

5. Lupton, Ellen; “Thinking with type : a critical guide for designers, writers, editors, and students”.

NewYork : Princeton Architectural Press 2004.

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

14VC2008 TYPOGRAPHY LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2007 TYPOGRAPHY

ve

Course Objectives:  To help the student understand and see the endless possibilities available in representing letters in artistic forms.  To enable students to create animations with stylized text to get various messages across to the audience in an effective manner.  To help students create truly unique text representations.

Course Outcomes:  The artistic use of text by the student will be better.  The Creative placement of the text in the project will be better.  The quality of projects will be better owing to a better understanding of the text forms.

U

ni

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes designing letters, fonts in a unique way of representation by applyingcreativity.

a

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Directorand notify it at the beginning of each semester.

ny

14VC2009 INTRODUCTION TO ANIMATION

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Ka

ru

Course Objectives:  To learn the process of animation techniques.  To make the students understand about the traditional and modern animation production techniques.  To understand various types of animation production.

Course Outcomes:  The students will have sound knowledge about animation genres.  They will learn preproduction skills for animation production.  The students will be introduced to the basic techniques of animation.

Course Description: History of Animation: Legends of Animation productions - Evolutionof Animation – Types and Styles ofanimation an overview –Difference between animation and video - Scripting & screenplay for animation - famous Characters in animation movies – the influence of cultural and social set up in animation – 2d and 3d animation – Special Effects – software packages for Animation - Animation industry – Latest trends in animation – technological development in the field of animation.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

References: 1. Steve Roberts, “Character Animation Fundamentals, Developing Skills for 2D and 3D Animation”, , Focal Press, 2011.

2. Harold Whitaker, John Halas, “Timing for Animation, Second Edition”, Focal Press, 2009.

3. Mark Simon, “Producing Independent 2D Character Animation”, Focal Press.

4. 4.Jayne Pilling, “Animation and Beyond, Rotovision – September 2010.

5. Mark T Byrne, “Animation the art of layout and storyboarding”, Mark T Byrne publication, 2009.

14VC2010 VISUAL ARTS LAB – 1 (Version 1.1)

rs ity

Credits: 0:0:4

ve

Course Objectives:  To develop the ability of sketching skills.  To help the students in their visual arts production.  To provide hands-on experience in visual arts.

Course Outcomes:  The students will able to classify different types of drawing techniques.  The students will show their skills in handling basic drawing tools.  The students will be able to develop a drawing from ground level.

ni

Course Description: Types of exercise will be assigned on various topics of visual arts.The students have to produce a document on visual arts.

U

14VC2011 VISUAL ARTS LAB – II (ANIMATICS) Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2010 VISUAL ARTS-I

(Version 1.1)

ru

ny

a

Course Objectives:  To develop the sketching ability of portraying actions.  To enrich the animation sketching skills.  To provide hands-on experience in drawing for animations.

Course Outcomes:  The students will be able to interpret the concept of animation drawing.  The students will be able to transfer their sketching skills in to animation production.  The students will improve their skills in sketching for animation.

Ka

Course Description: Types of exercise will be assigned various topics on human forms & animation sketching.

The students have to produce a document on Visual Arts -II. Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Directorand notify it at the beginning of each semester.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2012 STOP MOTION ANIMATION Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2014-Photography Basics

(Version 1.1)

ve

Course Description: Types of exercise will be assigned on the topic.

The students have to produce stop-motion animation film.

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To impart the techniques of Stop-motion animation.  To define the concepts in Stop-motion animation.  To provide practical experience in producing Stop-motion animation.

Course Outcomes:  The students will be able to relate the concept of Stop-motion animation.  The students will be able to demonstrate the techniques involved in producing a stop-motion animation.  The students will be able to create assets for a stop-motion project from the ground level.

ni

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2013 PRINCIPLES AND TECHNIQUES OF DESIGN (Version 1.1)

U

Credits: 2:0:0

ny

a

Course Objectives:  To explore the principles of design.  To ensure effective usage of principles of design.  To enrich the skill level of graphic design through the topic.

Course Outcomes:  The students can apply principles of design appropriately.  Students will improve their creative component.  It helps the students to increase their designing skills

Ka

ru

Course Description: Elements of Design : Line-Shape-Direction-Size-Texture-Colour- Value- Concepts of Layouts: Hierarchy-Centre ofvisual Impact-Organization-Contrast –Colour- Typography – Unexpectedness-Rules – Consistency .Intro to design- Principles : Balance-Rhythm-proportion-Dominance-Unity – EmphasisHarmony-Opposition-Variety- Depth- Repetition-MotionIntroduction to semiotics-analysis-aspects of signs and symbols- the sign and meanings- description of signs- denotations and connotationsparadigmatic and syntagmatic aspects of Signs- Signs and Codes.

References 1. Lauet, David. “Design Basics”. Harcourt College Publishers, 2000 2. White, Alexander W. “The Elements of Graphic Design”. Allworth Press 2002 3. Muller, Josep. “Grid Systems in Graphic Design”.

4. Zelavski, Paul and Pat Fisher, Mary. “Design Principles and Problems” Oxford Univ. Press..

5. Dondis, Douis A. ‘A Primer of Visual Literacy” MIT Press, 1973.

6. Gavin Ambrose, Paul Harris , “The Fundamentals of Graphic Design”AvA publishing ,2009

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2014 PHOTOGRAPHY BASICS Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  This course defines a variety of historical and contemporary photographers as well as issues and theories within photography.  Quotes the basic concepts of photography to the students.  Gives an overview of various photographic equipment.

Course Outcomes:  The student will strive to bring technical control into accord with artistic vision.  Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to recall the basic technical aspects of photography involving camera operation and exposure control.  They will be able to list out various accessories available for photography.

ni

ve

Course Description: The art & science of photography – The history of photography – Human Eye - Cameras, Film & Chemicalprocessing – Camera Accessories – Lighting for photography – Colour Concepts – Colour Temperature - Lens, focus & focal length – Film Speed, Shutter & Aperture – Filters – Electronic Flash Digital Photography – Image Sensors - Basic controls and functions of a camera – Grammar of good photography – Composing, Framing, Depth of Field, Rule of Third – Camera Shots & angles – Creative techniques – Photo Printing – Digital storage medium & file formats.

ny

a

U

References: 1. John Hedgecoe, “The Book of Photography”, Dorling Kindersley, 2005.

2. John Hedgecoe, “The Art of Digital Photography”, Dorling Kindersley, 2006.

3. Kirk Tuck, “Minimalist Lighting”, Amherst Media, 2009.

4. Tomang, “Digital Photography Essentials”, Dorling Kindersley, 2011.

5. Ralph E. Jacobson, Sidney F. Ray, Geoffrey G. Attridge, Norman R. Axford – ‘The Manual ofPhotography”, Focal Press 2001

14VC2015 SCREENPLAY AND SCRIPT WRITING

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Ka

ru

Course Objectives:  To make the students conceptualize and develop the art of writing creatively.  To provide students with a strong foundation of crafting a script and to explore in the media industry  To develop the graduates as team player and to equip them with media ethics in writing by which the students will be the responsible citizens.

Course Outcomes:  To utilize the comprehensive knowledge about the script writing involved in the high standard media productions.  To produce high standard media productions with creative and technical aspects.  The function of multi- disciplinary teams also executed.

Course Description: What is A ScreenPlay? – The Subject – Creation of Character – Building a Character- Story and Character –Endings and Beginnings – Setting Up The Story – Plot Points – The Scene – The Sequence – Screenplay Form – Writing the Screenplay – Adaptation –The proposal outline – Visual Treatment – Film

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

Treatment – The Shooting Script – Writing Narration – The Story Treatment – The Art of Confrontation – Confrontation Dynamics – Dialogue Devices – Master Scene Script – The story board – Story Outline – Proposal Outline – Script Discussion – Characterization – Story Treatment

rs ity

References: 1. Syd Field, “Screenplay”, Delta Trade Paperback, 2005.

2. Laura Schellhardt, “Screenwriting for Dummies”, Wiley Publishing, 2008.

3. Sir William K. Coe, “The Screenwriting Bible”, 2005.

4. Dwight V Swain, “Film Scriptwriting”, Focal Press publishers, 1998.

5. Thomas Pope, “Good Scripts Bad Scripts”, Three Rivers Press, New York 1998.

14VC2016 DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHY-I Credits: 0:0:2 Core –Requisite: 14VC2020 Creative photography techniques

(Version 1.1)

U

ni

ve

Course Objectives:  To introduce students to the basic concepts in digital photography.  To teach the students the process of digital darkroom.  To include digital imaging techniques of scanning, color correction, retouching, composition, content and lighting techniques.

Course Outcomes:  Students will exploit the basic concepts of digital photography.  Students will explore the methods of Digital darkroom.  Students will develop their skills in handling cameras.

ny

a

Course Description: The lab exercises are crafted in a way to introduce the basic photography techniques with practical exercises. The digital image manipulation techniques are also taught in this lab.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2017 VISUAL EFFECTS FOR ANIMATION

ru

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Ka

Course Objectives:  To make the students recognize, understand and express various processes involved in typical visual effects pipeline.  To demonstrate the process of compositing 2d and 3d animated elements onto film plates.  To examine, investigate and experiment with the various special effects relevant to custom production scenarios.

Course Outcomes:  Students will gain knowledge about the latest trends and technologies involved in digital compositing.  Students will be able to apply the mathematical concepts learnt for basic filter design, optimal colour Manipulations and glitch free tracks.  Students will be able to coordinate and work as teams to seamlessly integrate virtual elements onto real world footage.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

Course Description: Introduction to Compositing - Camera parameters - Digital Representation - Types of medium for exporting –HDRI - Basic Image manipulation - Geometric Transformations – Alpha masking – Rotoscoping - Compositing techniques – Use of After Effects in Flash animation - Digital compositing with CGI - 3D compositing - digital intermediate process – Stereo compositing – multipass compositing – depth compositing –Visual effects in Animation - Compositing visual effects - particle systems – image blending – exporting in various formats for editing - Animation Editing

rs ity

References: 1. Ron Brinkmann, “The Art and Science of Digital Compositing”, Morgann Kaufmann, 2008.

2. Tim Jones, Barry J Kelly, albin S Rossen, David Wolfe,“Foundation Flash cartoon animation”, , .

3. Dough Kelly, “Digital Composting in-Depth”, Coriolis, 2000.

4. Lee Lanier, “Digital Compositing with Nuke”, Focal Press, 2012.

14VC2018 FORM AND COLORS

(Version 1.1)

ve

Credits: 3:0:0

U

ni

Course Objectives:  To provide an overview on light and colour theories.  To discuss the role of colour and light in media.  To provide knowledge for color usage in visual effects Course Outcomes:  Student will apply their knowledge in the area of creative use of light.  Student will apply their knowledge in media applications.  Student will analyze the theory and practice in the preparation of color images for reproduction.

ru

ny

a

Course Description: Experience of colour in media - colour psychology - colour theory - - Art in media - Function of Recording light -creative use of colors - color management in digital photography -Color in moving image - Color in feature films - Color composition - Color in branding and advertising - color on web, Basics of tonal adjustment - global color corrections - selective color corrections – types forms –forms and colors-selection of forms - color effects - digital painting - Optical illusion - Advancing and receding colours .

Ka

References Books: 1. Tom Fraser Adam Banks , “The complete guide to color”, The Illex Press Ltd.,2004 2. Norman Koren, “Color management and color science: Introduction”, 2004.

3. Kelly Dempski & Emmanuel Viale, “Advanced lighting and materials with shaders, Worldware Publishing”, 2005.

4. Bruce Fraser, Chris Murphy and Fred Bunting, “Color Management” , 2003.

5. Ralph Donald, Riley Maynard and Thomas span, “Fundamentals of Television Production”, Pearson, 2008.

14VC2019 ELEMENTS OF FILM AND VIDEO Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objectives:  To explore the aesthetics of film and video production  To identify the various elements and aspects of cinematography

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

(Version 1.1)

 To operate the editing principles and post-production techniques Course Outcomes:  Students will be appraised with the film and video production skills  The students can organize each and every element of film and video effectively  The students will construct and produce effective video programs

rs ity

Course Description: Film as Art – The Significance of Film Form – Theme and Focus – Fictional and Dramatic Elements – VisualDesign – Pre-Production – Scriptwriting – Production – Mise-en-scene – Cinematography –PostProduction – The Relation of Shot to Shot – Editing – Sound in Cinema – Acting – The Director’s Style – Film Genres–Audiences – Film and Society – Image Control – Video Formats – Video transmission methods – Video on the Internet

ni

ve

References: 1. David Bordwell& Kristin Thompson, “Film Art An Introduction”, 8th edition, McGraw Hill, 2008.

2. Sarah Casey Benyahia, Freddie Gaffney & John White, “As Film Studies The Essential 3. Introduction”, Routledge, 2006.

4. Joseph M. Boggs & Dennis W. Petrie, “The Art of Watching Films”, 7th edition, McGraw 5. Hill, 2008.

6. Joseph V.Mascelli, “The 5Cs of Cinematography”, Silman-James Press, 2001.

7. Martha Mollison, “Producing Videos”, Allen & Unwin, 2003.

14VC2020 CREATIVE PHOTOGRAPHY TECHNIQUE

(Version 1.1)

U

Credits: 3:0:0

ny

a

Course Objectives:  To make students explore the various forms of capturing photographs creatively  To enrich the aspects of composing the subjects creatively  To kindle the creative instincts among students Course Outcomes:  The students will acquire skills to capture creative photographs  The way the students look at objects will be creatively moulded  The students will obtain an in-depth cognition on framing divergent images

Ka

ru

Course Description: Communication through photography –How the Human Eye Sees – Simplicity Vs. Complexity – Visualization –Photographic Looking and Seeing – Photographic Techniques and Artistic Integrity – Photographic Realism, Abstraction, and Art – Thoughts on Creativity – Obstacles to Creativity – Prerequisites for Creativity – Approaching Creativity Intuitively – Understanding and Misunderstanding Intuition – Applying Intuition to Photography(The lab exercises will strictly focus on composing andcapturing images creatively and artisticallyacross various genres) References: 1. Bruce Barnbaum, “The Art of Photography”,Rockynook, 2010.

2. Michael Langford& Philip Andrews, “Starting Photography”. Focal Press, 2007.

3. Dan Simon, “Digital Photography Bible”, Wiley Publishing, 2004.

4. Scott Kelby, “Digital Photography”, Peachpit Press, 2010.

5. John and Barbara Gerlach, “Digital Nature Photography: The Art and the Science”, Focal Press, 2007.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2021 LENS, LIGHT AND COLORS Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To enrich the students on the areas of lens, light & colour  To illustrate the basics of lighting.  To describe the aesthetics of colour psychology Course Outcomes:  The students can differentiate the various types of lenses and its uses  The students will employ the type of lighting required for better photography  The students can judge the colours suitable for their production

ve

Course Description: LENS: Types of lenses –wide angle-normal – zoom – telephoto. Lens properties: focal length- aperturepower lenses – convertible lenses – filters and its usesLIGHT: The Physics of Light - Reflection Refraction - Quality of the Light - Size of the Light Source - Natural Light -Direction of the light- Front Light - Angled or Side Light --Light and Color -Color Temperature - Practical Example: Adding Variety with White Balance - Light Intensity and Metering - Types of Light Sources - Natural vs. Artificial Light - Light Modifiers --Surface - Design For Fill-Creative Techniques.Colour theory and psychology.

U

ni

References: 1. Billy Pegram, “LIGHTING TECHNIQUES”, Amherst Media, Inc., 2009.

2. Christopher Grey, “Masters lighting guide”, AMHERST MEDIA, INC., 2010.

3. John Hedgecoe, “The Art of Digital Photography”, Dorling Kindersley, 2006.

4. Michael Langford &EfthimiaBilissi, “Advanced Photography”, Focal Press, 7th Edition, 2008.

5. Kirk Tuck, “Minimalist Lighting”, Amherst Media, 2009.

a

14VC2022 TYPES OF ANIMATION (Version 1.1)

ny

Credits: 3:0:0

Ka

ru

Course Objectives:  To investigate the different types of Animation in 2d and 3D respectively.  To make the students adapt various processes involved in different types of Animation.  To provide sound knowledge of variances in animation techniques.

Course Outcomes:  The students will recognize traditional and modern types in animation.  The students will be able to label the various techniques for creating animation.  The students will be able to identify and categorize any animation shown at him/her.

Course Description: Introduction to Animation - Animation Process: Disney animation – Japanese anime – Russian animation –creativeaspects of Animation - Comparative study of different classical animation techniques - 2d Animation: Traditional Animation–direct manipulation animation - Cel Animation- Key Frame Animation - Limited Animation - Character animation- Animation in motion 2d- Stop Motion Animation - Graphic animation– Clay animation – Sand Animation - 3d animation: Animatics Character Animation - Game based animation – Clay animation based animation – Animation in motion 3d.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2023 ADVERTISING Credits: 3:0:0

rs ity

References: 1. Chris Webster, “The Animation – the mechanics of motion”, Focal Press, 2005.

2. 3D art Essentials: The Fundamentals of 3D Modelling,texturing and animation by Ami Chopne 3. John Edgar Park, “Understanding 3D animation using Maya”, Springer Science & business Media.

Inc,2005.

4. Marcia Kuperberg, Martin W. Bowman, “Guide To Computer Animation”, Focal press ,2002.

5. Michael O’Rourke, “Principles of Three – Dimensional Computer animation”, 3rd edition, W.W. Norton & company, 2003.

6. John Vince, “Essential Computer Animation”, Springer UK , FirstEdition 2000.

(Version 1.1)

ni

ve

Course Objectives:  To inculcate students with advertising concepts.  To explore different medium of advertisement.  To define various procedures in running an advertisement campaign Course Outcomes:  The students will appreciate how advertisement is essential for market economy.  They will know how an advertising agency works and their creative contributions.  The students will acquire the procedure of running an advertisement campaign.

ny

a

U

Course Description: Role & functions of advertising – Marketing Mix & Promotional mix - Advertising & Promotion – Classificationof Advertising – Communication phase in advertising – Consumer, Target audience & buying behavior - Advertising agencies – Audience Research & Planning – Segmentation, Targeting & Positioning – Creative Process& Creative Strategy – Copy writing - Advertising Appeal - Media Planning – Media Objective & Strategies –Advertising in Print, & electronic Media – Planning & Managing advertising campaign.

Ka

ru

References: 1. Wells/Moriarty/Burnett, “Advertising – Principles & Practices”, Prentice Hall of India, 2001 2. David Ogilvy, “Ogilvy on Advertising”, Vintage Books, 2000 3. Sangeetha & Raghuvir, “Advertising Planning & Implementation” Prentice Hall of India.

4. Otto Kleppner, “Fundamentals of Advertising”, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2000.

5. Mario Pricken, “Creative Advertising”, Thames & Hudson, 2000 14VC2024 TV PROGRAM PRODUCTION

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Course Objectives:  To impart the production techniques involved in the television production industry.  To acquire the fundamentals of a television workstation.  Critically evaluate the quality of product being presented for broadcast.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course students will  Collaborate in the planning and preparing of programming.  Operate equipment necessary for the production of effective television programming.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology



Function effectively as part of an operations and/or production team in the delivery of programming.

rs ity

Course Description: Idea-Inspiration- Visual thinkingWriting for television production-Single Camera production-Multi cameraproduction indoor and outdoor studio -Different genre of television productions-Visualisation in singlecamera operationGenre of Studio based productions - target audience. TV production- Music shows -danceshows -reality shows –quiz - personality interview, Political discussion - current affairs -Election Results & analysis- News Presentation- weather report.Genre of Single camera ProductionDocumentary- Experimental video -Teleserials, Crime subjects enacted.Glossary of TV productionBudgeting

ve

References: 1. David Lusted and Christine Geraghty, “The Television Studies Book”-2009.

2. Herbert Zettl, “Handbook of Television Production”,Cengage Learning,2006.

3. Peter ward “Studio and outside broadcast Camera” Reed Elsevier, 2001.

4. Jim Owens, Gerald Millerson, “Video Production Handbook”, Focal Press, 2012 5. Glen Creeber, “TELEVISIONS: An Introduction to Television Studies” British Film Institute, 2006.

ni

14VC2025 DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHY – II Credits: 0:0:2 Corequisite: 14VC2016-Digital photography-I

(Version 1.1)

Ka

ru

ny

a

U

Course Objectives:  To develop the skills needed to produce professional quality photographs  To implement acquired knowledge to set up photographic equipment and organize a successful photo shoot.  To employ artistic and creative skills to digitally manipulate the photographs using special software.

Course Outcomes: On completion of the course, students will  Demonstrate artistry by creating images that evoke an emotional response.  Apply the principles of lighting and color theory to a variety of photographic scenarios by measuring, evaluating, and adjusting light and color to create quality images.  Apply the mechanics of exposure to control light and influence the final product.

Course Description: The lab exercise will talk about Digital photography Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Directorand notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2026 LAYOUT AND STORYBOARDING FOR ANIMATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives: 1. To impart the techniques of storyboarding.

2. To make the students understand the perspective.

3. To provide hands-on experience in creating a storyboard for animation .

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

(Version 1.1)

Course Outcomes:  The students will be able to interpret the concepts in perspective.  The students will be able to demonstrate the functionality of the tools in the aspects of sketching.  The students will be able to create a story board for their project.

rs ity

Course Description: Equipment of the layout artist. Perspective: one point, two point, three point , forced perspective, aerial – scale inlayout – other aspects of perspective– pans- types of pans –composition –thumbnail drawing – conceptual drawings– leading the eye – animating backgrounds- lighting and rendering – staging – character layout– techniques and motifs – scene planning – computers and layout- storyboarding.

ni

ve

References: 1. Mark T Byrne, “Animation the art of layout and storyboarding”, Mark T Byrne publication , 1999.

2. Joseph D Amelio, “Perspective drawing Handbook”, Dover publication Inc., 2004.

3. David Louis, “Pencil Drawing Techniques”, Watson Guptil publication, 1984.

4. David Howard, “How to build a great screenplay, A Master Class in Storytelling for Film, St. Martin’s Press publishers New York, 2004.

5. William H. Phillips, “Writing Short Scripts”,2nd edition,2000 6. Laura schellhardt,”Screen writing for dummies”, Wiley publishing, 2008

14VC2027 2D ANIMATION TECHNIQUES (Version 1.1)

U

Credits: 3:0:0

ru

ny

a

Course Objectives:  To introduce the features of 2D animation technique.  To make the students define the concepts in 2D Animation.  To provide practical experience in creating 2D animation projects.

Course Outcomes:  The students will be able to describe the concept of 2D animation.  The students will be able to demonstrate their 2D animation skills using an animation authoring program.  The students will be able to correlate their skills with the creation of 2D animation and special effects.

Ka

Course Description: The Project Plan - Libraries - Storyboards and Animatics - Setting Up Your FLA - Plug-ins and Extensions- Frameby Frame Animation-Animating With Tweens- Animation Special Effects - Why Use After Effects?-After Effects and Camera Mechanics - Making Flash Not Look Like Flash - Script – Storyboard – Designs - Leica Reel (Animatic)- Pencil Tests (Animation) – Inking - The Principles of Animation and persistence of vision - Squash and Stretch – Kinematics - Choice of character - Character design –Timeline - The walk cycle -Digitizing and compiling the frames – Applications 2D animation.

References: 1. Tim Jones Barry J. Kelly Allan S. Rosson David Wolfe, “Foundation Flash Cartoon Animation”, Friends O Fed, aprèss company, 2007 2. Richard Williams, “ The Animators survival kit”, Faber and Faber publications.

3. Chris Webster, “Animation: The Mechanics of Motion”, Focal press,2005.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

4. Mark T Byrne , “Animation the art of layout and storyboarding”, Mark T Byrne publication , 1999.

14VC2028 EDITING TECHNIQUES Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To communicate effectively through visuals and able them to use techniques of editing.  To provide the platform for students in research of evolution of editing.  To acquire the skill of judging the continuity of complex story telling as of the industry standards.

Course Outcomes:  To utilize the comprehensive knowledge about the script writing involved in the high standard media productions.  The students will have the ability to contribute for the media industry in the field of editing.  The student will be equipped as an entrepreneur.

U

ni

ve

Course Description: History Of The Film Editing - Silent Period - Experiments in Editing – Alfred Hitchcock - Objective of Editing -Editing for the Genre- Understanding of The Footage: Basic Shot Types - Audio Quality Framing & Composition– 180 Degree Rule- Principles of Editing and Continuity: The Picture Edit and Continuity - Continuity: Continuity of Content – Continuity if Movement – Continuity of Position – Continuity of Sound- Continuity of Dialogue – Continuity of Performance - Timing – Rhythm – Time & Place.The Five Major Categories of Edit Types – Montage– Multi Camera Editing – Sync Sound and Counting Time – Digital Work Flow – Role Assistant Editor – CaseStudy on best edited films.

ru

ny

a

References: 1. Ken Dancyger, “The Technique of Film & Video Editing”, Focal press, 2011 2. Roy Thompson, Christropher J Bowen “Grammar of Edit”, Focal press,2009 3. Walter Murch, “In the Blink of an Eye: A Perspective on Film Editing”, Silman-James Press,2003 4. KarelReisz,Gavin Millar, “Technique of Film Editing”, 2nd Edition, Focal press, 2010 5. Robert M. Goodman,Patrick McGrath, “Editing Digital Video : The Complete 6.Creative and Technical Guide”, McGraw- Hill, 2003 6. Edward Dmytryk,“On Film Editing: An Introduction to the Art of Film Construction”, butterworth Heinemann, 1984

Ka

14VC2029 ILLUSTRATION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2013 Principles and techniques of design

(Version 1.1)

Course Objectives:  To create interest on illustrations.  To provide various techniques for the students to convert their ideas into illustrations.  To transform illustrations/exercises into media projects.

Course Outcomes:  The students will be able to create a media project of their choice.  The students will be able to discover new design techniques for their creative projects.  The students will be able to develop their portfolio innovatively.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

Course Description: Through illustrations students will convey messages, storytelling through pictures, learning the nuances of sketching while practicing drawing, transferring the messages pictorially Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Directorand notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2030 VIDEO PRODUCTION LAB (Version 1.1)

rs ity

Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite : 14VC2019 Elements of Film and Video 14VC2015 Screenplay and Script writing 14VC2024 TV program production

a

U

ni

ve

Course Objectives:  To teach the student the intricate process involved in production of various genres of videos.  To enable the student to choose the right type of shots to get the story across to the audience.  To make a student understand the problems one faces during the creation of a video project help him find solutions.

Course Outcomes:  The students will be able to deliver better projects.  The students will be able to portray the scenes conceived in their mind. The choice of framing by the students will be better.

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes making a video with a concept such as Documentary, Short film, Advertisements by learning types of shots and angles.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

(Version 1.1)

ru

ny

14VC2031 VIDEO POST PRODUCTION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Corequisite: 14VC2028 Editing Techniques 14VC2024 TV Program Production

Ka

Course Objectives:  To help students learn and develop the editing sense required to create good projects.  To help students identify and rectify problems in the footage.  To help students to learn basic tricks of the edit.

Course Outcomes:  The editing sense of the student will improve, as they would have edited hours of footage.  The students would be able to make use of the software in a professional manner.  The sense of choosing the right transitions would be better.

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes to learn the basic user interface of video editing software and to roughcut the videos and also to add transitions with the footages Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Directorand notify it at the beginning of each semester.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

ve

rs ity

14VC2032 - PHOTOGRAPHY LIGHTING LAB Credits: 0:0:1 (Version 1.1) Co-Requisite: 14VC2019 Elements of film and video 14VC2020 Creative Photography Techniques Course Objectives:  To distribute knowledge on the various lighting techniques in photography to the industry level.  To provide a solid foundation of the visual and technical skills necessary to pursue and appreciate photography further.  To utilize natural light, available light, external camera flashlight, studio strobe light and evaluate the effect they have on the mood of the image.

Course Outcomes:  The students will learn to Implement the technical aspects of lighting, light ratio, continuous/flash light, hand-held light meter and exposure control  Interpret in-camera reflected light meter readings  Use various lighting techniques to improve their photography as a medium of personal expression.

ni

Course Description: The Experiments will include digital photography and lighting Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 6 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director andnotify it at the beginning of each semester.

U

14VC2033 3D ANIMATION SOFTWARE Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ru

ny

a

Course Objectives:  To learn the latest animation techniques.  To introduce to various animation software’s.  To introduce the components in each software.

Course Outcomes:  The students will be able to learn different animation softwares  Latest Animation techniques will be known to students  The making of a complete animation will be clearly understand.

Ka

Course Description: Maya : Workspace – Polygon Modeling – Nurbs, Subdivision Modeling – Shading and Texturing Animation -Lighting – Rendering.3ds Max: Introducing Objects – Creating shapes with splines – Editing meshes and creating complex objects – Light and Shadow – Enhancing models with materials – Using the camera – Organizing objects and scene management – Animation – Particles and Dynamics – Rigging – RenderingCinema4D: The fundamentals – Super Modeling – Deformers – Cameras – Lighting – Materials – Rendering –Lighting – MoGraph – Dynamics.

References: 1. John Edgar Park, “Understanding 3D Animation Using Maya”, Springer 2007.

2. Dariush Derakhshani, “Introducing Autodesk Maya 2013”, John Wiley & Sons, 2012.

3. Catherine Winder, “Producing Animation”, Focal Press, 2011.

4. Jeffrey Harper, “Mastering Autodesk 3ds Max 2013”, John Wiley & Sons, 2012.

5. Simon Russell, “Cinema 4D R14 Cookbook”, Packt Publishing Ltd, 2013.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2034 3D ANIMATION TOOLS AND APPLICATION Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To identify and utilize the tools available in Maya for Animation.  To provide students with a strong foundation on Animating skills with the use of Maya.  To carry out Animations using various tools in Maya through studio practices.

Course Outcomes:  Ability to use advanced animation tools to apply design techniques creatively. The students will have sound knowledge with tools for animation using Maya.  Students will be enabled to create and develop character animating skills.  Students will be enabled to create a character animation portfolio using Maya.

ny

a

U

ni

ve

Course Description: Basic animation techniques in Maya – Path animation - Character Design – 3D modeling –Skeletons : Jointorientation – Kinematics – inverse kinematics – Spline IK solver – deformers – blending with deformers - Lattice deformers- cluster deformers – Jiggle- non-linear deformers – Sine- Squash - twistwave - Binding Skeleton: Various techniques – Rigid binding – smooth binding – indirect binding – Animation: Posing - Character sets – control nodes – Constraints – Walk cycle: non-linear animation – Refining motion – Facial Animation – Blend tools– Integration – Rendering .

References: 1. Brooks, Susan-Belle Ferguson and Lisa Ford, “Character Setup”, version 4, Alias|Wavefront, 2011.

2. Perry Harovas, John Kundert-Gibbs and Peter Lee , “Mastering MAYA Complete 2”, SYBEX, Inc, 2010.

3. Shamus Culhane, “Animation: From Script to Screen”, St. Martin's Press, 2008.

4. Harold Whitaker, “Timing for Animation”, Focal Press 2008 5. Hans Bacher, “Dream Worlds: Production Design for Animation”, 2007.

(Version 1.1)

ru

14VC2035 CREATIVE SUIT LAB-I Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2013 Principles and Techniques of Design

Ka

Course Objectives:  To introduce the creative skills to the students.  To introduce the basics elements of design.  To improve the quality of the design based outputs of the student.

Course Outcomes:  The students would learnt designing software.  The students would be able to efficiently create designs using the software.  Students can produce the designing package.

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes designing in Software such as photoshop, crowldraw in design/ Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2036 PRINCIPLES OF ANIMATION Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To acquire and understand the principles and techniques of animation.  To bring exposure towards character design and Figurative animation concepts.  To facilitate with advance skill sets to produce an animation sequence.

Course Outcomes:  The students will acquire foundational principles of animation and will be able to retell them.  The students will be able to formulate their animation projects with the traditional principles of animation.  The students will be able to differentiate each animation principle.

ni

ve

Course Description: Basic formation of shapes - Types of animation- Principles: Timing in animation - Laws of motion Pose-to-poseand straight-ahead - Keys and in-betweens - Overlapping action, follow-through and drag Arcs and curves, and line of action - Cycle animation - Figurative Animation: four ‘A’s of animation Walks and runs - Weight and balance – Anticipation – Acting – Characterization - Temperament and pace - Character interaction - Planning a scene - Props and costume – Storyboards - Character design – Design criteria - Animals in Motion - Embedding videoSound Synchronization - Formats : Video or Film.

ny

a

U

References: 1. Chris Webster, “Animation: The Mechanics of Motion”, Focal Press, 2011.

2. Angie Jones, “Thinking Animation”, Thomson, 2006.

3. Tony White, “How to make animated films”, Focal Press, 2013.

4. Webster Chris, Animation: The Mechanics of Motion. Oxford: Focal Press, 2008.

5. Hans Bacher, “Dream Worlds: Production Design for Animation”, Focal Press, 2009.

14VC2037 SOUND FOR ANIMATION

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Ka

ru

Course Objectives:  To provide insights into the basics of sound theory and design with relevance to animation.  To demonstrate the basic concepts in recording dialogue, music, sound effects and foley.  To explore the various steps involved in capturing, editing and mixing of sounds.

Course Outcomes:  Students will be able to appraise the need for sound design for animation.  Students will be able to set up, test and troubleshoot a basic recording rig for foley and effects creation.  Students will be able examine the techniques on sound editing, mixing and mastering and employ them in their own productions.

Course Description: Sound design theory – classifications, narrative functions, interpreting picture edits, Dialogue – principal dialogue,narration, group ADR and Walla, developing script, casting talent, caricature, recording dialogue, Music – underscore, source music, songs, title, montage and end Credits sequence, Sound Effects – the SFX stem, SFX libraries, developing libraries, Foley – Foley stage, spotting Foley, Foley

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

artist, Foley editing, Sound editing – Synchronization, timing and cutting, fades, compositing, time, pitch, speed, noise reduction- Final Mix- stereo mix- multi channel mix, mastering.

rs ity

References: 1. Robin Beauchamp, “Designing Sound for Animation”, Focal Press, 2nd edition, 2013.

2. Rebecca Coyle, “Drawn to Sound: Animation Film Music and Sonicity”, 2010.

3. Emily Angelina Shurtz , "Stopping the Show": Early Sound Animation, Spectacle, and the Cinema of Attractions”, Umi Dissertation Publishing, 2012.

4. Tony Fabbri, “Animation, Games and Sound for the I. B. M. Personal Computer”, Prentice Hall, 1983.

5. Vanessa Theme Ament, “The Foley Grail: The Art of Performing Sound for Film, Games, and Animation” Focal Press, 2009.

14VC2038 VISUAL EFFECTS FOR ANIMATION Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

U

ni

ve

Course Objectives:  To prepare and equip students with specialized skills, knowledge and aptitude to work in animation field.  To list and demonstrate the skillful use of the tools and principles in visual effects.  To develop students’ skill in the use of digital tools and creative software.

Course Outcomes:  The student will have a solid understanding of basic animation & Visual effects.  The students will have discovered and sharpened their design skills and techniques using a variety of tools.  To student will be able to create experimental combinations of computer graphics with real world footage.

ru

ny

a

Course Description: Visual Effects- Description- Types - Particles – Animation – Composting – Full 3D composting environment –Advanced visual effects tools – keying, color correction, tracking, grain management masking Designing Special Effects – Designing effects of Hair and shape – Designing Glow Effects – Designing Fur Effects - Visual Effects Tool and advanced functions– Converting images from 2D to 3D Pictures.

Ka

References: 1. Richard Rickitt, “Special Effects: The History and Technique”, 2nd edition, Billboard Books, 2007.

2. Ron Brinkman,“The Art and Science of Digital Compositing”, 2nd Edition,Morgan Kaufmann, 2008.

3. Isaac V. Kerlow, “The Art of 3-D Computer Animation and Imaging”, 2012.

4. Isaac V.Kerlow, “The Art of 3D Computer Animation and Effects”, 4th Edition, 2009.

5. Steve Wright, “ Compositing Visual Effects”, Focal Press, 2012.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2039 ANIMATION IN ADVERTISING Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  This course is to enhance the skills development in modeling, materials development, camera placement, lighting, effective composition, storyboarding, and animation techniques.  Students will be exposed to number of different latest animation principles used in advertising industry.  To inculcate the importance of animation principles crafted for marketing/advertising industry.

Course Outcomes:  The students will be able to choose their own animation technique based on the nature of their advertisement.  Students can develop creative skills in portraying a non-organic (product) in animation.  Students will also demonstrate their knowledge gained in scripting for animation for an advertisement.

ni

ve

Course Description: Introduction to Animation-story-storyboard design -character and properties development -background design-colour-layout-scene planning- animation principals and techniques used to create 2D and 3D animation, while synchronizing image and sound-CGI production-types of animation-production phasesunderstanding of advertising- animation need in advertising-understanding of product-audience selectiontarget audience-selection of script – utilization of animation –understanding of industry need.

ny

a

U

References 1. Pricken, “Visual Creativity: Inspirational Ideas for Advertising, Animation and Digital Design”, Thames and Hudson, 2004 2. Jean Ann Wrigh , “Animation Writing and Development: From Script Development to Pitch”,focal press2010.

3. Kathy Furgan, “Careers in Digital Animation” , focal press2010.

4. Nik Mahon, “Basics Advertising 02: Art Direction”, AVA publishing,SA 2010.

5. John Vince, “Essential Computer Animation”, Springer UK , First Edition 2000.

14VC2040 2D ANIMATION PRODUCTION (Version 1.1)

ru

Credits: 3:0:0

Ka

Course Objectives:  To introduce the features of Adobe Flash.  To deduce the concept of 2D Animation using Flash.  To provide practical experience in Adobe flash.

Course Outcomes:  The students will learn the techniques of 2D animation in Adobe Flash.  The students will be able to create their own animation projects in Adobe Flash.  The students will demonstrate their creative knowledge in 2D Flash animations and special effects.

Course Description: The Project Plan - Libraries - Storyboards and Animatics - Setting Up Your FLA - Plug-ins and Extensions- Frameby Frame Animation-Animating With Tweens- Animation Special Effects - Why Use After Effects?-After Effects and Camera Mechanics - Making Flash Not Look Like Flash - Tips and

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

Tricks -The Principles of Animation and persistence of vision - Squash and Stretch – Kinematics - Choice of character - Character design – Anticipation - Straight Ahead and Pose to Pose - Follow through and overlapping action – Timeline - The walk cycle -Digitizing and compiling the frames – Applications 2D animation.

rs ity

References: 1. Tim Jones Barry J. Kelly Allan S. Rosson David Wolfe, “Foundation Flash Cartoon Animation”, Friends O Fed, aprèss company, 2007 2. Steve Roberts, “Character Animation: 2D skills for better 3D”, Focal Press, 2007.

3. Chris Webster, “Animation: The Mechanics of Motion”, Focal press, 2005.

4. Catherine Winder , “Producing Animation”, Focal Press, 2011.

5. Angie Jones, “Thinking Animation”, Thomson , 2006 14VC2041 LIGHTING AND TEXTURING Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

U

ni

ve

Course Objectives:  To analyze recognize the process of perception in the human eye.  To introduce the concepts of light, its transmission through mediums and the shadows.  To define and help students comprehend the concepts of shaders and materials with relevance to their interaction with light.

Course Outcomes:  The students will understand different types of lights and their effective implementation with relevance to various scenarios.  The students will be able to creatively light a complete 3D model.  The students will be able to apply and experiment various photography and cinematography techniques on their animation to get photorealistic results.

ru

ny

a

Course Description: Nature of Light - The Physiology of Seeing and Perception – Anatomy of the Eye – Light Pathways in the Eye –Processing Visual Information – Sensing Movement – The Seven Eye Movements – The Vestibular System –Monocular Cues – Fundamentals of Photography and Cinematography – Colors and Materials – Computer Graphics– Basic Lighting Techniques – Applied Lighting Techniques – Lighting Situations Materials – Shaders – Material creation Interfaces – Image Maps and Procedural Maps - Light Surfaces – Complex Materials – Mapping and Unwrapping - Rendering

Ka

References: 1. Emalee Beddoes, “3ds Max Projects”, 3D Total Publishing, 2014.

2. Lee Lanier, “Advanced Maya Texturing and Lighting”, Wiley Publishing, 2008.

3. Lee Lanier, “Maya Studio Projects: Texturing and Lighting”, Sybex , 2011.

4. Jeremy Birn, “Digital Lighting and Rendering”, New Riders, 2013 5. Ami Chopine, “3D Art Essentials: The Fundamentals of 3D Modeling, Texturing, and Animation”, Taylor & Francis, 2011.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2042 RENDERING TECHNIQUES Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To understand and learn rendering techniques in Maya.  To learn various techniques of Maya rendering.  To expertise in Rendering through practical practices.

Course Outcomes:  The students will learn have sound knowledge Shading and texturing in Maya.  The students will also be capable to develop various scenarios of Lighting.  The students will be able to explain the whole rendering process of Maya.

ve

Course Description: Rendering: Basics of Rendering - Rendering an Object: the Camera and the Resolution Creating, Connecting,&Accessing nodes – RenderMenu – EditingRenderingAttributes – RenderGlobal – HardwareRenderingAttributes - Working in the Render ViewMenus – Interactive Photorealistic Rendering (IPR) - Shading the Object - SurfaceRendering - Convert ToFile Texture - MaterialAttributes – SurfaceMaterials - Displacement Material – CreatingBackgrounds – Depth of Field - Partial Image Rendering -LayeredTextures – Utilities: Glow, Color, Switch- Batch Rendering– Different Passes for Final composition

a

U

ni

References: 1. Jeremy Birn, “Digital Lighting and Rendering”, 3rd edition, New Rider, 2013.

2. Tomas Akenine-Moller, Eric Haines and Naty Hoffman, “Real-Time Rendering”, 3rd edition, 2008.

3. Roger Cusson, Jamie Cardoso, “Realistic Architectural Rendering”, Focal Press, 2009.

4. Wolfgang Engel, “ GPU Pro 4: Advanced Rendering Techniques”, Taylor & Francis, 2013.

5. Brian Bradley, “Photographic Rendering with V- Ray for sketch up”, Packt, 2014.

ny

14VC2043 3D MODELING

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Ka

ru

Course Objectives:  To identify and utilize concepts involved in creating animations.  To classify various techniques for 3D modeling.  To build and to develop modeling skills by practical exercises.

Course Outcomes:  Ability to model and design animations based algorithms to meet desired needs of industries.  Ability to estimate and formulate latest Modeling techniques involved in animation  Students will be enabled to develop various styles of modeling.

Course Description: Modeling Basics:Pick-Masking – Snapping Freeze Transformations– Primitives - NURBS Modeling:Curve andSurface - Editing Curves: Creating Surfaces – Lofting- Extrude - Planar, Text, and Bevel – Boundary - Editing Surfaces: - Attach and Detach - Isoparms and Aligning Surfaces - Extend and Offset Surfaces - Trim and Round - Round and Fillet - Polygon Modeling: Faces - Solids, Shells, and UV - Extruding and Duplicating – Boolean -Combining, Extracting, and Separating – Splitting - Smoothing and Sculpting - Introduction – basic interface - the fundamentals of 3D modeling – polygons – NURBS – sub division surface – character set up – Basic texturing.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

rs ity

References: 1. Perry Harovas, John Kundert-Gibbs and Peter Lee , “Mastering MAYA Complete 2”, SYBEX, Inc, 2000.

2. Ami Chopne, “ 3D art Essentials: The Fundamentals of 3D Modelling,texturing and animation” Taylor & Francis, 2011 3. William Vaughan, “Digital Modeling”, New Riders, 2011.

4. Nikos Sarris, Michael G. Strintzis, “ 3D Modeling and Animation: Synthesis and Analysis Techniques for the Human Body”, Idea Group Inc (IGI), 2005 5. John Vince, “3D Handbook of Computer Animation”, Springer,2002 14VC2044 3D ANIMATION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2033 3D Animation Software

(Version 1.1)

U

ni

ve

Course Objectives:  To train the students in the area of 3D Animation and its software application.  To make the students understand the process of 3D animation production in studios.  The students will be trained in the area of character designing and concept designing in 3D Animation.

Course Outcomes:  Students will be well equipped with all the basic animation concepts practically which helps them in doing character modelling, lighting, texturing and animations  Students will gain hands on experience in the use of Maya for animation.  They will learn 3D animation and advanced modelling and rendering techniques.

ny

a

Course Description: The Experiments will include maya interface tools rendering camera and animation techniques.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

(Version 1.1)

ru

14VC2045 2D ANIMATION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2040 2D Animation Production

Ka

Course Objectives:  This course introduces students to digital 2D animation techniques and processes through handson lab projects.  To develop the skills in using a 2D authoring software.  This course emphasis is on creative content, experimentation, and critical thinking.

Course outcome  The students will explore contemporary trends in animation and character design  The students will apply various creative techniques to move 2D objects.  This lab exposes students to tools such as Adobe After Effects and Flash.

Course Description: Experiments will include Flash Layout ,Motion Tween ,Shape tweening Motion guide using Flash Basic effects in Adobe after effects

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2046 CINEMATOGRAPHY Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ve

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To teach the students how to be a visual story teller  To impart understanding in relevant terminology in Cinematography  To develop an understanding of composition through lighting, camera, and color.

Course Outcomes:  Students will gain knowledge and experience in cinematographic practices  Students will learn to write and direct their own films and learn about all areas of production  Students will get a complete understanding of issues relating to exposure, f-stops, focal length, composition, digital cinema workflows, and color correction.

ni

Course Description: Camera Angle – Scene, Shot & Sequence –Types of Camera Angles – Subject size, Subject Angle & Camera Height– Scene requirements Continuity – Cinematic Time & Space – Filming the Action – Scene Direction – Different types of Action Axis – Cutting – Types of Editing – Sound Flow – Close Ups – Extreme, Over the Shoulder, Types of close ups – Composition – Still vs. Motion Picture Composition – Composition Rules –Balance, Unity & Eye Scan – Framing

ny

a

U

References: 1. Joseph V.Mascelli, “The 5Cs of Cinematography”, Silman-James Press, 2001.

2. Ivan Cury, “Directing & Producing for Television”, Focal Press, 2007.

3. David Stump, “Digital Cinematography Techniques”, Focal Press, 2014.

4. Kris Malkiewicz, “Cinematography”, Simon & Sehuster, 2005.

5. Sonja Schenk & Ben Long, “The Digital Filmmaking Handbook”, Course Technology, 2012.

14VC2047 FILM APPRECIATION

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Ka

ru

Course Objectives:  To explore and examine the art of watching and appreciating films  To imbue insights on analyzing different genres of films  To practice the art of culling out various film parameters and appreciating them Course Outcomes:  The students can carry out the art of appreciating and analysing films  The students will become as good learners of films  The students will acquire skills to interpret film theories and the art of watching films Course Description: Film Appreciation – Social, Political, Economic, Cultural, Technical and Aesthetic aspects of Film – Characteristicsof Films –Appreciation of Film Genres – Appreciation of Mise-en-Scene in Films – Appreciation of Italian Neo- realism – Appreciation of German Expressionism – Appreciation of French New Wave – Appreciation of Soviet Montage – Appreciation of works of International filmmakers(The lab exercise will focus on appreciating selected films on various genres from popular international and national filmmakers)

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

rs ity

References: 1. David Bordwell& Kristin Thompson, “Film Art An Introduction”, 8th edition, McGraw Hill, 2008.

2. James Monaco, “How to read a film”, Oxford University Press, 2009.

3. Maria Pramaggiore& Tom Wallis, “ Film A Critical Introduction”, 2nd edition, Pearson, 2008.

4. James Donald, Micheal Renov, “The SAGE Handbook of Film Studies”, Sage Publications, 2008 .

5. Wheeler Winston Dixon, “Cinema at the Margin”, Anthem Press, 2014.

14VC2048 PERFORMING ART Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ni

ve

Course Objectives:  To get acquainted with various nuances of stage performance.  To get acquainted with research mechanism and treatment of ideas to develop script  To learn various aspects of set designing and creation Course Outcomes:  The students are able to understand the various formats and learn to make value based productions to create greater social impact.  The students obtain the skills to plan and implement various stages of production.  The students get the skills to evaluate the production design.

ny

a

U

Course Description: Fundamentals of Production – Telling story in images–subjectivity-Using sound to tell story- Explore characterization- Dramatize the story – Writing short screen play – Developing substance and styleVisualizing strategies- Dramatic strategies.-Approaches to Plot - – Camera and lighting Equipments – Sound Equipments planning – – Art and set preparations - Casting – Art direction- shooting preparation – Camera features – continuity Shooting techniques – Nonlinear editing.

Ka

ru

References: 1. Martin Esslin , “Theatre of the Absurd”, , Blumsbury publications 2003 2. Zetti , “Video Production techniques”, Focal Press ,2002 3. Joseph V. Mascelli, “ The five C’s of Cinematography”, , Silman James press2000 4. Pat cooper and Ken Dancyger, “ Writing the Short film”, Focal Press 2005 1 Ken Dancyger, “The Technique of Film and Video editing” Focal Press Vth edit 2011 5. Paul Wheeler, “High Definition Cinematography”, Focal Press, 3rd edit (2009)

14VC2049 TYPES OF PHOTOGRAPHY

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:  To explore the major categories and sub categories of Photography  To identify the various techniques and skill used for each type of Photography  To explain the uniqueness of each type and its application.

Course Outcomes:  The students can explore the type of photography which appeals to them.  The students can apply the skills learnt in their chosen area of Photography.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

(Version 1.1)



The students can utilize their skills in identifying the equipment required to capture the type of photograph needed.

rs ity

Course Description: Various applications in photography – Action, Ariel, Architectural, Astronomical, Black & White, Candid, Children, Event, Forensic, Fashion, Food, Glamour, Infrared, Landscape, Long Exposure, Macro, Micro, Medical,Model, Nature, Night, Panoramic, Portrait, Street, Still Life, Sports, Spy, Time-Lapse, Travel, Table Top, Industrial, Ultra Violet, Under-water, Wildlife, Wedding Photography – Challenges & Constraints in each type – Special photographic equipment & accessories needed – Legal & ethical issues – Ways to market photographs.

ve

References: 1. Daniel Lezano, “Photography Bible”, Focal Point, 2001.

2. Tom Ang, “Digital Photography Master class”, DK publication, 2008 3. Scot Kelby, “ Digital Photography Book – Part 2 ”,Kindle Edition, 2010 4. David Bailey, George Hughes, “Book of Photography”, Kindle Edition, 2010 5. Michel Freeman, “The Pro Photographer’s D-SLR Handbook, Atlantic Publishers, 14VC2050 LIVE SOUND Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ny

a

U

ni

Course Objectives:  To portray how indoor & outdoor public address system functions in different environments.  To illustrate the behaviour of sound in a variety of acoustic environments.  To demonstrate the techniques for optimally handling equipment to give clarity in speech & music performance.

Course Outcomes:  The students will be able to plan, coordinate, execute and troubleshoot a live sound reinforcement system for a variety of scenarios.  They will be able to deliver good quality audio to the audience by choosing the right equipments & tweaking the listening area for optimum presentation of sound.  They will recognize the functions of every equipment in the signal chain and will be able to guide their subordinates while rigging the system.

Ka

ru

Course Description: Sound Reinforcement System Basics – Public Address System requirements – Miking Techniques used – Mixersused for LSR – Amplifier Specification and selection – Signal Processors used for LSR – Loudspeaker Specification and Selection – Stage Miking – Instrument Miking - Stage Rack – Cabling – Mixing for LSR – Monitoring – Speaker Calibration – Handling Feedback – Introduction to Line Array Systems References: 1. Paul White, “Basic Live Sound”, Sanctuary Publications, 2003.

2. Gary Davis, Ralph Jones, “Sound Reinforcement Handbook”, Hal Leonard Corporation, 2nd Edition, 2000 3. F. Alton Everest, “Master Handbook of Acoustics”, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill Publishing, 2001 4. Frederick N Martin, John Greer N Clark, “Introduction to Audiology”, 9th Edition, 2003 5. Michael Talbot-Smith, “Sound Engineering Explained”, 2nd Edition, Focal Press, 2002.

6. Douglas Self, Richard Brice, Ben Duncan, John Linsley Hood, Ian Sinclair, Andrew Singmin, Don Davis, Eugene Patronis, John Watkinson, “ Audio Engineering”, Focal Press, 2009.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2051 WRITING DIRECTING AND PRODUCING DOCUMENTARY FILM Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To analyze the basic elements of Documentary Storytelling, the various approaches involved in Documentary structure.  To examine the research mechanism and treatment of ideas to transform into script.  To relate the techniques of Documentary production and editing.

Course Outcomes:  Student recognize and apply the various formats make Professional Documentary to create social impact  Student will be efficient in documentary production.  Student will be able to evaluate documentary films.

ni

ve

Course Description: Documentary writing - subset of Non-fiction film and video –subjectivity in story telling-story basicsDramaticstory-telling- Documentary story – Evaluation Story ideas – Developing the story – shots for documentry- Approaches in documenting –Archival Film making – Docu-Drama – 3act structure – applying film structure – Documentary research basics –Types of researches – Casting – Hosts and Narrators – Documentary proposal writing– Outlining the cast – Treatment of roles – Basic Equipments– Camera features – camera shots-shooting with story in mind -Documentary Sequence – Imagination and editing– Principles of Documentary editing.

ny

a

U

References: 1. Sheila Curran Bernard, “Documentary Storytelling” , Focal Press , (2007) 2. Keb Dancyger , “The Technique of Film and Video editing”, Focal Press Vth edit(2011) 3. Paul Wheeler , “Digital Cinematography”, Focal press (2005) 4. Paul Wheeler , “High Definition Cinematography”, Focal Press IIIrd edition (2009) 5. Joseph V Mascelli, “Principles of cinematography”.Silman James press,2000

14VC2052 INDIAN CULTURE AND LIBERAL ARTS (Version 1.1)

ru

Credits: 3:0:0

Ka

Course Objectives:  To get acquainted with Liberal arts.  To explore liberal arts in Indian Cultural Context.  To ascertain the changes in media contexts.

Course Outcomes:  The students will get acquainted with Liberal arts.  The students will be taught various streams of Indian cultural thoughts.  the students will be able to link Indian culture with current media trends.

Course Description: Reason and Speech – Intellectual Inquiry and Social Engagement – Liberal Arts and Moral Improvement – Landand People – Values and Attitudes – Customs and Traditions – Family – Timeout – Communicating – Media Development and Mixed Messages – Liberalization, Diversity and the Age of Television – Digital India: Software, Services and Cyber Cultures – Media Provision and Soft Power.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

rs ity

References: 1. 1.Bruce A. Kimball, “The Liberal Arts Tradition: A documented History”, University Press of America, 2. 2010.

3. Becky Stephen, “India – Culture Smart: The Essential Guide to Customs and Culture” Kuperard, 2010 4. Adrian Athique, “Indian Media: Global Media and Communication”, Polity, 2012.

5. De Fleur, Melvin L., Dennis, “Understanding Mass Communication”: A Liberal Arts Perspective, 6. Huoghton Mifflin, 2001.

7. Mark William Roche, “Why Choose the Liberal Arts?” University of Notre Dame Press, 2010.

14VC2053 FILM TECHNIQUES AND AESTHETICS Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

U

ni

ve

Course Objectives:  To prepare students to participate in a world increasingly shaped by moving pictures.  To provide the basics of filming.  To encourage students to create and analyze moving images, to produce research, and to make art.

Course Outcomes:  Students will demonstrate that the critical study of cinema informs their filmmaking and that the study and practice of film production enhances their work as film scholars and analysts.  Students will demonstrate that they understand the pre-production, production, and post production film making process  Students will demonstrate the relationship between film form and aesthetic effect through both film analysis and the creation of motion pictures

ru

ny

a

Course Description: The Shot: Mise-en-Scene-Aspects of Mise-en-Scene -Setting - Costume and Makeup-Lighting . Staging: Movementand Performance -Mise-en-Scene in Space and Time- Space - Time - Narrative Functions of Mise-en-Scene. The Shot: Cinematography -The Photographic Image.Framing : Angle, Level, Height, and Distance of Framing - The Mobile Frame. Duration of the Image: The Long Take . Editing: Dimensions of Film Editing - Graphic Relations - Rhythmic Relations - Spatial Relations - Temporal Relations Between– ContinuityEditing. Spatial Continuity: The180" System -Crosscutting .Temporal Editing: Order, Frequency and Duration. SoundinCinema:The Powers ofSound - Fundamentals of Film Sound -Dimensions of Film Sound.

Ka

References: 1. David Bordwell Kristin Thompson , “FILM ART AN INTRODUCTION”, Eighth edition, McGraw Hill,2008 2. Andrew H. Utterback, “Studio Television Production And Directing”, Focal Press, 2007.

3. Jeremy Orlebar, “DIGITAL TELEVISION PRODUCTION”, Arnold publishers, 2002.

4. David Bordwell& Kristin Thompson, “Film Art An Introduction”, 8th edition, McGraw Hill, 2008.

5. Maria Pramaggiore& Tom Wallis, “ Film A Critical Introduction”, 2nd edition, Pearson, 2008.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2054 LIGHTING FOR DIGITAL VIDEO Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To distribute knowledge on the various lighting techniques in video production to the industry level.  To provide a solid foundation of the visual and technical skills necessary to pursue and appreciate digital video production and film making further.  To utilize natural light, available light, fluorescent, LED and tungsten based studio lights and evaluate the effect they have on the mood of the video.

Course Outcomes:  The students will implement the technical aspects of lighting.  The students will interpret in-camera reflected light meter.  The students will be improvised in using various lighting techniques.

U

ni

ve

Course Description: Importance of lighting for Television and Video: Exposure- Contrast- Human Vision, the Camera, and Exposure-Controlling Contrast- Controlling Color-The Kelvin Scale-Volts, Amps, and Watts - Determine the Load- Standard Connectors. Lighting Instruments- Lensed - Fluorescent –Soft lights-Cookies and Snack Boxes -Lighting Controls and Uses –Gels- Diffusion Materials- Nets and Silks. Basic Lighting Techniques :Interview Setups- Basic Three- Point Interview Setup-Different Color Temperatures in the Scene-Studio Lighting-Advanced Lighting Setups- Lighting Darkness-Lighting Low-Budget LocationsSpecialized Lighting -Product Shots- Food Shots-Automobile Interiors-Bluescreen and GreenscreenLighting the Background& Foreground- Imagination and Invention.

ru

ny

a

References: 1. John Jackman, “LIGHTING for DIGITAL VIDEO & TELEVISION”, CMP books, 2005 2. Billy Pegram, “LIGHTING TECHNIQUES”, Amherst Media, Inc., 2009.

3. Christopher Grey, “Masters lighting guide”, AMHERST MEDIA, INC., 2010.

4. R.Craig Wolf & Dick Block , “Scene Design and Stage Lighting”, Wadsworth, 10th Edition, 2013.

5. Des Lyver,Graham Swansong, “Basic of the video lighting”, Elsevier, 2005.

6. Blain Brown,“Cinematography: Theory and Practice: Image Making for Cinematographers and Directors”,Focal Press, 2012.

14VC2055 VISUAL EFFECTS

Ka

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Course Objectives:  To provide students with an understanding of the fundamental issues, technologies and techniques involved in post production work.  To enable students to appreciate the complexities of integrating computer generated images and animations with real footage.  To provide students with the necessary knowledge and skills to undertake core compositing work.

Course Outcomes:  Students will gain an applied understanding of the principles of composite work  It creates the ability to apply and justify the use of common compositing techniques to create animation/video sequences  To obtain the knowledge of the concepts behind current compositing approaches.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

Course Description: Special effect categories - In the camera effects - Physical effects. Visual effects - Make-up effects Atmospheric effects - Miniature effects - Computer generated effects -Color and contrast change - Slot gags – sharp – dissolve -corner pins- wraps and 2D morphs - Particle and fluid simulation –Elements of Design - Depth of Field – KeyingConcepts Continued Grouping - Subcomps and Rendering Techniques

14VC2056 DIRECTION

(Version 1.1)

ve

Credits: 3:0:0

rs ity

References: 1. Steve Wright “Compositing Visual Effects”, 3rd Edition, 2010 2. Steve Wright “Digital Compositing for Film and Video”, 3rd Edition, 2010.

3. Filming the Fantastic: A Guide to Visual Effects Cinematography, Second Edition by Mark Sawicki, 2007 4. Shilo T. McClean , “Digital Storytelling: The Narrative Power of Visual Effects in Film ,2007

U

ni

Course Objectives:  To provide students with a strong foundation in the dramatic structure of storytelling.  To develop the students as Professional with moral and ethics value.  To equip the student in the leadership skills which able the student to lead the planning and execution of film direction.

Course Outcomes:  To acquire the skill of crafting the complex story telling involved in direction.  The graduates will demonstrate ethical responsibilities for the society through the direction.  To make the student effective team player in media productions.

ru

ny

a

Course Description: Direction – action techniques – elements of direction. – principles of direction. Planning and performance- rolesand responsibilities of direction- skills and techniques related to performance and direction- rehearsal – location scouting- evaluation of different styles of direction. Ethics and moral responsibility in direction- Artistic identity and drama – Screencraft – The story and its development – Aesthetics and Authorship – What Do Directors Direct?– How to Direct the Eyes? – How to Convey and Suggest Meaning

Ka

References: 1. Michael Rabiger, “Directing, Fourth edition”, Focal Press, 2008.

2. Francis Glebas, “Directing the Story”, Focal Press, 2009.

3. Nicholas T. Proferes, “Film Directing Fundamentals”, Third edition, Focal Press, 2008.

4. Eden H. Wurmfeld & Nicole Shay Laloggia, “Independent Filmmaker’s Manual, Second edition”, Focal Press, 2004.

5. Ken Dancyger, “The Director’s Idea – The Path to Great Directing”, Focal Press, 2006.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2057 VISUAL EFFECTS LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2055 Visual Effects

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objective  To develop in students the foundation skills of the tools and techniques.  To specialize in the creation of 2D/3D computer animated elements for digital visual effects  To explore the different methods of particle effects.

Course Outcomes:  Students will use advanced graphics tools to create preliminary 3D graphical representations of environments, visual effects.  To create motion picture sequences that is visually and technically representative of final production imagery.  To acquire the practical methods of applying a visual effect.

ve

Course Description: The Experiments will include vfx trends and techniques which is used in industry.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

(Version 1.1)

U

ni

14VC2058 TELEVISION PRODUCTION LAB Credits: 0:0:1 Co-Requisite: 14VC2046 cinematography

ru

ny

a

Course objective  To Acquire knowledge and training in basic television studio production.  To highlight on producing and directing with training in various studio, control room, and functions.  Students are encouraged to do various television programmes.

Course outcome  Students will learn an understanding of operating television studio cameras.  Students will derive the duties of a technical director and basic responsibilities of a director.  Students will demonstrate of operating an audio board and testing microphones.

Ka

Course Description: Experiments based upon Elements of television production and TV Production Lab. Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 6 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director andnotify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2059 SOUND IN MEDIA

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:  To make students understand the significance of sound in media productions.  To enable students to creatively chose the sound requirements for different types of media.  To bridge the gap between technology and talent.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

Course Outcomes:  This course will enable students to understand the fundamental requirements for various types of audio in media.  This course will enable students to creatively envision production approaches for different types of audio production.  This course will enable students to respect technology and revere talents.

rs ity

Course Description: Sound and Hearing - Basic Considerations while miking speech: Acoustics in Speech Studio, Microphones forspeaking voice – Voice Over’s and Narration: Voice Acting, Recording Voice Overs, Narration – Recording Dialogue in muti and single camera production - Recording Dialogue in the field – Production Recording – Automated Dialogue Replacement – Miking for Interviews – Miking for News programs, Panel and Talk programs– Miking for Dramas – Sound for ENG – Sports broadcast – Music Underscoring – Music Recording – BGM

U

ni

ve

References: 1. Stanley R Alten, “Audio in Media”, Cengage Learning, 9th Edition, 2011 2. Frederick N Martin, John Greer N Clark, “Introduction to Audiology”, 9th Edition, 2003 3. Michael Talbot-Smith, “Sound Engineering Explained”, 2nd Edition, Focal Press, 2002.

4. Douglas Self, Richard Brice, Ben Duncan, John Linsley Hood, Ian Sinclair, Andrew Singmin, Don Davis, Eugene Patronis, John Watkinson, “ Audio Engineering”, Focal Press, 2009.

5. Stanley R Alten, “Recording and Producing Audio for Media”, 1st Edition, 2012

14VC2060 INTRODUCTION TO SOUND DESIGN Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ru

ny

a

Course Objectives:  To introduce to the students the process of sound design.  To demonstrate the interplay of frequencies which result in the creation of tones.  To evolve a creative bend of mind to think creatively in making new sound.

Course Outcomes:  Students will develop unique sound with tools available in audio studio.  Students will possess the skills to design the necessary sound effects to complement the Video.  Students will be able to apply their skill to design sound for full length films.

Ka

Course Description: Introduction to sound design, Script analysis, Listen for objects, actions, environments, emotions and transitions, Picture edit analysis, experimenting and inventing original sounds, Sound and narrative analysis, From vibration tosensation, From Sensation to perception, creating the space, time and tone characteristics, Inventing sound objects with spatial and temporal dimentions, Character identification, Case study of a Movie.

Reference book: 1. David Sonnenschein, “Sound Design: The Expressive Power of Music, Voice and Sound Effects in Cinema”, Michael Wiese productions, 2001.

2. Stanley R. Alten, “Audio in Media, Cengage Learning”, Ninth Edition, 2011.

3. Jay Beck, Tony Grajeda,Lowering the Boom: “Critical Studies in Film Sound Hardcover”, University of Illinois, 2008.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

4. Martin Russ , “Sound Synthesis and Sampling”, Focal Press, Third Edition, 2009.

14VC2061 VOICE IN CINEMA Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To discuss on the Basics of sound.  To provide basic knowledge of Voice Dubbing.  To illustrate Voice Recording Technique in Studio.

Course Outcomes:  The students will aquire knowledge on the basics of sound.  The students will develop skills in ADR and Voice dubbing.  The students will be able to judge the right techniques in Voice dubbing.

ve

Course Description: Introduction to Dialogues, analyzing the script, miking for recording dialogues, setting optimal levels, Voice acting,voiceovers, Narration, Recording dialogue in the field, Role of an editor in the Filming process, Screening and spoting sessions, Dialogue editing, Image , Depth, Perspective, damage repair, adding production FX, ADR, Syncing audio and video Preparing for the Mix, mixing, Film analysis-Terminator 2, Beauty and the Beast.

a

U

ni

References: 1. John Purcell, “Dialogue Editing for Motion Pictures”, Focal Press, 2007.

2. Tom Kenny , “Sound for Picture: Film Sound Through the 1990s”, Mix Books,2000.

3. ALTEN, “Audio in Media, Cengage Learning”, Nineth edition, 2011.

4. Jeffrey Fisher, Soundtrack Success: “A Digital Storyteller's Guide”, Cengage learning, 2012.

5. Harland Hogan and Jeffrey P. Fisher, “Voice Actor's Guide to Recording at Home and On the Road”, Cengagae Learning, 2009.

ny

14VC2062 RADIO PROGRAM PRODUCTION Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Ka

ru

Course Objectives:  To teach the students the fundamentals of Program production for radio.  To help them get acquainted with the Stages of content creation involved in Radio.  To help them to identify the importance of Script for producing a quality radio Program production.

Course Outcomes:  Students would have understood the basic concepts of Program production.  Students will have gained an insight in to creating quality scripts for radio.  Students will be able to Create and produce a Radio programme.

Course Content: Introduction to Radio as a Mass Medium – AM, FM, Online Radio, Visual radio, Satellite radio, Community Radio,Concept & Importance, Production elements of Radio programmes, Scriptwriting, Writing for Radio, Gathering, reporting and Compilation of News, Program styles, Radio Presentation Skills: Voice over techniques, Radio Production Techniques: Nature of sound, Sound recording techniques, Equipments, Post-production techniques on voice, music and effects, Computer in automation, Broadcasting Techniques, Production of radio content, Programcontent evaluation, Technical evaluation, Thematic evaluation, Radio marketing strategies.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

rs ity

References 1. Mencher. M., “Basic News Writing”, Sharma Books, 2008.

2. Jim Beaman, Program“Making for radio”, 2006.

3. Robert McLeish, “Radio Production”, 2005.

4. Lesiler &Flat lay, “Basic Business communication”. Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2004.

5. Peter Stewart, Essential Radio Skills: “How To Present A Radio Show”, A&C Black, 2006.

6. Carl Hausman, Frank Messere, Lewis O'Donnell, Philip Benoit, Modern Radio Production: “ProductionProgramming & Performance”, Cengage Learning, Ninth Edition, 2013.

14VC2063 SOUND FOR INTERACTIVE MEDIA Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ni

ve

Course Objectives:  To give a broad knowledge and understanding of basics of sound theory for interactive media.  To acquire basic understanding in music theory, and principles of sound design.  To discuss various aspects of sound in various environments.

Course Outcomes:  Students will demonstrate the concept learned by creating sound for interactive media.  Students will display comprehensive understanding on sound design in various interactive media.  Students will be able to do productions with MIDI.

a

U

Course Description: Music Theory for Sound Designers – music theory by design, fundamentals of music, major and minor scales,Principles of sound design – sound and image, impact of sound on image, the ear, sound perception and sensation, sound design pre-production, Sound design for web – audio on web, audio assets, audio implementation, Streaming and MIDI – media streaming, Introduction to MIDI, Sound in Various Environments - Virtual Sound Environments, Far Cry Game Editor, DirectMusic Producer.

ru

ny

References: 1. Joseph Cancellaro, “Exploring Sound Design for Interactive Media”, 2005.

2. William Duckworth, “Virtual Music: How the Web Got Wired for Sound”, 2005.

3. G.W. Childs, “Creating Music and Sound for Games” 2006.

4. Aaron Marks, “The Complete Guide to Game Audio: For Composers, Musicians, Sound Designers, Game Developers” 2008.

14VC2064 SOUND EFFECTS AND FOLEY

Ka

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Course Objectives:  To teach the students the optimal miking techniques for recording and editing Sound effects.  To help them understand the working and optimal use of recording setups to effectively capture the required sounds.  To teach them the basics of mixing and mastering the effects track.

Course Outcomes:  Students would have understood the basic requirements for creating sound effects.  Will possess the understanding for to create the necessary effects to complement the Video.  The student will be able to explain the various stages of foley creation.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

Course Description: Introduction to sound effects, Sound effect creation types, Choice of Microphones, Microphone accessories, Choiceof recording Equipment, Safety takes, Recording Ambiences, Handling noise, Recording a Stereo pass-by, Foley, Roles of the individuals, Setting up a Foley Stage, Foley pits, Walking in their Shoes, Performing Props, Cloths, Sync for Foley, Foley Mixer, Editing and Mixing Foley, Final Postproduction, Movie Samples.

ve

rs ity

Reference book: 1. Ric Viers, “The Sound Effects Bible: How to Create and Record Hollywood Style Sound Effects” , 1. Michael Wiese Productions, 2008.

2. Vanessa Theme Ament, “The Foley Grail: The Art of Performing Sound for Film, Games, and Animation”, 3. Focal Press, 2009.

4. David Lewis Yewdall, “Practical Art of Motion Picture Sound”, Focal Press, Fourth Edition, 2012.

5. Paul Virostek, “Field Recording: from Research to Wrap: An Introduction to Gathering Sound Effects”, Airborne publications, 2013.

6. Tomlinson Holman, “Sound for Digital Video”, Focal Press, 2005.

ni

14VC2065 MUSIC FOR MOTION PICTURE Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ny

a

U

Course Objectives:  To discuss in the basics of Music, audio production and post-production for Motion pictures.  To illustrate audio aesthetics, theory and techniques.  To provide basic knowledge on music genre and sequencing.

Course Outcomes:  The students will acquire knowledge in the basics of audio production.  The students will able to diagnose the different techniques in both pre- production and postproduction.  The students will acquire knowledge in the functioning of various digital audio workstation.

Ka

ru

Course Description: Film and music - Phases of the writing process - The interval relationship of different moods - Action music –Suspense - Special genres - Synchronization techniques - Dialogue and sound effects - The function of the human voice - Cinematic devices - Ethnic and period music - Beginnings, connections, and endings, Different genres – Studio - composer relationships - Fantasy for screenplay and orchestra Coda.

References: 1. Lalo Schifrin, “Music Composition for Film and Television”, 2011.

2. Kathryn Kalinak, “Film Music: A Very Short Introduction”, 2010.

3. Bob Nickas, Bruce LaBruce, Peter Halley and Wendy, “Index A to Z: Art, Design, Fashion, Film, andMusic in the Indie Era. 4. Larsen and John Irons, “Film Music”, 2008.

5. Richard Davis, “Complete Guide to Film Scoring: The Art and Business of Writing Music for Movies andTV” 2010.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2066 BASIC ACOUSTICS Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To demonstrate the behaviours of sound in an environment.  To inculcate creative and technical skills to analyze an environment.  To provide skills to measure and evaluate a rooms characteristics.

Course Outcomes:  Students will be equipped to design, analyze and provide solutions to make studios with good isolation.  Students will demonstrate leadership skills to take up projects to do create studios to record music of various genres.  Students will display entrepreneurship skill to take up projects to construct studio to create good sound.

ni

ve

Course Description: Sound, Audio & Acoustics - Sound wave and propagation – How humans perceive hearing – Sound measurementparameters - Psychoacoustics – Behaviour of sound in a closed space & in an open space – Problems in using acoustically poor room – Sound absorbing & reflecting materials – Coefficient of absorption – Acoustic treatment designs – Planning considerations for construction of a listening room – Placement of microphones in a recording room - Placement of speakers for proper listening – Sweet spot – Ear safety.

ny

a

U

References: 1. F.Alton Everest, “Master Handbook of Acoustics”,McGraw Co.Ltd., 2001 2. Francis Rumsey & Tim McCormic, “Sound & Recording”,Focal Press 2005 3. Michel Talbot &Smith ,”Sound Engineering Explained”, Focal Press 2002 4. Bobby Owsinski, “The Mixing Engineers Handbook” , Mix Book 2005 5. Doughlas, Brice, Duncan, Hood, Sinclair, Singmin, Davis, Patronics & Walkinson “Audio Engineering – Knowing it all”,– Newnes, 2002

14VC2067 AUDIO POST PRODUCTION TECHNIQUES LAB

ru

Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2059 Sound in media

(Version 1.1)

Ka

Course Objectives:  To understand and create various sound effects in audio production.  To explore the basic principle of making sounds techniques using computer.  To introduce the various aspects of sound designing.

Course Outcomes:  A student will understand the concept and craft the sound through computer codes.  A student can able to analyze and understand the audio recording, editing and processing.  Students will be able to create different types of sound effects.

Course Description: The Experiments will include the Sound in media Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2068 AUDIO FOR VIDEO LAB Credits: 0:0:4 Co-Requisite: 14VC2061 Voice in cinema

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To demonstrate the various miking techniques.  To equip for recording foley sounds.  To create unique sounds to be added into film production.

Course Outcomes:  Students will be proficient in choosing the right type of microphones and miking technique to record audio for video.  Students will be able to create sounds for a full length feature film.  Students will display entrepreneurship skill to start their own production houses.

ve

Course Description: The Experiments will include the recording audio and working with dialogues

14VC2069 VISUAL DESIGN AND CULTURE Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

a

U

ni

Course Objectives:  To demonstrate understanding of Visual Design and culture  To infer elements of time, space visual and social perception .  To discover the association of visual technology and culture.

Course Outcomes:  The course provides aspects related to visual design and culture.  It helps to visualize the designs in cultural aspects.  It provides insights into how to understand the audience.

ru

ny

Course Description: Design Elements – The Act of Perception – What we Can See Easily – Structuring Two Dimensional Space – Color– getting the Information: Visual Space and Time – Visual Objects, Words and Meaning – Visual and Verbal Narrative – Creative Meta Seeing – The Dance of Meaning – Practice of Looking – Viewers Make Meaning - Spectatorship, Power and Knowledge – Reproduction of Visual Technologies The Mass Media and Public Sphere– Consumer Culture and Manufacturer of Desire - Post Modernism and Popular Culture – Global Flow of VisualCulture.

Ka

References: 1. Colin Ware, “Visual Thinking for Design”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2008.

2. Martin Sturken, Lisa Cartwright, Practice of Looking: “An introduction of Visual Culture”, Oxford University Press, 2001.

3. Alan Hashimoto, Mike Clayton, “Visual Design Fundamentals: A digital approach”, Cenage Learning,2009.

4. Richard Howells, Joaquim Negreiros, “Visual Culture”, Blackwell Publishers, 2003.

5. Nicholas Mizoeff, “An Introduction to Visual Culture”, Routledge Publications,2009.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2070 ERGONOMICS Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To introduce the aspects of ergonomics.  To provide the basics of visual study.  To help the students interpret the human perception of the visuals.

Course Outcomes:  The students will be able to describe how a visual is perceived by humans.  The students will be able to produce their creative design, easy to perceive.  The students will have the knowledge to solve readability issues in designs especially with texts.

ve

Course Description: Investigation of human physical characteristics - limitations with respect to the environment -text and graphics - Ergonomics as applied to visual-legibility studies. Use of eye movement in visual analysis. Environmentalconditions of illumination- study of figure and ground relationships. Ergonomics of readability issues with respect to static and dynamic text at short and long viewing distance.

Ergonomics related to readability issues on display devices.Research methods in ergonomic data generation. Human Perception related to Visual Design applications.

U

ni

References: 1. Woodson Wesley E, “Human Factors Design Handbook”, McGraw Hill Co. 2. Martin Sturken, Lisa Cartwright, Practice of Looking: An introduction of Visual Culture, Oxford 3. University Press, 2001.

4. Alan Hashimoto, Mike Clayton, Visual Design Fundamentals: A digital approach, Cenage Learning, 2009.

14VC2071 PHOTO JOURNALISM

a

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Ka

ru

ny

Course Objectives:  It describes a form of journalism that creates images in order to tell a news story.  It defines the ethical framework which demands impartiality whilst telling the story.  It deals with different situations a photojournalist has to works in as a professional.

Course Outcomes:  Students’ with liking in photography will know how they will suit as a Photojournalist.  They will know how the skills to create pictures that contribute to the news media.  They will discover the demands of work as a honest and impartial journalistic.

Course Description Photo journalism: Nature and scope – Origins in World war - Qualities of a photo journalist – Coverage of spotnews, General news, Political News - Sports, War – News Value of Pictures – Techniques Timeliness, Objectivity& Narrative - Photo Essay – Photo Feature – Assignments & Image Holes - Photo Editing – Principles and Techniques – Professional Organization - The Nature of Wedding Photojournalism – Preparation and The Wedding Day – Sting Operations - Ethical & Legal Considerations – Impact of Competition - New Technologies.

References 1. Kenneth Kobre, “Photo Journalism – The Professional’s approach”, Focal Press 2003 2. Brian Hortan, “Guide to Photo Journalism”, AP associated Press, 2005

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

3. Blair Howard, “The Photo Essay - The How to Make Money with Your Camera. Guide for Writers andPhotographers”, Kindle Edition 4. Terry Hope, “Photo Journalism: Developing Style in Creative Photography (Black & White Photography)”,RotovisionSA, 2001 5. Bill Hurter, “Wedding Photojournalism”, Amherst Media, 2nd Edition, 2010.

6. John Loengard, Amelia Weiss, Arleen Lee, “Life Photographers: What they saw”, Life Magazine Publications, 2000 14VC2072 TRAVEL PHOTOGRAPHY (Version 1.1)

rs ity

Credits: 3:0:0

ve

Course Objectives:  To explore the basic elements of travel photography  To employ the skills needed for planning and capturing travel photography  To apply the creative techniques involved in capturing travel photography.

Course Outcomes:  The students are able to recognize the essentials of travel photography  The students attain the skills to plan and make various stage travel photography.  The students will explore the different techniques of creating travel photography

U

ni

Course Description: Overview of photography - Basic elements of travel photography –Designing principles- technical aspects oftravel photography album – planning and organizing travel photography - Lighting techniques –Comparative study of various travel photographs - production of travel photography album - The Photographer – The Camera – The Client –On Location – Composition

ny

a

References: 1. Mukesh Srivastava, “Digital Photography”, unicorn books 2012.

2. Tom Carter , “China: A portrait of A people” 2004 3. Mathew Bamberg, “ Digital Photography for Dummies” , 2006.

4. Dan Simon, “ Digital Photography Bible”,Wiley Publications 2004.

5. John Hedgecoe, “The Book of Photography”, Dorling Kindersley, 2005 14VC2073 MACRO PHOTOGRAPHY (Version 1.1)

ru

Credits: 3:0:0

Ka

Course Objectives:  To illustrate the branch of photography that deals with extreme close-ups.  To explain the photographic equipment needed for creating extreme close-ups.  To test lighting for shooting indoor & outdoor macro photographs.

Course Outcomes:  The students can carry out capturing macro photographs using special lens & accessories.  The students will be operating special lighting gear for exposing a macro photo.  The students can independently handle macro photo shoot both creatively and technically.

Course Description: What is Macro - Macro vs Micro Photography – Achieving 1:1 Magnification - Special Equipments needed forMacro Photography – Macro Photo Techniques - Macro Lens, Close up filter, Lens extension rings, Bellows, Lens Reversal, – Problems in Macro photography – Extreme shallow DoF, Poor Lighting – Ring flash Lighting – Special Camera mount – Macro Photo applications and advantages.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

References: 1. Paul Harcourt Davies, “A Complete Guide to Close up & Macro Photography”, David & Charles, 2001.

2. T.Hallett, “Close-Up & Macro Photography”, Ammonite Press, 2003 3. Ross Hoddinott, “Digital Macro & Close-Up Photography”, Ammonite Press, 2002 4. Harold Davis, “Photographing Water drops, Exploring Macro World”, Focal Press, 2000 5. John Humphrey, “Close-Up & Macro Photography-Art & Techniques”, Focal Press, 2005

rs ity

14VC2074 FASHION AND WEDDING PHOTOGRAPHY LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2016 Digital Photography-I 14VC2025 Digital Photography-II

(Version 1.1)

U

ni

ve

Course Objectives:  To develop the skills needed to produce professional quality photographs  To master camera controls and photographic composition.  To learn to retouch photos using image editing softwares.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student will  Learn how to evaluate project scope and identify the needs of the client prior to a professional photo shoot.  Work individually and as a member of team, demonstrating time management, organizational, and interpersonal skills.  Develop an eye for visualization of the end product.

ny

a

Course Description: Fashion photography- wedding events – skill in planning and execution photographs- exercises related to various fashion events and wedding to be photographed.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Directorand notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2075 SETS AND COSTUME FOR PHOTOGRAPHY (Version 1.1)

ru

Credits: 3:0:0

Ka

Course Objectives:  To appraise the importance of sets and costume in Photography  To explore the tools and materials used for set creation and costume making.  To instruct on the technical assistance required for creating sets with regard to Photography.

Course Outcomes:  The students will be able to construct a set for Photography  The students will acquire the skills to plan and make various sets and choose costumes for Photography.  The students will garner expertise both creatively and technically to organize sets for Photography Course Description: Overview of Theatre and stage - Basic elements of Background Design –Designing principles- technical aspects of theatre production - sets and props constructions- Scene design - Background designing for

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

theatre film andtelevision – Grip hardware-tools and materials - shop matt - Lighting techniques Physical manipulation of stage –Comparative study of various stage designs- Stage management – Background design applications.

rs ity

References: 1. J. Michael Gillette, “ Theatrical Design and production”, seventh edition, Mcgrow Hill,2012 2. Thomas A .Kelly Back, “ Backstage Guide to stage Management”, Stage Books (2005) 3. Daniel Lonazzi, “ Stage Management Handbook”, F and Media .Inc (2011) 4. John Hollowy, “Illustrated Theatre Production Guide”, Focal Press (2010) 5. Bill Raoul, “ Stock Scenery Construction: A Handbook”, Stagecraft text book (2000) 14VC2076 ADVERTISING PHOTOGRAPHY LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2014 Photography Basics

(Version 1.1)

ni

ve

Course Objectives:  To appraise the students on Photography for Advertising.  To examine the role of lighting in Ad Photography.  To train the students on the recent trends in Ad Photography.

Course Outcomes:  The students will be able to perceive the needs for making the right photo for Advertising.  The students will be able to use the apt photographic equipment & lighting for Ad Photography.  The students will acquire the skills of a professional in Advertising Photography.

ny

a

U

Course Description The Experiments for the lab includes areas on developing concept for advertisements and ad making with a creative features Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

ru

14VC2077 COMPOSITION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2016 Digital Photography -I 14VC2025 Digital Photography -II

(Version 1.1)

Ka

Course Objectives:  To explore the art of photographic composition.  To illustrate the composition aspect of photography.  To construct different methods of composing images.

Course Outcomes:  The students will acquire a wholesome knowledge on composing images  The students will be thorough with the principles of composition  The student will be skilful in composing images using the various elements of composition Course Description: The lab exercises will precisely focus on capturing images using the rules of composition and elements of composition such as colour, line, texture, shape, perspective, form.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2078 OUTDOOR PHOTOGRAPHY TECHNIQUES Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To explore the various forms of capturing photographs outdoors.  To explain the usage of lenses and their purpose for outdoor photography.  To evaluate the various lighting techniques in outdoor photography.

Course Outcomes:  The students will get trained up to industrial standards with regard to lighting for outdoor photography.  The students will be able to differentiate the use of lenses based on the needs.  The students acquire technical strategy with regard to exposure for outdoor subjects.

ve

Course Description: Exposure Essentials – Using Lenses Effectively – Composing a shot Outdoors – Shooting with natural light –Common outdoor lighting situations – Augmenting nature light – Photographing People – Photographing Sports – Photographing Nature – Photographing Landscapes – Photographing Travel Destinations – Photographing Close- ups and Macro – Shooting Outdoors like a Pro

a

U

ni

References: 1. Matthew Bamberg, “Digital Art Photography for Dummies”, Wiley Publishing, 2006.

2. Brenda Tharp, “Creative Nature and Outdoor Photography”, Amphoto books, 2010.

3. Scott Kelby, “Digital Photography”, Peachpit Press, 2010.

4. John and Barbara Gerlach, “Digital Nature Photography: The Art and the Science”, Focal Press, 2007.

5. Michael Langford, “Advanced Photography”, Focal Press, 7th edition, 2008.

ny

14VC2079 PORTRAIT PHOTOGRAPHY LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2074 Fashion and Wedding Photography

(Version 1.1)

Ka

ru

Course Objectives:  To explain the techniques of photography in the field of portraiture.  To appraise on the various genres of portraiture.  To employ technical strategy with regard to lighting in portrait photography.

Course Outcomes:  The students can master themselves with the technical nuances of Portrait Photography  The students can create their own portrait studio.  The students will be able to select the right indoor lighting for portraiture.

Course Description: The lab exercises will consist of capturing different types of portraits such as formal portraits, fashion portraits, outdoor portraits, black and white portraits, dramatic portraits, group portraits, informal portraits, lighting forportraits, self-portraits.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2080 PHOTO DOCUMENTATION LAB Credits: 3:0:0 Co-Requisite: 14VC2074 Fashion And Wedding Photography

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To learn the art of Photo documentation  To understand the various genres of photo documentation  To learn the purpose of photo documentation and master it Course Outcomes:  The students can successfully document through photographs  The students will know the various genres of documenting still images  Skilful and creative photographers on photo documentation are produced

ni

ve

Course Description: The lab exercises will focus on documenting various genres of themes or societal issues using still images with theaid of proper framing and composition Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Directorand notify it at the beginning of each semester.

(Version 1.1)

U

14VC2081 - DIGITAL IMAGE MANIPULATION LAB Credits: 0:0:4 Co-Requisite: 14VC2074 Fashion and Wedding Photography 14VC2072 Travel Photography

ru

ny

a

Course Objective  To explore the various forms of image manipulation.  To evaluate the art of image manipulation.  To operate image editing software.

Course Outcomes:  The student master as a professional editor in image manipulation.  The student will be able to correct an image based on the needs.  The students will produce digital art with the aid of software.

Ka

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab will include digital photography, lighting techniques.

14VC2082 PHOTOGRAPHY LIGHTING TECHNIQUES LAB Credits: 0:0:1 Co-Requisite: 14VC2072 Travel Photography

(Version 1.1)

Course Objectives:  To distribute knowledge on the various lighting techniques in photography to the industry level.  To provide a solid foundation of the visual and technical skills necessary to pursue and appreciate photography further.  To utilize natural light, available light, external camera flashlight, studio strobe light and evaluate the effect they have on the mood of the image.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

Course Outcomes: The students will learn to  The students will learn to implement the technical aspects of lighting  Interpret in-camera reflected light meter readings  Use various lighting techniques to improve their photography as a medium of personal expression.

Course Description: The Experiments will include digital photography and lighting

rs ity

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 6 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2083 ADVANCED TYPOGRAPHY Credits: 3:0:0

U

ni

ve

Course Objectives:  To create research aspects of typography.  To ensure effective usage of typography.  To help the students understand print and digital media.

Course Outcomes:  The students will be able to apply typography for graphic design.  The type design experiments enrich student’s typography skills.  The students will also be able to apply new possibilities of typography in their design.

ny

a

Course Description: Advanced Typography- Development of typography as a discipline: an overview of historical, technical, andaesthetics issues- Typography for the print and the digital media - Effect of technology on changing practice of typography and the role of typographers - Typography as communication - Experimental typography and the need for experiments - Digital Typography: emerging directions and new possibilities.

Typography for Indian languages and scripts - Issues of bi-lingual and multi-lingual typography.

Ka

ru

References: 1. Schmid, Helmut; “Typography Today”, SeibundoShinkosha, 2003.

2. McLean, Ruari; “Manual of typography”. Thames and Hudson.

3. Lupton, Ellen; “Thinking with type : a critical guide for designers, writers, editors, and students”.

NewYork : Princeton Architectural Press 2004.

4. Weingart Wolfgang, “Typography”, Lars Muller Publishers, 2000.

5. Friedl, Friedrich; Ott, Nicholas and Stein, Bernard; “Typography-an encyclopedic survey of type design and techniques throughout history”.

14VC2084 COMMUNICATION DESIGN

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Course Objectives:  To provide the knowledge of Communicational Design methodology for various stages of design process.  To introduce different methods of research analysis,

2016 Electronics and Media Technology



To explore the techniques of conceptualization, creation and evaluation of Communicational design.

Course Outcomes:  The students will identify the importance of Communicational Design methodology.  The students will also be able to demonstrate their understanding in conducting research analysis, conceptualization, creation and evaluation of communicational design.  The students will evolve as a better team player when they carry out assignments and projects in groups.

ve

rs ity

Course Description: Communication design - problem structuring methods – Application of design methods - methods of primary andsecondary research - Methods of data analysis - problem identification - Role of creativity Brain & Body storming methods of concept generation - Prototyping and Evaluation Methodologies - Presentation and documentation - generation of symbolic form - Realization - Mental visualization - Projection of the visualization - Enhancement of the image - Form creation algorithm Evaluation.

U

ni

References: 1. Jorge Frascara, “Communication Design: Principles, Methods and Practice”, Allworth press, 2005.

2. Dan M. Brown, “Communicating Design”, New Rider, 2010.

3. Maggie Macnab, “Decoding Design”, HOW books, 2008.

4. Andew V. Avela, “Advanced Presentations by Design”, Pfeiffer, 2008.

5. Bruno Munari, “Design As Art”, Penguin Global, 2009.

(Version 1.1)

a

14VC2085 PACKAGE DESIGNING LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2088 Printing Technology

Ka

ru

ny

Course Objectives:  To produce the creative instincts of students through package designing  To relate the various designing principles practically through package design  To analyze the existing brands and the packaging strategies implemented Course Outcomes:  Students will be enabled to create design, which is appropriate for packages.  Students will be enabled to build a extensive creative techniques and strategies for designing package  To design a new designing strategies for packaging for existing as well as new brands Course Description: The lab will contain exercises on applying the principles of design in packaging strategies Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2086 GRAPHIC DESIGN Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To implement the basic principles of design  To carry out the drawing techniques pertinent to designing  To construct professional and quality designers Course Outcomes:  Students will be enabled to have a thorough knowledge with regard to designing  To illustrate the quality of designing and drawing skills of the students  The craftsmanship of students pertaining to designing will get professional

ve

Course Description: Design Analysis- understand a current brand situation by reviewingthe business / strategy-design tocreate visual, verbal, and experiential tools-Image Analysis: The review of the current company, product, or service -audience-Concepting /Ideation-find creative design and marketing solutions-Design Presentation: Illustrating concepts to effectively communicate marketing.

U

ni

References: 1. Debra J. Dewitte, “Gateways to Art: Understanding the Visual Arts”, Thames & Hudson, 2011.

2. Hugh Honour, “The Visual Arts: A History, Revised Edition”, 7th edition, Pearson, 2009.

3. Jean Robertson, “Themes of Contemporary Art: Visual Art after 1980”, 3rd Edition, Oxford UniversityPress, 2012.

4. William Lidwell, Kristina Holden & Jim Butler, “Universal Principles of Design”, 2010.

5. Colin Ware, “Visual Thinking for Design”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2008.

14VC2087 VISUAL ARTS AND PRINICIPLES OF DESIGN (Version 1.1)

a

Credits: 3:0:0

ru

ny

Course Objectives:  To inculcate the basic elements of Visuals and Visualization.  To learn the various techniques involved in Visual structure and design.  To expose the students towards the tools & mechanism to transform ideas into design.

Course Outcomes:  The students are able to interpret the various formats  The students will be able to create & execute Visual design productions  The creative aspect of design will be clearly deduced by the students.

Ka

Course Description: Fundamentals of Visuals - Visual thinking–Design techniques-Concept development- composing –using objects-texture – color – space- lines- typography concepts – color for print – interactive – web media structural elements of design- the expressive content or the message- Balance - Proportion - Rhythm Emphasis - Unity The history of art and design. Changes in subject matter since the mid-19th centuryThe Development of Photography - Colonialism and the Influence of Non-European Cultures - The Development of Psychoanalysis- Critical visual methodology- Semiotic analysis- PsychoanalysisCastration complex- Visual pleasure analysis- Sociological analysis-Base and super structure analysisPost Modernism Visual analysis.

References 1. David Cohen, “A Visual language elements of design”, Scott Anderson, 2007.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

2.

3.

4.

5.

William Lidwell, “Universal Principles of Design”, Rockport Publishers, 2006.

Graeme Sullivan, “Art Practice as Research: Inquiry in Visual Arts”, Sage publications, 2010.

Hugh Honour, John Fleming, “The Visual Arts: A History”, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2009.

Debra J. DeWitte, Ralph M. Larmann, M. Kathryn Shields, “Gateways to Art: Understanding the VisualArts”, Thames and Hudson, 2011.

14VC2088 PRINTING TECHNOLOGY

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ve

rs ity

Course Objectives:  This course introduces the process of mechanical printing for publications.  To provide knowledge about the steps followed in printing press for creating multicolor outputs.  To indicate the various types in inks & paper grades used in printing.

Course Outcomes:  Students will be able to demonstrate the process of creating documents for printing.  They will be able classify the type of printing required for each application.  They will be able to explain the steps in creating design elements suited for different printing technology.

U

ni

Course Description: Printing Process – Graphic Arts - History of printing – Hand Composing – Page Making & Stone Room Point,Type & font, Linotype Composing – Block Making - Conventional printing technology – Mono & multi colour printing - Printing Ink – Printing Paper: Grades – Newsprint - Letter Press: Treadle Press Cylinder Press – Flexography – Gravure – Offset – Web offset – Screen Printing – Relief printing Inkjet, Laser, Thermal printing - Digital printing, 3D Printing – Plate Making for offset - Book Binding.

ru

ny

a

References: 1. Niir Board, “The Complete Book on Printing Technology”, Asia Pacific Business Press Inc, 2009.

2. Niir Board, “Handbook on Printing Technology”, Jain books, 2011.

3. “Hand Book of Offset Printing Technology”, Engineers India Research In., 2005.

4. Uri Levy, Gilles Biscous, “Digital Printing The reference handbook”, 3rd edition, Interquest, 2005.

5. Tamara D. Pope, Gilles Biscous, “Paper and Digital Printing”, Interquest, 2007.

Ka

14VC2089 COMPOSITION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2086 GRAPHIC DESIGN

(Version 1.1)

Course Objectives:  To get acquainted with composition in Photography and Lab  To get acquainted with research and theoretical mechanisms  To get acquainted with production Course Outcomes:  The students are able to understand the various formats and learn to make perspective based productions.  The students obtain the skills to plan and implement various stages of production.  The students get the skills to evaluate the production design.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

Course Description: The lab exercise will provide the wisdom of production design and compositions Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2090 INTERACTIVE DESIGN (Version 1.1)

rs ity

Credits: 3:0:0

ve

Course Objectives:  To learn interactive design procedures for human computer interaction  To learn different conceptualizations in interactive design  To learn prototyping techniques of interactive design Course Outcomes:  The students will learn interactive Design methodology.  The students will also be capable doing research analysis, conceptualization, creation and evaluation of Interactive design.  The students will have to perform interactive design process as a team and submit their evaluations.

U

ni

Course Description: Interaction Design Process - Design Methodology - Design brief - Physical, Cognitive and Social Computing environments. - User Centered Design Process - Information Structuring and Mappings Participatory Design-Ideation and Brain and Body Storming, Linear and Animatic Storyboarding - Soft Physical Prototyping Techniques- Collaboratively design an interactive product or environment.

Ka

ru

ny

a

References: 1. Ben Shneiderman: Designing the User Interface: Strategies for Effective Human-Computer Interaction, Addison-Wesley Publishing Co.,Third Edition.

2. Kevin Mullet and Darrell Sano.Designing Visual Interfaces: Communication Oriented Techniques. Sunsoft Press.

3. Stansberry, Domenic. Labyrinths: The Art of Interactive Writing & Design. New York: WadsworthPublishing Company.

4. Tay Vaughan, “Multimedia: Making it Work”, Seventh Edition, McGraw Hill Osborne Media, 2006.

5. John Henry Merryman, Albert Edward Elsen, “Law, Ethics, and the Visual Arts”, Kluwer Law International, 2002.

14VC2091 PRINT PRODUCTION

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Course Objectives:  To recognize the basics of print production.  To explore the types of print process.  To acquire knowledge about color, film, plates and paper related to print production.

Course Outcomes:  Students will be enabled to gain through knowledge in print production  To recognize the flow of printing and its influence in graphic production

2016 Electronics and Media Technology



To evaluate the importance of print production, which serves as base for other types of production in print industry.

rs ity

Course Description: Production flow – Historical Perspective – Organization and PrePress - Chromatics – Images – Documents –Reviewing – Proofing and Plate Makeing –Film and Plates – Paper – Types of Paper – Potential Problems withPaper - Ink - Type - Printing Processes – Offset Lithography - Digital Printing – Gravure – Screen Printing – LetterPress – The Environment – Working with Printer – Folding and Binding - legal Consideration – End Matter.

ve

References: 1. David Bann, “The All New Print Production Handboook”, Watson-Guptill, 2007.

2. Kaj Johansson, “A Guide to Graphic Print Production”, Wilery, 2011.

3. Mark Gatter, “Production for Print”, Laurence King Publishing, 2010.

4. Gavin Ambrose, “The Production Manual” Fairchild Book,2008.

5. Brian P. Lawler, “Print Publishing Guide” Adobe Press, 2005.

(Version 1.1)

ni

14VC2092 ADVERTISING PRODUCTION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2010 Visual Arts lab-I 14VC2011 Visual Arts lab-II (Animatics)

ny

a

U

Course Objectives:  To implement the creative concepts visually through print advertisements  To apply the various designing principles practically  To produce print advertisements for various print mediums Course Outcomes:  The students will become successful print Advertisement designers  The creative quotient of the students will improve significantly  The students will be professionally well qualified to become print ad designers

ru

Course Description: The lab will contain exercises on creating print advertisements for newspapers, magazines using proper visual design elements

Ka

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2093 CREATIVE SUITE LAB –II Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2035 Creative Suit Lab-I Course Objectives:  To sharpen the creative skills of the students.  To introduce the basics of software based designing.  To improve the quality of the design based outputs of the student.

Course Outcomes:  The students will effectively handle designing software.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

(Version 1.1)

 

The students will be able to efficiently create designs using the software.

The students will be able to deliver quality designs.

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes designing in Software such as Illustrator, Page maker and In Design.

rs ity

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2094 DESIGN AND ANIMATION LAB Credits: 0:0:1 Co-Requisite: 14VC2090 Interactive design

(Version 1.1)

U

ni

ve

Course Objective:  To Design graphical components with creative and fundamentals principles of design.  To provide practical knowledge in analyzing and implementing basics concepts of flash.  To provide basic practical knowledge to students regarding character, background designing and animation.

Course Outcome:  The students can design sprites and apply design techniques creatively and develop animations using Adobe flash.  The students will develop the ability to illustrate and interpret concepts of designing and animation practically.  Students will be enabled to design any concept in a creative way

ny

a

Course Description: The Experiments which the lab includes conventional paper based design and finally digitized with given application.

ru

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 6 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC3001 3D VIDEO AND GRAPHICS

Ka

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Course Objectives:  To analyze and examine the basic concepts and procedures involved in the creation of 3 dimensional or stereoscopic video.  To explain kinematics and its role in animation.  To help the students understand the working of 3D display systems.

Course Outcomes:  The student will be able to recognize the various implementations of 3D systems in the field.  The students will be able to describe and illustrate the concepts based on kinematics.  The student will be able to create, edit, prepare, encode and display stereoscopic content.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

Course Description: Introduction to 3D video – Multi camera systems for 3D Video Production – Studio – 3D Video Production – 3DSurface Texture Generation – Estimate of 3D Dynamic lighting Environment with reference objects – Visualization of 3D Video – Behaviour Unit model for Content based Representation and edition of 3D video – Model based complex Kinematic motion estimation – 3D video editing - 3D display systems – 3D Content creation – 3D applications – Advance 3D video streaming applications.

rs ity

References: 1. Takashi Matsuyama, Shohei Nobuhara, Takeshi Takai, Tony Tung, “3D Video and Its Applications”Springer, 2012.

2. Guan-Ming Su, Yu-chi Lai, Andres Kwasinski, Haohong, “3D Visual communications”, WangJohn Wiley& Sons, 2012.

3. Steven J. Gortler, “Foundations of 3D Computer Graphics”, MIT Press, 2012.

4. David P. Luebke, “Level of Detail for 3D Graphics”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2003.

5. Jonas de Miranda Gomes, Luiz Velho, Mario Costa Sousa, “Design and Implementation of 3D Graphics Systems”, CRC Press, 2012.

ve

14VC3002 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

a

U

ni

Course Objectives:  To learn the evaluating methods and researching tools available in media field.  To analyze data relevant to media research  To understand the statistical research tools and techniques.

Course Outcomes:  After learning this paper the students will be able to apply the researching methods  The course gives a Statistical reporting in media projects.  The students gains an in-depth knowledge in analyzing the statistics and data used in media projects.

Ka

ru

ny

Course Description: Research Methods-limitations of effects research - basic parameters of media related studies - Qualitative Research Methods-tools for data collection- Sociometric- Content Analysis - Construction and Standardization of Tool-.Variables- Scales of Measurement- Nominal, Ordinal, Interval and Ratio ScalesSampling techniques and research hypotheses-Sampling Method-Hypotheses-Advanced Statistical Techniques For Research - Meaning, Scope, Importance and Limitations of Statistics and Data Univariate Analysis- Bivariate Analysis Computer Application And Report Writing-Statistical Package for Social Sciences (SPSS) - Report writing.

References: 1. David Machin, Simon Cottle, Anders Hansen, Media and Communication Research methods: AnIntroduction”, MacMillan, 2013.

2. Bonnie S. Brennen, “Qualitative Research Methods for Media Studies”, Routledge, 2013.

3. Arthur Asa Berger, “ Media and Communication Research Methods: An Introduction to Qualitative andQuantitative Approaches”, Sage Publications, 2013 4. Susanna Hornig Priest , “Doing Media Research, An Introduction”, , 2009 5. Roger D. Wimmer and Joseph R. Dominick, “Mass Media Research”, Wadsworth Learning, Ninth edition,2011.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14VC3003 MARKETING MANAGEMENT Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  Teaches the environment of marketing & the conduct of consumers.  To discover the importance of research in media marketing management.  To equip them in different responsibilities, this will enhance their entrepreneurship skills.

Course Outcomes:  Radical thinking on media marketing of the student is enhanced.  They will be effective team players in media production houses.  Research orientation, analytical and innovative abilities of the student is developed.

ve

Course Description: Marketing management- Marketing environment – Marketing mix – Understanding the consumer - Marketing segmentation – Targeting – Positioning - Promotion –Communication Objective – Developing effective communication –Promotional budget – What is a product – Product development – Product mix strategy – Product life cycle strategy – Product levels, product lines, Branding, packaging, labeling - Pricing – Factors to consider for pricing –Methods of pricing – Adopting the price - Marketing channels – Nature, functions and types – Channel design management – Channel behavior – Organization and conflict.

a

U

ni

References: 1. Marketing Management, Philip Kotler, “Pearson Education India”, 2009 2. Text and cases , “Marketing Management”-, Excel Books India, 2004 3. Philip Kotler and Gary Armstrong,” Principles of Marketing”, Pearson Education, 2008 4. Kotler, “Specifications of Marketing Management – A South Asian Perspective”, 14th Edition, DorlingKindersley, 2012.

5. Kiefer Lee & Steve Carter, Global Marketing Management, Oxford University Press, 2012

ny

14VC3004 PRINCIPLES OF CINEMATOGRAPHY Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Ka

ru

Course Objectives:  To teach the students with the 5C’s of Cinematography.  To enrich knowledge to the students on the aesthetics of Cinematography.  To keep the students updated with the techniques in cinematography.

Course Outcomes:  The students will master the time tested concept of applying 5 Cs in their production that Hollywood follows in their film making techniques  The students will get trained to industry standards in cinematography.  Sound knowledged professional Cinematographers are produced.

Course Description: Camera Angle – Scene, Shot & Sequence –Types of Camera Angles – Subject size, Subject Angle & Camera Height– Scene requirements Continuity – Cinematic Time & Space – Filming the Action – Scene Direction – Different types of Action Axis – Cutting – Types of Editing – Sound Flow – Close Ups – Extreme, Over the Shoulder, Types of close ups – Composition – Still vs. Motion Picture Composition – Composition Rules –Balance, Unity & Eye Scan – Framing

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

References: 1. Joseph V.Mascelli, “The 5Cs of Cinematography”, Silman-James Press, 2001.

2. Ivan Cury,“Directing & Producing for Television”, Focal Press, 2007.

3. Joseph M. Boggs & Dennis W. Petrie, “The Art of Watching Films”, 7th edition, McGraw Hill, 2008 4. “ David Bordwell & Kristin Thompson, “Film Art An Introduction”, 8th edition, McGraw Hill, 2008.

5. Sonja Schenk & Ben Long, “The Digital Filmmaking Handbook”, Course Technology, 2012.

rs ity

14VC3005 LIGHTING TECHNIQUES Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ve

Course Objectives:  To analysis the behave of light and its properties.  To know the basic structure of studio lighting and latest technology.  To equip the student in practical approach on lighting consoles and accessories works.

Course Outcomes:  Student understanding will be increased in analyzing perception of light.  Student will acquire practical skills in the area of studio lighting and industry techniques.  Student will acquire the knowledge about lighting on location.

U

ni

Course Description: Nature of lights – Physics of light - Perception of eye - color theory -Lighting Variables - Basic Lighting Triangle -Ratios in the Lighting - Other Lighting Objective - Lighting Instruments and Accessories Mounts and Connectors for Lighting Equipment, Light Control – Consoles - Safety and Efficiency Artistic or Mood Lighting Ray Tracing Techniques - Ray tracing algorithm - backward ray tracing extending ray tracing algorithm - Real time raytracing

Ka

ru

ny

a

References: 1. Kelly Dempski and Emmanuel Viale, “Advanced Lighting and Materials with Shaders”, Worldware Publishing, 2005.

2. Ralph Donald, Riley Maynard and Thomas Spann, “Fundamentals of Television 3. Production”, Pearson, 2008.

4. Gerald Millerson,“Lighting for TV and Film”, Focal Press, 2013.

5. Des Lyver,Graham Swainson, “Basic of the video lighting”, Elsevier, 2005.

6. Blain Brown,“Cinematography: Theory and Practice: Image Making for Cinematographers and Directors”,Focal Press, 2012.

14VC3006 MEDIA CULTURE AND COMMUNICATION

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Course Objectives:  To get acquainted with global media industry privatization and content creation  To understand the concept of globalization and media culture.  To discover media impact on local identities Course Outcomes:  The students will be able to relate media institutions and global reality of media industries.  The students learn the skills to evaluate the media content and cultural identity  The students will be able to assess the effects on media audience

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

Course Description: Fundamentals of media industry and institutions – Context of media institutions and Globalization – media ownership and functions – origin and development of media institutionsMedia and society – social responsibilities of the media institutions – media and culture- Popular culture – cultural imperialism – gender and media – Media and the audience – audience and technological changes – Dominant culture.

rs ity

References: 1. James Watson, “Media Communication”, Focal Press , 2007 2. Richard Campbell, Christopher R. Martin, Bettina Fabos, “Media & Culture: Mass Communication in aDigital Age”, 9th Edition, Associated Press, 2013.

3. Paul Hodkinson, “Media, Culture and Society”, Sage Publications, 2010.

4. Meenakshi Gigi Durham, Douglas M. Kellner, “Media and Cultural Studies”, Wiley, 2006.

5. Paddy Scannell, “Media and Communication”, Sage Publications, 2007.

14VC3007 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY LAB

(Version 1.1)

ve

Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC3002 Research Methodology

U

ni

Course Objectives:  To get acquainted with communication research methods.  To gain insight into qualitative / quantitative analysis .  To conduct minor qualitative / quantitative research study.

Course Outcomes:  The students will gain knowledge in Research oriented Segments in media  The students will do research on Media with a Creative knowledge  It enables the students to work on new research project

ru

ny

a

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes areas such as Reviewing the publications, Analyzing the methodology andtools in research.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

Ka

14VC3008 CINEMATOGRAPHY LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC3004 Principles of Cinematography Course Objectives:  To understand the basic camera handling.  To learn the various option available in camera.  To learn basic shots and angles.

Course Outcomes:  The students will be able to use any kind of camera.  The students will access towards the way of handling.  It provides a key role in movie making.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

(Version 1.1)

Course Description The Experiments for the lab includes areas such as single camera setup, multiple camera setup, Camera handling method with different types of shot and angles.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC3009 AD FILM MAKING LAB (Version 1.1)

rs ity

Credits: 0:0:2

ve

Course Objectives:  To learn the basic aspects available in Advertisements  To create an advertisement with different features  To obtain the media knowledge in film making Course Outcomes:  The students will make advertisements in various media  The students will make ads with a Creative knowledge  It makes to develop a concept by the students to create an ad film.

U

ni

Course Description The Experiments for the lab includes areas on developing concept for advertisements and ad making with a creative features.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC3010 EVENT AND MEDIA MANAGEMENT (Version 1.1)

a

Credits: 3:0:0

Ka

ru

ny

Course Objectives:  To understand the importance of professionally managing an event  To understand the importance and handle the audience in the corporate & entertainment world.  To learn the steps involved in planning, implementing & controlling major events in media industry.

Course Outcomes:  The learners will acquire knowledge on the requirement of managing big events.  They will be able to foresee constraints and plan for contingency.  They will understand the media management techniques.

Course Description: Introduction to entertainment and society : Characteristics of Mass Mediated Entertainment - Narrative Theory - dramatic Theory - Understanding and analysing Entertainment Audiences - Regulations Interactive Media – Event management characteristics - Qualities of event managers -Planning and Event team creation - budgeting the event - Execution - Evaluation - Managing the media Coveragepromotional materials - advertising campaign - Sponsorship - Image/ Branding - Public Relations - Types of events - Event planning and operation - Event budget and safety measures References: 1. Anton Shone, Bryn Parry, “Successful event management - A Practical Handbook”, Cengage LearningEMEA, 2004.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

2.

3.

4.

5.

B.K Chaturvedi, “Media Management”, Global Vision Pub House ,2009 .

Lynn Van Der Wagon,“Event Management for tourism, culture business and sporting events”, PearsonHospitality Press, 2008.

Robert Wollan, Nick Smith, Catherine Zhou, “The Social Media Management Handbook”, John Wiley & Sons, 2010.

Dimitri Tassiopoulos, “Event Management: A Professional and Developmental Approach”, Juta and Company Ltd, 2005.

14VC3011 AUTHORING AND VIRTUAL REALITY (Version 1.1)

rs ity

Credits: 3:0:0

ve

Course Objectives:  The purpose of the course is to explain the importance of “Authoring”, one of the basic element of Multimedia.  To illustrate the mechanism in development of Virtual reality environment  To interpret the situations suited for the application of authoring the Virtual reality.

Course Outcomes:  The students will be able to discuss the importance of Authoring system and its environment.  To develop the theoretical skills in Authoring and virtual Reality  The students will be thoroughly ready to administer the theoretical concepts learnt.

U

ni

Course Description: Introduction to Authoring- Different authoring styles-authoring environment – Authoring software-cross platform capabilities- Authoring tools- HTML language- Designing and production – Definition of Virtual Reality – Augmented and Non augmented reality – VR terminologies – Immersive and non immersive – Virtual Reality application to various fields.

ru

ny

a

References: 1. Tay Vaughan, “Multimedia making it to work”, Tata Mc Graw Hills, 2008.

2. James E Shuman, “Multimedia in Action”, Vikas Publishing House, 2006 3. Ranjan Parekh “Principles of Multimedia”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 2006.

4. Oliver Balet, Gerard, “Virtual Story-telling”, Subsol Patrice Torguest, 2007.

5. David Hillman, “Multimedia Technological Implications”,Galgotia Publications,2010.

14VC3012 DOCUMENTARY PRODUCTION

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Ka

Course Objectives:  To understand the basic elements of Documentary Storytelling, the various approaches involved in Documentary structure.  To understand the research mechanism and treatment of ideas to transform into script  To learn the techniques of Documentary production and editing.

Course Outcomes:  The students understand and apply the various formats make Professional Documentary to create social impact  The students will be efficient in documentary production.  The students will be enabled to evaluate documentary films.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

Course Description: Fundamentals of Documentary - subset of Non fiction film and video –subjectivity in story telling-story basics-Dramatic story-telling- Documentary story – Evaluation Story ideas – Developing the story Approaches in documenting –Documentary - Archival Film making – Docu-Drama – 3act structure – applying film structure – Documentary research basics – Advisors – Types of researches – Casting – Hosts and Narrators – Documentary proposal writing– Outlining the cast – Treatment of roles – Basic Equipments– Camera features – shooting with story in mind -Documentary Sequence – Imagination and editing– Principles of Documentary editing – Nonlinear editing – Nonlinear editing

rs ity

References: 1. Sheila Curran Bernard, Documentary Storytelling , Focal Press , (2007) 2. Keb Dancyger ,The Technique of Film and Video editing Focal Press Vth edit(2011) 3. Paul Wheeler , Digital Cinematography, Focal press (2005) 4. Paul Wheeler , High Definition Cinematography, Focal Press IIIrd edition (2009) 5. Joseph V Mascelli, Principles of cinematography.Silman james press,2000

ve

14VC3013 SPORTSCASTING Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ny

a

U

ni

Course Objectives:  To impart skills and strategies to launch a sports broadcasting career.  This course makes students understand the role of media in sportscasting  It enables to gain knowledge on different Interviewing techniques.

Course Outcomes:  Students will practice progress towards achieving an active sports cast  Students will learn the art of the play by play, how to host weekly coaching shows, how to create a sports personality, and even how to create their own sports talk shows.  Students will be trained with the skill set and experience that network affiliates and professional sports require.

ru

Course Description: Sports Organiztion – Historical Development of Sports and Sports Casting – The Economics – Audiences – Role ofMedia – Socio cultural Perspectives – Practicum – Future Concerns and Considerations – Preparation – Radio Play by Play – Television Play by Play – Hockey, Golf, Tennis, Soccer and Olympic sports – Interviewing Techniques – Jocks in the booth – Talking Sports – The 6 & 10 Sports / Sports center – Getting the job – Making the tape .

Ka

References: 1. Linda K Fuller, “Sports casters / Sports Casting, Principles and Practices”, Taylor and 1. Francis, 2008 2. Marc Zumoff, Max Negin, “Total Sportscasting”, Focal Press, 2014.

3. Stuart Hyde, Diana A. Ibraham, “Television and Radio Anchoring”,Pearson, 2013.

4. Brad Schult, “Sports Broadcasting”, Focal Press, 2002.Michael Teitelbaum, “Sports Broadcasting”, CherryLake Publishing, 2008.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

14VC3014 ADVANCED ANIMATION Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To present concepts required to understand the steps and procedures that lead to the completion of a fully rendered 3 Dimensional computer animation.  The transformations and modeling techniques will be well established  The essentials are 3D animation will be well understood.

Course Outcomes:  The students will be able to explain the advanced concepts of animation and rendering techniques.  The students will be able to do basic 3D animation and gain basic knowledge about advanced modeling and rendering techniques.  An architectural walkthrough can be made by the students

U

ni

ve

Course Description: Introduction – Storyboarding – character and model design - sound design –technical tests –Production scheduling -Modeling basics Introduction –polygonal modeling –splines and patches –coordinate systems –viewing windows – Geometric primitives –transformations –common modeling techniques –hierarchies –Booleans and trims - The camera –Lights –Surface characteristics –shading algorithms –rendering algorithms –background images –Surface texture mapping –solid texture mapping –final rendering –Key framing –interpolations –parameter curve editing – dope sheet editing –kinematics –motion plans –shape deformations –camera animation –animating lights and surface properties –pose based animation - Virtual sculpting –hair and fur –texturing polygons –cloth dynamics – facial animation- compositing –Editing.

ny

a

References: 1. John Vince, “Essential Computer Animation”, Springer UK , 2007.

2. Marcia Kuperberg, Martin W. Bowman, “Guide To Computer Animation”, Focal press, 2006.

3. Alan H. Watt, Mark Watt, “Advanced Animation and Rendering Techniques, ACM press, 2002.

4. Preston Blair, Foster, “Advance animation”, Focal Press, 2010.

5. Tony white, Animation from Pencils to Pixels,” Classical Techniques for the Digital Animator” 2006 14VC3015 SOCIAL MARKETING (Version 1.1)

ru

Credits: 3:0:0

Ka

Course Objectives:  To understand Social Marketing and basic elements of Social context of Marketing  To study the various approaches involved in Social Marketing and structure of Social Campaign.  To understand the research mechanism and development of Social Campaign Course Outcomes:  The students are able to understand the various Social Marketing Promotional techniques to create Public service social Marketing.  To develop the skills in Authoring and virtual Reality  To enable students to apply it to various fields Course Description: Fundamentals of Social marketing and business - Social marketing and social change tools - Principles ofarketing- Differences between commercial and social marketing - Social marketing and the environment - principles of campaigns Rossiter's and Percy's six-step model - Cognitive process

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

modelDiffusion theory- Research and evaluation - Planning and developing social marketing campaigns and Program - Campaign versus programme- Program planning models- Lawrence Green' model- Overall goals of the pilot campaign - Campaign goals - Criticisms of social marketingAdvertising- Publicity- Edutainment. Pilot campaign evaluation

rs ity

References: 1. Donovan Rob, “ Principles and Practice of Social Marketing” ,Cambridge University press , 2010 2. Gerald Hastings “Social Marketing in 21st Century”,. Buttleworth Heinemen Publication 2007 3. Michael T.Ewong , “Social Marketing “, Routledge Publications 2007 4. Dan Zarrella, “The Social Media Marketing” , O’Reilly Media Publication, 2009 5. Caroline Risi,”Social Media Field guide”, Harquis press, 2013.

14VC3016 DOCUMENTARY FILM LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC3012 Documentary production

(Version 1.1)

ny

a

U

ni

ve

Course Objectives:  To understand the Documentary production.  To equip the students with Media Research.  To develop a concept for issues and can make into a documentary.

Course Outcomes:  The students will gain knowledge in research  The students will do a documentary video on a concept  It enables the students to work on Documentary production Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes areas such as writing for documentary, producing and finishing through Production.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC3017 DIGITAL MUSIC PRODUCTION LAB

ru

Credits: 0:0:2

(Version 1.1)

Ka

Course Objectives:  To discuss the basic tools and operation in digital audio workstation.  To produce MIDI tracks with VSTi and VSTe.  To reproduce Music of Various genre.

Course Outcomes:  The students will compare the various DAW’s.  The students will compose Music tracks using MIDI and audio clips .  The students will mix Music tracks and assess the quality of it.

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes areas such as creating music with MIDI interface, recording music instruments and mixing techniques.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

.

14VC3018LIGHTING AND PRODUCTION DESIGN LAB Credits: 0:0:2

(Version 1.1)

ve

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To distribute knowledge on the various lighting techniques in photography to the industry level.  To provide a solid foundation of the visual and technical skills necessary to pursue and appreciate photography further.  To utilize natural light, available light, external camera flashlight, studio strobe light and evaluate the effect they have on the mood of the image.

Course Outcomes: The students will learn to  Implement the technical aspects of lighting, light ratio, continuous/flash light, hand-held light meter and exposure control  Interpret in-camera reflected light meter readings  Use various lighting techniques to improve their photography as a medium of personal expression.

U

ni

Course Description: The experiments for the lab include different lighting techniques and production design for different locations.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of experiments and get the approval of HoD/ Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

15VC3001 TECHNICAL WRITING (Version 1.1)

a

Credits: 3:0:0

Ka

ru

ny

Course Objectives:  To infuse the students with knowledge on technical writing  To emphasise the importance of writing for various media domains  To make students understand the role of writing, which forms a basis for pre-production Course Outcomes: Students will acquire insight into nuances of writing  The students will gain knowledge on various aspects of technical writing  The students will equip themselves in writing for media  The students will be able to conceptualize scripts as a part of pre-production.

Course Description: Scope of technical writing – Technical writing and other forms of writing – Qualifications of a technical writer – Technical reports – Creating a technical document – Technical writers as professionals – A team work – Testing and revising – Client approval – Principles of technical writing – Styles in writing – The writing process – Use of graphic and illustrations – The technical editing process – Language style and usage – Online editing References: 1. Gerald J Alred, Charles T. Brusaw& Walter E. Oliu, “Handbook of Technical Writing”, St. Martin’s Press, 10th edition, 2011.

2. Basu B.N., “Technical Writing”, PHI, 2007.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

3. James Glen Stovall, “Writing for the Mass Media”, Pearson,8th edition, 2011.

4. Charles Marsh, David W. Guth& Bonnie Poovey Short, “Strategic Writing”, Pearson, 3rdediton, 2011.

5. Anthony Friedmann, “Writing for Visual Media”, Focal Press, 4th edition, 2014.

15VC3002 MEDIA WRITING LAB Credits: 0:0:2

(Version 1.1)

ve

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To bring out the writing skills of the students  To train the students in the aspect of writing for various genres of media programmes  To enhance and mould the creative skills of the students with regard to writing for media Course Outcomes:  The students will possess all the required skills to become a creative writer for media  The students will know all the basics and nuances of creative writing  The students will adapt themselves in writing for various genres of media programmes

ni

Course Description: The faculty will frame exercises on technical as well as creative writing pertinent to media. The general areas include advertising, designing, screenwriting for television and films.

15VC3003 WORLD CINEMA

U

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

ru

ny

a

Course Objectives:  To provide an overall knowledge on the maturation of world cinema from its inception  To bring forth research scholars in the area of film studies  To provide a detailed cognition on the evolution of films and film technology across the globe Course Outcomes:  The students will acquire a wholesome cognition on the emergence of cinema across nations and the people who contributed to it  This will enable the students to master in the area of film studies  Budding researches and academicians will be created in the field of cinema

Ka

Course Description: Silent cinema (1895 – 1930) – The Rise of Hollywood – The World-wide Spread of Cinema – Cinema and Avant-Garde – National Cinemas – Sound Cinema (1930 – 1960) – Censorship and SelfRegulation – Genre Cinema –The modern cinema (1960 – 1995) – Cinema In The Age Of Television – New Technologies – Cinema Verite and the New Documentary – Art Cinema – Cinemas Of The World – International films – International filmmakers References: 1. Geoffrey Nowell-Smith, “The Oxford History of World Cinema”, Oxford University Press, 2006.

2. “The Rough Guide to Film”, Rough Guides, 2007.

3. T. Jefferson Kline, “Unraveling French Cinema”, Wiley-Blackwell, 2010.

4. CarylFlinn, “The New German Cinema”, University of California Press, 2004.

5. James Monaco, “How to read a film”, Routledge, 5thedition, 2010.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

15VC3004 MEDIA PSYCHOLOGY Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

rs ity

Course Objectives:  To provide the students with the essential knowledge to know and understand the psychology of media viewing habits of the individual and its repercussions  To make students realise the importance of research and the various rubrics plausible in the area  To study the nature of media users and audience Course Outcomes:  The students interested in pursuing research in the area of media will be highly benefitted by the course content  The students can carry out pilot studies on media audience based on the knowledge imbibed from the subject  The subject will suffice the students in understanding the target audience and thereby prepare themselves to step in the media industry

ni

ve

Course Description: Media psychology in context – What Is Media Psychology, and Why Do We Need It? – Research Methods In Media Psychology – Analysis of Media Texts – Discourse Analysis – Psychological effects and influences of media – The Effects of Media Violence – Media and Prosocial Behavior – The Role of Psychology in Advertising – Developmental issues in Media Psychology – The Psychology of The Media Audience – Genres – The Viewer as Psychologist: Identification and Parasocial Interaction – The future of Media Psychology – Psychology in the Media

ny

a

U

References: 1. David Giles, “Media Psychology”, Taylor & Francis, 2008.

2. Richard Jackson Harris, Fred W. Sanborn, “A Cognitive Psychology of Mass 3. Communication”, Sixth Edition, Routledge, 2014.

4. Karen E. Dill, “The Oxford Handbook of Media Psychology”, Oxford University Press, 2013.

5. Virginia Nightingale, “The Handbook of Media Audiences”, Wiley – Blackwell, 2011.

6. Philip M. Napoli, “Audience Evolution: New Technologies and the Transformation of Media Audiences”, Kindle edition, 2010.

ru

15VC3005 SEMIOTICS AND RHETORICS

Credits: 3:0:0

(Version 1.1)

Ka

Course Objectives:  To enable students to apply semiotic analysis in media content.  To make students gain an insight into rhetoric.  To discuss case studies of semiotic interpretation in media.

Course Outcomes:  The students will acquire the skills to interpret media texts  Students will be able to distinguish between denotative and connotative elements of media texts.  The students will demonstrate the ability to interpret different practices in writing.

Course Description: What is Semiotics – Basic Sign Theory – Body Signs – Visual Signs – Language – Metaphor –

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

Semiotic Principles – Dimensions of Semiotic analysis – Multimodal Cohesion– Semiotics for design – Preliminaries: Semiotics and Poetics – Foundations: Signs in the theatre – Theatrical Communication – Dramatic Logic – Dramatic Discourse – The Psychology of Rhetorical Images – The Rhetoric of Visual Arguments – Framing the Fine Arts through Rhetoric – Defining Film Rhetoric – Framing the study of Visual Rhetoric

rs ity

References: 1. Ryan Hembree, “The Complete Graphic Designer”, Rockport publishers, 2011.

2. Marcel Danesi, “Messages, Signs, and Meanings”, Canadian Scholars Press, 3rd edition, 2004.

3. Keir Elam, “The Semiotics of Theatre and Drama”, Routledge, 2005.

4. Theo Van Leeuwen, “Introducing Social Semiotics”, Routledge, 2005.

5. Janice M.Lauer, “Invention in Rhetoric and Composition”, Parlor Press, 2004.

6. Charles A.Hill& Marguerite Helmers, “Defining Visual Rhetorics”, Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Publishers, 2008.

15VC3006 ACTING AND DIRECTING LAB

ve

Credits: 0:0:2

(Version 1.1)

a

U

ni

Course Objectives:  To equip the students with knowledge on acting and its prospects  To bring out the hidden artistic talents of the students through acting  To inculcate an insight on the role of artists and the importance of acting skills Course Outcomes:  The students will have a thorough knowledge on the qualities to possess to become a professional actor  The student will acquire the required skills for acting  The student will understand the necessitate of possessing acting skills

Ka

ru

ny

Course Description: The faculty will frame acting and directing exercises based on different genres and the lab will be completely activity based.

2016 Electronics and Media Technology

ELECTRONICS AND MEDIA TECHNOLOGY

LIST OF SUBJECTS Code 14MT2001 14MT2002 14MT2003 14MT2004 14MT2005 14MT2006 14MT2007 14MT2008 14MT2009 14MT2010 14MT2011 14MT2012 14MT2013 14MT2014 14MT2015 14MT2016 14MT2017 14MT2018 14MT2019 14MT2020 14MT2021 14MT2022 14MT2023 14MT2024 14MT2025 14MT2026 14MT2027 14MT2028 14MT2029 14MT2030 14MT2031 14MT2032 14MT2033 14MT2034 14MT2035 14MT2036 14MT2037 14MT2038 14MT2039 14MT2040 14MT2041 14MT2042 14MT2043 14MT2044 14MT2045 14MT2046 14MT2047 14MT2048 14MT2049 14MT2050 14MT2051

Title of the Subject Script Writing and Video Production Digital Compositing Audio Engineering Audio Engineering and Production Lab Graphics and Animation Graphics and Animation Lab Web Designing Advertising Introduction to 3D Animation Digital Photography Media Laws and Ethics Photography Lab Light and Colors Visual Arts Lab Video Editing Principles Of Cinematography Digital Color Correction Digital TV and Digital Video Engineering Video Compression Techniques Digital Video Processing Satellite Broadcasting Video Production Lab Video Post Production Lab Visual Effects Lab Introduction to Digital Audio Audio Sampling and Synthesis Digital Music Computer Based Music Production Studio Acoustics Audio Program Production Advanced Audio Technologies Post Production Techniques in Audio Digital Audio Effects Audio Signal Processing Computer Based Music Production Lab Audio Post Production Lab Live Sound Reinforcement Lab Computer Animation 3D Modeling and Texturing 3D Lighting 3D Video And Graphics Rendering Techniques Motion Capture Computer Animation Algorithms 3D Animation Lab 2D Animation Lab Java 2D/3D Based Computer Graphics Lab 3D Modeling and Texturing Lab Game Art 2D Game Design 3D Game Design

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Credits 3:0:0 3:1:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0

14MT2052 14MT2053 14MT2054 14MT2055 14MT2056 14MT2057 14MT2058 14MT2059 14VC2001 14VC2002 14VC2003 14VC2004 14VC2005 14VC2006 14VC2007 14VC2008 14VC2009 14VC2010 14VC2011 14VC2012 14VC2013 14VC2014 14VC2015 14VC2016 14VC2017 14VC2018 14VC2019 14VC2020 14VC2021 14VC2022 14VC2023 14VC2024 14VC2025 14VC2026 14VC2027 14VC2028 14VC2029 14VC2030 14VC2031 14VC2032 14VC2033 14VC2034 14VC2035 14VC2036 14VC2037 14VC2038

Game Programming Online Gaming Game Engine Dynamics for Game Developers 3D Game Development 2D Game Design Lab 3D Game Design Lab Mobile Gaming Lab History of art and design Media Orientation Lab Media and Communication Film Structure and Emotion System Sound: Theory and Production Basic Computers Typography Typography lab Introduction to Animation Visual Arts lab - I Visual Arts lab - II (Animatics) Stop motion Animation Principles and Techniques of Design Photography basics Screenplay and Script writing Digital Photography - 1 Visual effects for Animation Form and Colors Elements of film and video Creative photography techniques Lens, light and colors Types of Animation Advertising TV Program Production Digital photography-II Layout and Story boarding for Animation 2D Animation techniques Editing techniques Illustration Lab Video production lab Video post production lab Photography Lighting Lab 3D Animation Software 3D animation Tools and Application Creative suite Lab-I Principles of Animation Sound for Animation Visual Effects for Animation

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 0:0:1 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 0:0:4 0:0:2 0:0:2 2:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:1 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0

14VC2039 14VC2040 14VC2041 14VC2042 14VC2043 14VC2044 14VC2045 14VC2046 14VC2047 14VC2048 14VC2049 14VC2050 14VC2051 14VC2052 14VC2053 14VC2054 14VC2055 14VC2056 14VC2057 14VC2058 14VC2059 14VC2060 14VC2061 14VC2062 14VC2063 14VC2064 14VC2065 14VC2066 14VC2067 14VC2068 14VC2069 14VC2070 14VC2071 14VC2072 14VC2073 14VC2074 14VC2075 14VC2076 14VC2077 14VC2078 14VC2079 14VC2080 14VC2081 14VC2082

Animation in Advertising 2D Animation Production Lighting and Texturing Rendering techniques 3D modeling 3D Animation lab 2D Animation lab Cinematography Film appreciation Performing Art Types of photography Live Sound Writing Directing and Producing Documentary film Indian Culture and Liberal Arts Film Techniques and Aesthetics Lighting for Digital video Visual effects Direction Vfx lab TV production Lab Sound in Media Introduction to Sound Design Voice in Cinema Radio ProgramProduction Sound for Interactive Media Sound Effects and Foley Music for Motion Picture Basic Acoustics Audio post production techniques lab Audio for video lab Visual Design and Culture Ergonomics Photo Journalism Travel photography Macro photography Fashion and Wedding photography Set and Costume for Photography Advertising photography lab Composition Outdoor Photography Techniques Portrait Photography lab Photo documentation lab Digital image manipulation lab Photography lighting Techniques lab

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:1 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:4 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:4 0:0:1

14VC2083 14VC2084 14VC2085 14VC2086 14VC2087 14VC2088 14VC2089 14VC2090 14VC2091 14VC2092 14VC2093 14VC2094 14VC3001 14VC3002 14VC3003 14VC3004 14VC3005 14VC3006 14VC3007 14VC3008 14VC3009 14VC3010 14VC3011 14VC3012 14VC3013 14VC3014 14VC3015 14VC3016 14VC3017 14VC3018

Advanced Typography Communication Design Package Designing lab Graphic Design Visual arts and principles of design Printing Technology Composition lab Interactive design Print production Advertising Production lab Creative suite lab-II Design and Animation lab 3D Video and Graphics Research Methodology Marketing Management Principles of Cinematography Lighting Techniques Media Culture and Communication Research Methodology Lab Cinematography Lab Ad Film Making Lab Event and Media Management Authoring and Virtual Reality Documentary Production Sportscasting Advanced Animation Social Marketing Documentary Film Lab Digital Music Production Lab Lighting and Production Design Lab

3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:1 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2

14MT2001 SCRIPT WRITING AND VIDEO PRODUCTION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To do detailed study on script writing.

To do detailed study on video production.

To understand and deploy an efficient setup for Video Production.

Course Outcome: Students will gain comprehensive knowledge about video production.

Student will be able write good quality scripts.

Students will be able manage and run a Video setup efficiently.

Course Description: The proposal outline – Visual Treatment – Film Treatment – The Shooting Script – Writing Narration – The Story Treatment – The Art of Confrontation – Confrontation Dynamics – Dialogue Devices – Master Scene Script– The

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

story board – Story Outline – Proposal Outline – Script Discussion – Characterization – Story Treatment – Basic Shots –Angles and Camera Movement – Lighting and Colors – Single and Multi-camera Production –Budgeting – Identifying sponsors – Producer – Casting – Hiring Crew – Sets – Props – Location Scouting – Scheduling References Books 1. Steven Katz “Film Directing: Cinematic Motion”, Focal Presspublishers, 2004 2. Antony Friedman “Writing for media” ,Focal press, 2006 3. J Michael Straczynski, “The Complete Book of Scriptwriting”, F+W Media, 2002 4. Linda Aronson, “Scriptwriting Updated: New and Conventional Ways of Writing for the Screen”, Ligare Pvt Ltd, 2000 5. Paul Wheeler , “Digital Cinematography”, Focal Press, 2001

14MT2002 DIGITAL COMPOSITING Credits 3:1:0 Course Objective: To introduce various basic concepts in compositing.

To introduce basic concepts in Visual effects.

To introduce concepts of tracking.

Course Outcome: The students will gain knowledge about the latest trends and technologies involved in digital compositing.

Students will be able to apply the concepts learned in the area of their expertise.

Students will be able to intergrate virtual elements to real footage.

Course Description: Digital representation of visual information - Image Generation, Pixels, Components, Channels, Spatial Resolution, Color Manipulations, Spatial filters, geometric transformations, Expression Language, Filtering - image tracking and stabilization - Film formats - Aspect Ratio - Format Conversion Pipeline - creating elements and integration techniques Lighting, Interactive Color and lighting, light wrapping, Shadows, digital color matching, spill suppression, Atmosphere, camera characteristics Reference Books 1. Ron Brinkmann, The Art and Science of Digital Compositing, second edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2008.

2. Steve Wright, Digital Compositing for Film and Video, Focal Press, 2006 3. Dough Kelly, Digital Composting in-Depth, Coriolis, 2000.

4. Lee Lanier, Professional digital Compositing:Essential Tools & Techniques,Wiley Publishing Inc,2010.

5. Lee Lanier, Digital Compositing with nuke, Focal Press, 2012.

14MT2003 AUDIO ENGINEERING Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To teach the very fundamentals to understand sound To teach in detail the sound reinforcement techniques To introduce to the students the latest trends in Sound reinforcement Course Outcome: This course will enable the students to become proficient with all the sound engineering concepts.

The student will become creative and skillful in handling of all audio equipments.

The student will know the latest trends in sound reinforcement.

Course Description

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Sound theory - Analog audio - Microphones - Electronic level control - Signal processors- Dynamic processors Effect processors - Audio lines and Patch bays - Analog Recording devices and systems - ATR - The fundamentals of magnetic Digital audio– Analog vs Digital – ADC/DAC - Digital mixers - Basics of live sound engineering Basic PA systems - Full Range sound Reinforcement systems - Choice of Equipment - Signal flow - FOH - MOH – MIDI – Latest trends in Sound reinforcement.

Reference Books 1. Ken Pohlmann, “Principles of Digital Audio”, 3rd edition, McGraw-Hill, 2010.

2. David Simons, “Analog Recording”, 3rd Edition, Backbeat Books, 2006.

3. Paul White, “Basic Live Sound”, Sanctuary Publications, 2003.

4. F.Alton Everest, “Master Handbook of Acoustics”, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill Publishing, 2001 5. Frederick N Martin, John Greer N Clark, “Introduction to Audiology”, 9th Edition, 2003 6. Michael Talbot-Smith, “Sound Engineering Explained”, 2nd Edition, Focal Press, 2002.

7. Douglas Self, Richard Brice, Ben Duncan, John Linsley Hood, Ian Sinclair, Andrew Singmin, Don Davis, Eugene Patronis, John Watkinson, “ Audio Engineering”, Focal Press, 2009.

14MT2004 AUDIO ENGINEERING AND PRODUCTION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14MT2003 - Audio Engineering Course Objective: To gain in-depth knowledge in the terms and techniques of audio production.

To learn the various trends and technologies in Audio engineering and production.

To learn the procedure for setting up the studio for a recording session.

Course Outcome: The students will be proficient in handling audio software.

They will also be proficient with nuances in handling equipment, setting up for a recording and Troubleshooting.

They will master the working signal flow of a basic studio set up.

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes producing ADR, MIDI recording, Foley Recording.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14MT2005 GRAPHICS AND ANIMATION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective To learn the animation techniques.

To make the students understand about the 2D animation production.

To provide the technical foundations for involving in complex animation applications.

Course Outcome To do the types of animation compositing techniques and post production in 2D Animation.

Enable the student to understand concepts which can be applied to animation and gaming.

To apply the technical features in the field of graphic designing.

Course Description:

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Basic geometric objects - Interpolators for continuous changes, implementations - Lines and pixel graphics Structural algorithms - Drawing arbitrary curve - Antialiasing– Areas - texts and colours - Geometric transformations - Animating moving objects - Projections - modeling 3D objects - Surface modeling - Normal vectors - Clipping volumes - Algorithms for visible surface determination - Illumination and shading: Light sources – Reflections – textures - particle systems - Dynamic surfaces Interaction - Collision detection - Sound effectsSteroscopic viewing - Homogeneous coordinates and transformation - Interpolations.

Reference Books 1. Aaron E. Walsh ,Doug Gehringer , “Java 3D API Jump-Start”, Prentice Hall, 2001 2. Leen Ammeraal ,Kang Zhang, “Computer Graphics for Java Programmers”, John Wiley & Sons,2007.

3. Frank Klawonn, “Introduction to Computer Graphics Using Java 2D and 3D”, Springer, 2008.

4. Patric Naughton , Herbert Schildt, “The Complete Reference “Java 2”,Third edition Tata Mc Graw Hills, 2001.

5. Jonathan B. Knudsen , “Java 2D Graphics”, O'reilly Media , 2005

14MT2006 GRAPHICS AND ANIMATION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite : 14MT2005 - Graphics and Animation Course Objective: As a part of this lab, the students will learn basics concepts of flash.

This lab aims at imparting basic knowledge to students regarding character, background designing and animation.

As a part of this lab, the students will learn basics concepts of graphics designing using java.

Course Outcome: By the end of this lab classes, the student will be able to design sprites in flash and animate them.

By the end of this lab the students will learn concepts of designing and animation.

This lab will enable students to design 2D/3D graphical objects using java programming.

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes creating a flash movie and graphics using Java scripting.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14MT2007 WEB DESIGNING Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective To know the basics of networks and the network devices.

To understand and use basic HTML tags for designing web pages.

To learn Java-script to develop dynamic pages.

Course Outcome: It enables student to learn the basic and advanced features in PHP and ASP. Students will know to create a complete webpage.

The students will be enabled to create interactive web pages.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Description: Introduction to internet and world wide web –Basic html – XHTML - Cascading style sheet –inline and embedded style sheet-Linking style sheets- positioning elements-user style sheets JAVA Script– Arrays – Expressions – Control Structures – Functions – DHTML - Object model and collections- event model-event on click-event on load-error handling with onerror-event bubbling-filters and transitions – PHP - ASP Reference Books: 1. David Crowder and Rhona Crowder,“Web Design with HTML/Flash/Javascript & Ecommerce BIBLE”, Wiley DreamTech India Pvt. Ltd,2001 2. Thomas A. Powell, “HTML: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill, 2001.

3. H.M. Deitel, P.J. Deitel, “Internet & World Wide Web – How to program”, 3rd Ed., , et al.,Prentice Hall, 2003.

4. Danny Goodman, Michael Morison, Paul Novitski, “Java Script Bible”, Wiley Publication, 7 th Edition 5. David Flanagan, “JavaScript: The Definitive Guide”, O'Reilly Media, Inc, 7 th Edition, 2011.

14MT2008 ADVERTISING Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To understand the purpose and meaning of advertising To understand advertising as an industry To understand the process of communication in advertising Course Outcome: Students will be enabled to apply the advertising concepts practically.

Students will understand the latest terminologies used in advertising industry.

Students will be effective in conducting an PR Campaigns.

Course Description: Understanding advertising today - The foundations of advertising - Audience Definition, Research, and Planning Objective, Strategy and Plans- Intercultural and International Advertising - Creative Process - Creative Strategy – Art Production – Print Production – Electronic Production - Media Planning - Public relations and special communications- local advertising –from plan to results - Copy writing for radio & TV - Visual communication – Television art Direction – Broadcast production – Effective Web Design-Sales Promotion & Special AdvertisingConsumer & Trade – Retail advertising Reference Books: 1. Courtland L. Bovee, “Advertising Excellence” McGraw Hill Publications, Delhi, 2001.

2. Sean Brierley, “The Advertising and Hand book”, New York, 2000.

3. McGraw Hill, “Principles of Advertising and IMC”, McGraw Hill, 2000.

4. John McDonough, Karen Egolf, “Encyclopedia of Advertising”, Fitzroy Dearborn, 2003.

5. Tony Yeshin, “Advertising”, McGraw Hill, Cengage Learning EMEA, 2006.

6. Otto Kleppner, “Fundamentals of Advertising”, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2000.

14MT2009 INTRODUCTION TO 3D ANIMATION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective To present concepts required to understand the steps in 3D animation.

To learn the procedures that lead to the completion of a fully rendered 3 Dimensional computer animation.

To make the students understand about the 3D animation production.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Outcome The students will wield any 3D Animation software to its merit.

By the end of this course, the student will be able to model and design.

Enabling students to design and texture characters.

Course Description: Pre Production process – Production scheduling - Modeling basics –coordinate systems –viewing windows – Geometric primitives –transformations –common modeling techniques –hierarchies –Booleans and trims - The camera –Lights –Surface characteristics –shading algorithms –rendering algorithms –background images –Surface texture mapping –solid texture mapping –final rendering –Key framing –interpolations –parameter curve editing – dope sheet editing –kinematics –motion plans –shape deformations –Animation Techniques - Virtual sculpting texturing – Post Production Process Reference Books 1. Michael O’Rourke, “Principles of Three – Dimensional Computer animation”, 3rd edition, W.W. Norton & company, 2003.

2. John Vince, “Essential Computer Animation”, springer UK, 2000.

3. John Edgar Park, “Understanding 3D animation using Maya”, Springer Science & business Media. Inc, 2005.

4. Marcia Kuperberg, Martin W. Bowman, “Guide to Computer Animation: For Tv, Games, Multimedia and Web”, Focal press, 2002.

5. Andy Beane, “3D Animation Essentials”, John Wiley & Sons, 2012.

14MT2010 DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHY Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To enrich the students with the evolution of Photography To provide knowledge on the recent trends of Digital Photography To impart knowledge on the photo processing techniques and the career scope in photography Course Outcome: The students will understand the various stages in the growth of photographic technology from analogue to digital The students will know how to use recent technology for capturing images and to manipulate them using editing software for different applications.

The students will also appreciate the ways to use photography for gainful employment and as a rewarding hobby.

Course Description: Introduction to Photography – History and Development – Types of Camera – Types of Lenses – Lighting – Filters – Photo Composition – Elements of Composition – DSLR Camera – Introduction to Digital Photography – Image Sensors – Areas of Photography – Digital Darkroom – Image Processing – Enhancing Images – Manipulating Images – Sharing Images – Equipment and Resources Reference Books: 1. John Hedgecoe, “The Book of Photography”, Dorling Kindersley, 2005.

2. John Hedgecoe, “The Art of Digital Photography”, Dorling Kindersley, 2006.

3. Michael Langford & Efthimia Bilissi, “Advanced Photography”, Focal Press, 7 th Edition, 2008.

4. Bruce Barnbaum, “The Art of Photography”,Rockynook, 2010.

5. Tomang, “Digital Photography Essentials”, Dorling Kindersley, 2011.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

14MT2011 MEDIA LAWS AND ETHICS Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: To provide an overall idea about the Indian constitution.

To know about the recent developments in Media laws and Standards.

To make the students aware about Media ethics and standards.

Course Outcome: Students will be able to apply all the laws and ethical code in their profession.

The student will be able to apply the media ethics in their productions.

Students will be able well adept with the intellectual property rights and media laws.

Course Description: Overview of the Indian Constitution - Fundamental rights - Duties of citizens - Directive principles of state policy, Functions of Executive - Acts: PRB, Video, Broadcasting, Copyright, Advertising, Cyber space - TRAI, BRAI Cinematographic Act 1952, - Right to information and Official Secrets Act, Autonomy and Prasar Bharati Act, Broadcasting Bill. - Telephone recordings, Juveniles as News Sources, Subpoenas and Shield Laws, Access Laws, Ethics Reference Books : 1. Neelamalar. M, “Media Laws and Ethics”, Prentice Hall of India, 2009.

2. Basu, Law of the Press in India, Practice Hall of India, 2003.

3. Radha Krishna Murthi, Indian Press Laws, Indian Publishers, Distributors, 2001.

4. Philip Patterson, Lee Wilking, Media Ethics, Issues Capes, McGraw Hill, 2004.

5. Clifford G.Christians, Media Ethics, Cases and Moral Reasoning, Pearson, 2006.

6. Leslie, Mass Communication Ethics, Thomson Learning, 2004.

7. Basu, Introduction to Indian constitution, Practice Hall of India, 2003.

14MT2012 PHOTOGRAPHY LAB Credits 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14MT2010 Digital Photography Course Objective: To improve the framing sense of the student.

To help the student learn and understand the lighting conditions to get the best output.

To help the student to produce creative images.

Course outcome: The framing sense of the student would have improved.

The students will know the exact specs to be used for different lighting conditions.

The quality of the produced photographs will be substantially better.

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes areas such as lighting, composition and different genres of photography for both indoor as well as outdoor.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

14MT2013 LIGHT AND COLORS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To provide an overview on light and color theories.

The role of color and light in media.

To provide knowledge for color usage in visual effects Course Outcome: The students will be enabled to apply their knowledge in the area of creative use of light.

The students will also be enabled to apply their knowledge in media applications.

The students will gain the theoretical base for practicing preparation of color images.

Course Description: Direction and Quality of Light: The basics – Looking at light – Light determines form – Types of Lighting/Quality of Light – Light as Seen by the Eye and by Film or Sensors and the Inverse Square Law – The colour wheel and colour sphere – Colour Composition – Colour and Emotion – Colour Contrast and Tone – Light and Colour Control – Subjectivity and Mood of Colour – Creative use of Colours – Use of colours in Media – Colour effects – Digital Painting – Optical illusion – Visual mixing – Experience in rendering methods References Books: 1. Neil Van Niekerk, “Direction and Quality of Light”, Amherst Media, 2013.

2. Bruce Barnbaum, “The Art of Photography”,Rockynook, 2010.

3. Tom Fraser Adam Banks , “The complete guide to color”, The Illex Press Ltd.,2004 4. Norman Koren, “Color management and color science: Introduction”, 2004.

5. Kelly Dempski & Emmanuel Viale, “Advanced lighting and materials with shaders, Worldware Publishing”, 2005.

6. Color Management , Bruce Fraser, Chris Murphy and Fred Bunting, 2003.

7. Ralph Donald, Riley Maynard and Thomas span, Fundamentals of Television Production, Pearson, 2008.

8. Kirk Tuck, “Minimalist Lighting”, Amherst Media, 2009.

14MT2014 VISUAL ARTS LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course objective: To help the students improve their Visual and Artistic sense.

To improve the skills of the students in the field of Visual Design.

To introduce the student to the world of Visual Arts.

Course outcome: The artistic sense of the students will improve.

The students will acquire new visually artistic skills.

The students would be able implement the basic principles of design to get a better output.

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes drawing basic shapes, composing and portraying still life through drawing.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

14MT2015 VIDEO EDITING Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To enrich the students with the basics of video and film editing To emphasise the importance of editing and how it helps in narration To provide a complete theoretical knowledge for the students to become professional editors Course Outcome: The students will get thorough knowledge on the techniques of video and film editing Professionally sound knowledge editors would be created Students will get updated till the recent trends and technology in editing Course Description History of Film Editing –Editing Basics –Experiments in Editing –Understanding the Footage –– The Shot – The meaning of the Shot – Continuity - The practice of Editing – Principles of Editing – Goals of Editing – Sound Editing – Editing for the Genre – Editing for Aesthetics – Editing for Dramatic Emphasis – Transitions and Edit Categories – General Practices for Editors – The Final Cut – New Technologies – Montage and its Applications Reference Books 1. Roy Thompson & Christopher Bowen, Grammar of the Edit, Focal Press, 2 nd Edition, 2009.

2. David Bordwell , Kristin Thompson, “Film Art: An Introduction”, Mc GrawHill, 9 th Edition, 2012.

3. Karel Reisz & Gavin Millar, The Technique of Film Editing, Focal Press, 2 nd Edition, 2010.

4. Ken Dancyger, The Technique of Film & Video Editing, Focal Press, 5 th Edition, 2011.

5. James Monaco,How to read a Film, Oxford University Press, 3 rd edition, 2000.

6. Roger Crittenden, Fine Cuts: The Art of European Film Editing, Focal Press, 2006.

14MT2016 PRINCIPLES OF CINEMATOGRAPHY Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: To teach the students with the basics of Cinematography.

To impart knowledge to the students on the aesthetics of Cinematography.

To keep the students updated with the techniques in cinematography.

Course Outcome: The students will master the time tested concept of applying cinematography in their production techniques.

The students will get trained to industry standards.

The students can able to understand and work in the field of Cinematography.

Course Description: Camera Angle: Types of Camera Angles – Scene requirements Continuity – Cinematic Time & Space – Duration of the Shot: Filming the Action – Scene Direction – Different types of Action Axis – Cutting – Close Ups – Extreme, Over the Shoulder, Types of close ups – Composition: Photographic Image – Composition Rules – Balance, Unity & Emphasis– Types of Editing – Sound Flow Reference Books: 1. Joseph V. Mascelli, “The 5Cs of Cinematography”, Silman-James Press, 2001.

2. Ivan Cury, “Directing & Producing for Television”, Focal Press, 2007.

3. Dan Ablan, “Cinematography and Directing”, New Riders, 2000.

4. “Cinematographer’s Field Guide”, Kodak Entertainment Imaging, 2000.

5. Sonja Schenk & Ben Long, “The Digital Filmmaking Handbook”, Course Technology, 2012.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

14MT2017 DIGITAL COLOR CORRECTION Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective To study the human perception of colors.

To teach the fundamentals of colors.

To know the role of colorist.

Course Outcome Student will know analysis of color in a video.

Student will gain comprehensive knowledge about colors theory.

Student will gain knowledge on color correction.

Course Description: Visual perception - Color Theory – The color Era of world Cinema - The Primary color correction - Tonal Range Primer – Alterative Displays and Tools for Analysis – Tonal Correction Tools – Main tools- Histograms - Curves tab - Luma Range Display – color control Primer - Balancing an Image – Analysing color cast – color control tools – The Secondary color correction – Color Vector Isolation – Color Secondary Curves – secondaries with the pros – vignettes – Spot Color Correction – Correcting shots – Telling the Story – Matching Shots –Creating Look Reference Books : 1. Steve Hullfish, “The Art and techniques of Color correction”, Focal Press, 2008 2. Steve hullfish, Jaime Fowler, “Color correction for video” second Edition, Focal Press, 2009 3. Alexis Van Hurkman’s, “Color Correction Handbook” Peachpit, 2011.

4. Jack James, “Digital Intermediates for Film and Video”, Elsevier, 2006.

14MT2018 DIGITAL TELEVISION AND DIGITAL VIDEO ENGINEERING Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To Overview of current and emerging trends in digital television.

Comparing the different standards of digital television.

Providing an overview on digital television signals over layered protocol.

Course Outcome: The student will be able to identify techniques involved in digital television broadcasting and transmission.

To student will be able to monitor basics and principles of digital television systems.

The student will be able to understand the new standards for compression and transmissions which are used in new TV applications.

Course Description: Basics of television- eye brain mechanism, scanning standards, digital video fundamentals, Digital television transmission- transmission lines for digital television-Transmitting antennas for digital television- patterns, types of digital television antennas, dtv networking and transport technologies- Networking and transmission protocols transmission protocols, transport technologies. Channel coding and modulation for dtv- picture quality analysis, International system for digital television- mpeg-2 systems layer, wimax.

Reference Books 1. Michael Robin, Michael Poulin “Digital Television Fundamentals”, McGraw Hill 2 nd Edition, 2000.

2. Gerald W.Collins, “Digital Television Transmission”, John Wiley & Sons 2001 3. Marcelo S. Alencar, “Digital television Systems”, Cambridge University Press 2009.

4. Walter Fisher. “ Digital Video And Audio Broadcasting Technology”, Springer 2 nd Edition, 2008.

5. Keith Jack, “Video De-mystified”, LLH Technology Publishers, Second Edition, 2001.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

14MT2019 VIDEO COMPRESSION TECHNIQUES Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: This course introduces principles and current technologies of video compression.

This course aims at providing detailed knowledge digital image and video compression techniques.

Providing an overview on digital video signal compression over streaming media.

Course Outcome: The student will be able to identify techniques involved in digital video standards and their compression techniques.

The student will be able to implement a complete video compression system to achieve a specific task.

The student can analyze and interpret the results of video compression system.

Course Description: Compression- lossy and lossless, Video sampling and synthesis- entropy coding, JPEG- Encoding and Decoding, motion JPEG, Motion compensation- motion vectors, block matching, motion estimators, MPEG I- MPEG IIMPEG IV-MPEG 7-MPEG 21, DV compression, wavelets, streaming media.

Reference Books: 1. Peter Symes, “Video Compression De-mystified”, McGraw Hill 2nd Edition, 2001.

2. Peter Symes, “Digital Video Compression”, McGraw Hill 2 nd Edition, 2001.

3. Yun Q. Shi, Huifang Sun, “Image and Video Compression for Multimedia Engineering”, CRC Press 2001.

4. Raymond Westwater, “Real-Time Video Compression: Techniques and Algorithms”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2003.

5. Keith Jack, “Video De-mystified”, LLH Technology Publishers, Second Edition, 2001.

14MT2020 DIGITAL VIDEO PROCESSING Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: This course covers algorithmic aspects of digital video processing and important industrial applications.

This course aims at providing information regarding video communication, human-computer interaction and video surveillance.

This course introduces concepts for mathematical modeling of video.

Course Outcome: Students will understand the acquisition and format of digital video signals.

Students will grasp the techniques on motion estimation techniques including optical flow estimation and block matching algorithms.

Students will gain a comprehensive understanding of various video processing tasks including Denoising, restoration and super-resolution Course Description: Video formation, perception and representation- Video capture and display- digital video-notation-itu-r.bt.601, digital video formats, Fourier analysis and human visual system response- space signals and systems, video sampling- Sampling of video signals ,Filtering operations in cameras and display devices, video modeling and 2d motion estimation- two-dimensional motion models, two-dimensional motion estimation-optical flow- multi resolution , waveform based coding and video compression standards- video compression standards-video telephony with h.261 and h.263-h.261 overview-h.263.

Reference Books: 1. J.R.Ohm , “Multimedia Communication Technology”, Springer Publication. 2004.

2. David R Bull, “Video Coding for Mobile Communications”, Academic Press, 2002.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

3.

4.

5.

A.I.Bovik , “Handbook on Image and Video Processing”, Academic Press, 2005.

Tekalp, Digital Video, Prentice Hall, Second Edition,2004.

Keith Jack, “Video De-mystified”, LLH Technology Publishers, Second Edition, 2001.

14MT2021 SATELLITE BROADCASTING Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective To learn the advanced developments in satellite technology in Broadcasting To gain understanding of Systems and operation of satellite Broadcasting To study the techniques of Satellite and internet broadcast program productions.

Course Outcome The student will gain knowledge on satellite Broadcasting in India The student will obtain skills on approaches and patterns in Satellite stations This will provide skills on Practical application on internet and satellite broadcasting.

Course Description Over view of Broadcasting- birth of radio/TV network-Digital and HD revolution-Satellite and Cable – Mobile music-Digital transmission- Structure and management- Satellite Programming- News and research- Digital network- Production techniques- Digital audio & Television broadcasting- Consulted and Syndicated ProductionFuture trends in Satellite Broadcasting.

Reference Books 1. Michael C, Keith,The Radio Station: Broadcast Satellite and Internet,Focal Press: 8 th edition, 2009 2. Valerie Geller, Beyond Powerful Radio: A Communication Guide to the internet Age, Focal Press, 2011 3. Steve Warrem , Radio Station, Focal Press,2004..

4. Angela Wadia, Broadcasting Management in India, Kanishka Publishers, 2007.

5. K.N.Raja Rao, Fundementals of Satellite Communication,PHI Learning Pvt Ltd,2004.

14MT2022 VIDEO PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course objective: To teach the student the intricate process involved in production of various genres of videos.

To enable the student to choose the right type of shots to get the story across to the audience.

To make a student understand the problems one faces during the creation of a video project help him find solutions.

Course outcome: The students will be able to deliver better projects.

The students will be able to portray the scenes conceived in their mind.

The choice of framing by the students will be better.

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes making Video production with concepts such as Documentary, Short film, Advertisements by learning types of shots and angles.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

14MT2023 VIDEO POST PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14MT2001 Script Writing and Video Production Course objective: To help students learn and develop the editing sense required to create good projects.

To help students identify and rectify problems in the footage.

To help students to learn basic tricks of the editing.

Course outcome: The editing sense of the student will improve, as they would have edited hours of footage.

The students would be able to make use of the software in a professional manner.

Students would have developed a right sense of choosing transitions.

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes to learn the basic user interface of video editing software and to rough cut the videos and also to add transitions with the footages.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14MT2024 VISUAL EFFECTS LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14MT2001 Script Writing and Video Production Course Objective To develop in students the foundation skills of the tools and techniques used in the visual effects industry, Specializing in the creation of 2D/3D computer animated elements for digital visual effects Both 2D and 3D tracking of live action and CGI elements Course outcome: Students will be able to use advanced CG tools.

Students will be enabled to create preliminary 3D CG representations of environments, visual effects.

Students will be enabled to create motion picture sequences that is visually and technically representative of final production imagery.

Course Description: Experiments based upon CG representation, create motion picture sequence, 2D and 3D tracking will be dealt with.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14MT2025 INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL AUDIO Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective To understand the principles of digital audio.

To gain an understanding in digital audio signal processing.

To gain an understanding in various conversion techniques in digital audio signal processing.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Outcome Student will be able to understand and visualize digital audio.

Student will be able to understand the various techniques used to enhance the quality of audio using digital audio signal processing.

Students will be able to choose and use various digital audio interfaces.

Course Description: Digital Audio – Processes – Programmable delay – Time compressions – information content of analog audio – Conversion – Sampling and aliasing – Oversampling – Noise Shaping – Digital Filters – Transforms – Sampling Rate conversions – Sub band Coding – Azimuth recording and rotary heads – Data separation – Interleaving – Digital Audio Interfaces – Frame structure – MADI – Synchronizing – Asynchronous Operation Reference Books: 1. John Watkinson, “Introduction to Digital Audio”, Focal Press, Second Edition, 2002.

2. Marina Bosi, Richard E. Goldberg, “Introduction to Digital Audio Coding and Standards”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2003.

3. Mark Kahrs, Karlheinz Brandenburg, “Applications Of Digital Signal Processing To Audio And Acoustics”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2002.

4. Andreas Spanias, Ted Painter, Venkatraman Atti, “Audio Signal Processing And Coding”, WileyInterscience, 2006.

14MT2026 AUDIO SAMPLING AND SYNTHESIS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective • To impart basic knowledge of sound sampling and synthesis techniques with applications.

• To enable Students to understand and work with complex synthesis based software’s.

• To serve as an introduction to world of sound design.

Course Outcome • Develop understanding on sound synthesis techniques.

• The student would be able to the make the most out of Sampling and synthesis software’s.

• The student would have understood the basics necessary for the creation of sound.

Course Description Sound synthesis - Digital signal and sampling - Tape Techniques- Experimental versus Popular music-electro acoustic music - Fundamental principles of electronics and acoustics - Analog synthesis techniques - Digital synthesis techniques - hybrid techniques - Synthesis applications - multitimbrality- polyphony - GM-on-board effects - Controllers - drum machines - Sequencers - workstations –accompaniment - groove boxes - studios on computers – Analysis - future of synthesis.

Reference Books 1. Martin Russ, Sound synthesis and sampling, Focal Press, 3rd edition, 2009.

2. Sam McGuire, Roy Pritts, Audio Sampling - A Practical Guide, Focal Press, Ist Edition, 2008.

3. Eduardo Miranda, Computer Sound Design: Synthesis techniques and programming, Focal press, 2 nd edition, 2002.

4. Nick Collins, Introduction to Computer Music, Wiley, 2009.

5. Michael Prager, Reason 6 Power!, Cengage Learning, 2012.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

14MT2027 DIGITAL MUSIC Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To learn analyzing music via mathematical models.

The course provides knowledge on techniques and concepts involved in producing music using algorithms and system models.

This course is designed to give students a broad-based exposure to musical notes and analyzing musical instruments mathematically.

Course Outcome: The student can develop simple algorithms for producing music.

With successful completion of the course, students will be able to understand the mathematical approaches behind music production.

The student will be able to apply the algorithms in music synthesis and acoustic modeling.

Course Description: Introduction - Waves and Harmonics - Sound, The human ear, sine waves - Harmonic motion, Vibrating strings Fourier’s theory of harmonic analysis - Mathematician’s Guide to the Orchestra - Wave equation for strings, Initial conditions, bowed string, Wind instruments, The drum, horn, THE BELL, Acoustics: Consonance and dissonance and Scales and temperament -Pythagorean scale, the cycle of fifths, Eitz’s notation - Digital Music: WAV AND MP3 FILES, MIDI Synthesis, the Yamaha DX7 and FM synthesis, C Sound, FM synthesis using CSound, Simple FM instruments.

Reference Books: 1. Dave Benson, Music: A Mathematical Offering, Cambridge University Press,2006.

2. Miller Puckette, The Theory and Technique of Electronic Music, World Scientific Publishing Co., 2007.

3. John Fauvel , Raymond Flood, Robin Wilson, “Music and Mathematics: From Pythagoras to Fractals”, Oxford University Press, 2006.

4. David Wright, “Mathematics and Music”, Library of Congress Publications, 2009.

14MT2028 COMPUTER BASED MUSIC PRODUCTION Credits: 3:0:0 Course objective • The students will appreciate the basics in the functioning of digital audio workstation.

• The students will be exposed to the use MIDI and digital audio tools in music production.

• The Students will be exposed to the various Effects creation process.

Course outcome • This course will enable the students to be creatively aware of the skills in music production.

• They will be aware of the digital tools used in music production.

• They will be aware of the latest technologies and the digital tools used in music production.

Course Description Introduction to DAW: Hardware and software needed, Mac & PC platform for DAW-Hardware and software set up for music production : PCI cards - USB – Fire Wire/ i link - PCMCIA Cards - Audio interfaces - MIDI interface types and features – Sound Card Driver installation basics - Surface controller setup – MIDI - MIDI implementation charts - Creating a new song/MIDI file - Recording types-Common MIDI Recording Problems and their Solutions Analog and Digital audio recording - Basic track recording - dubbing - Wet vs Dry recording –Virtual MIDI instruments - Preparing tracks for audio editing-Mixing, Mastering and Archiving Reference Books 1. Zack Price, “Beginner’s guide to computer based music production”, Cherry lane music Company, 2004.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

2.

3.

4.

5.

Martin Russ, “Sound Synthesis and Sampling”, Third Edition, Focal Press, 2009 Francis Rumsey, Tim McCormick, “Sound and Recording: An Introduction”, Fifth edition, Focal Press, 2006 Andrea Pejrolo, “Creative sequencing techniques for Music Production”, Focal Press, 2005.

Emile D Menache “The Desktop Studio: A Guide to Computer-based Audio Production”, Hal Leonard Corporation, 2002.

14MT2029 STUDIO ACOUSTICS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective The course details on the acoustic design of an audio studio.

The behavior of sound inside an enclosed space and the problems caused by reflecting surfaces inside a room are discussed.

The solutions offered by various design factors inside the room and the role of acoustic materials used in studios are highlighted.

Course Outcome The students will know ways of acoustic treatment for a professional recording room and listening room with critical analysis and design.

They will be able to pinpoint acoustic errors in a recording studio and suggest modifications to rectify them.

Students can experiment with various combinations of structural & acoustic design in making their own studios for home recording & professional recording.

Course Description Sound, decibels and hearing – Acoustic requirements for an audio studio - Sound isolation principles – Room acoustics & controlling sound inside room – Designing a neutral listening room – Rooms with characteristic acoustics – Variable acoustics – Loudspeakers behavior in rooms – Methods of flattening room response – Different Control rooms – Live End Dead End Approach in listening rooms – Response disturbance due to mixers & furniture – Surround Sound – Mobile Control Room.

Reference Books: 1. Philip Newell, Recording Studio Design, Focal Press, 2007 2. F Alton Everest, The Master Handbook of Acoustics, McGraw Hill, 2000 3. Ken Pohlmann, Handbook of Sound Studio Construction: Rooms for Recording and Listening, McGraw Hill, 2012 4. William M. Hartmann, Principles of Musical Acoustics, Springer, 2013 5. Oswald Leroy & Mack A. Breazeale, Physical Acoustics: Fundamentals and Applications, Springer 2012

14MT2030 AUDIO PROGRAM PRODUCTION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To understand the various types of Audio Production techniques.

To know the system requirements.

To know the recording process.

Course Outcome: Students will be adept in the recording process.

Students will be proficient with the technical terms and the ethics to be followed in Programproduction.

Student will be able to understand the process and the terminologies used in the audio industry.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Description: The Recording Studio – The Control Room – The people who make it all happen – The recording Process – Tools and Techniques – MIDI and Electronic Music Technology – Synchronization – The art and technology of Mixing – Mixing Styles – Mechanics of Mixing – Signal Processing – Noise reduction – Monitoring - Mastering – Multimedia and the Web – Digital Audio Workstation Reference Books: 1. David Miles Huber, Robert E. Runstein, "Modern Recording Techniques”, Focal Press, Eighth Edition, 2014.

2. Bobby Owinski, “The Mixing Engineers handbook”, Thomson Course Technology, Second Edition, 2006 3. Andrea Pejrolo, “Creative sequencing techniques for Music Production”, Focal Press, 2005.

4. Emile D Menache “The Desktop Studio: A Guide to Computer-based Audio Production”, Hal Leonard Corporation, 2002.

14MT2031 ADVANCED AUDIO TECHNOLOGY Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To increase the knowledge of the students in the Field of Audio.

To introduce innovative concepts in Audio.

To push students to do research.

Course Outcome: Students would know the latest advancement in the field of Audio.

It would increase the knowledge of the students with regard to Audio.

It would motivate some take up research Course Description Latest trends in Input Transducers, Cable and transmission standards, Latest trends in Analog and digital mixers, Audio interface technologies, Amplifier technologies, Output Transducer Technologies: Line arrays, Surround Sound systems-Effect processing technologies-dynamics processing-Sequencer technologies-Virtual Instrument Studios-Pitch Correction technologies- Noise removal technologies.

Reference Books 1. Glen Ballou, Electroacoustic Devices: Microphones and Loudspeakers, Focal Press, 2009.

2. Douglas Self, Audio Engineering Explained, Focal Press, 2010.

3. John Eargle , The Microphone Book, Focal Press, 2005.

4. Martin Russ, “Sound Synthesis and Sampling”, Third Edition, Focal Press, 2009.

5. Technology Trends in Audio Engineering, AES. 6. Mike Collins, A Professional Guide to Audio Plug-ins and Virtual Instruments, Focal press, 2003.

14MT2032 POST PRODUCTION TECHNIQUES IN AUDIO Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To introduce various options available to improve the quality of sound.

To learn various techniques in solving the technical and creative problems in audio post production.

To give guideline and technical tips in setting up a reliable audio post setup.

Course Outcome: A sound understanding about the requirements for a good audio post setup.

A systematic approach to any audio post production.

Students will understand various options that are available to improve the quality of soundtrack.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Description: Problems with Sound Quality – Lipsync Problems - Edit and Mix Problems – Random Strangenesses - Planning the Track - Different Media Are Heard Differently - Spread Things Around - Preproduction for Postproduction - The Postproduction Sequence – Transfer Technology - Digital Audio Transfers - Voice-over Recording and Dialog Replacement - Editing Dialog - Finding and Editing Music - Working with Sound Effects - Equalization - Dynamics Control - Time-Domain Effects - Time and Pitch Manipulation - Noise Reduction - Stereo Simulation - The Mix – After the Mix Reference Books: 1. Jay Rose, “Audio Post Production for Digital Audio”, 2002.

2. Stanley R. ALten, “Audio in Media”, Wadsworth, 2005.

3. Michael Talbot-Smith, “Sound Engineering Explained”, Focal Press, 2002.

4. Zach Price, “Beginners guide to Computer based Music Production”, Cherry Lane Music company, 2004.

14MT2033 DIGITAL AUDIO EFFECTS Credits: 3:0:0 Course objective: To help the student understand the basic working of Audio effects.

To teach the practical applications of audio effects.

To teach the implementation of effects in software’s.

Course outcome: Students will be able to simulate the audio effects.

Students will be able to intergrate learned effects into their productions.

Students will be able to perform high level processing of audio signals Course Description: Introduction, Filters- basic filters, equalizers, time varying filters, Delays- structures and audio effects, Modulators, Demodulators, Non linear processing: basic effects, 3D with headphones and loudspeakers, reverb, Time segment processing : pitch shifting, time stretching, Time frequency processing: phase vocoder and effects, Spectral and filter processing : LPC, cepstrum, feature extraction, FX and transformations.

Reference Books: 1. Udo Zolzer , “DAFX: Digital Audio Effects”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2011.

2. Geoffrey Francis,"The Audio Effects Workshop”, Cengage Learning ,2011.

3. Will Pirkle,”Designing Audio Effect Plug-Ins in C++: With Digital Audio Signal Processing Theory”, Focal press, 2013.

4. David Sonnenschein , “Sound Design: The Expressive Power of Music, Voice and Sound Effects in Cinema”, Michael wiese productions, 2001.

5. Ric Viers,"The Sound Effects Bible: How to Create and Record Hollywood Style Sound Effects”, Michael wiese productions, 2008.

14MT2034 AUDIO SIGNAL PROCESSING Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective To provide a basis for hardware systems used in Digital Audio Signal Processing.

To discuss about algorithms for processing digital audio signals.

To provide solutions to problems faced in Digital Audio Signal Processing.

Course Outcome Students will be able to choose the optimum system for Digital Audio Signal Processing.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Students will be adept in understanding the various algorithms used in Digital Audio Signal Processing.

Students will be able to have a clear approach to research areas in Digital Audio Signal Processing.

Course Description: Studio Technology – Digital Transmission Systems – Storage Media – Signal Quantization – Dither – Spectral Shaping of quantization – Number Representation – A/D and D/A conversion methods – AD Converters – DA Converters - Audio Processing System – Equalizers - Room Simulation - Dynamic Range Control - Sampling Rate Conversion - Synchronous Conversion - Asynchronous Conversion - Interpolation Methods - Audio Coding Reference Books: 1. Udo Zölzer, “Digital Audio Signal Processing”, John Wiley & Sons, 2 nd Edition, 2008 2. Yiteng (arden) Huang, Jacob Benesty, “Audio Signal Processing For Next-Generation Multimedia Communication Systems”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2004.

3. Mark Kahrs, Karlheinz Brandenburg, “Applications Of Digital Signal Processing To Audio And Acoustics”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2002.

4. Andreas Spanias, Ted Painter, Venkatraman Atti, “Audio Signal Processing And Coding”, WileyInterscience, 2006.

14MT2035 COMPUTER BASED MUSIC PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14MT2028 - Computer Based Music Production Course objective • The students will appreciate the basics in the functioning of digital audio workstation.

• The students will be exposed to the use MIDI and digital audio tools in music production.

• The Students will be exposed to the various Effects creation process.

Course outcome • Will enable the students to be creatively aware of the skills in music production.

• They will be use and apply digital tools in music production.

• Will be able to adopt latest technology in Computer based music production.

Course Description: List of experiment based upon Instrument Miking techniques, Vocal Miking Techniques, Insert and Send Effects, Equalization, Mixing and Mastering.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14MT2036 AUDIO POST PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14MT2032 - Post Production Techniques in Audio Course Objective: To introduce various options available to improve the quality of sound.

To learn various techniques in solving the technical and creative problems in audio post production.

To give guideline and technical tips in setting up a reliable audio post setup.

Course Outcome: A sound understanding about the requirements for a good audio post setup.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

A systematic approach to any audio post production.

Students will understand various practical options that are available to improve the quality of soundtrack.

Course Description: Experiments based upon ADR, Foley insert, Mixing and Mastering will be dealt with.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14MT2037 LIVE SOUND REINFORCEMENT LAB Credits 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14MT2003 – Audio Engineering Course Objective: The course portrays how indoor & outdoor public address system functions in different environments.

The behavior of sound in varied situations and the techniques for efficiently handling sound to give the best speech & music performance are discussed.

Details on microphones, audio amplifiers & loudspeakers are provided with minimum amount of technicalities that are just sufficient for the students of this course.

Course Outcome: The students will be able to plan and execute a sound reinforcement system for a variety of occasions.

They will be able to deliver good quality audio to the audience by choosing the right equipments & tweaking the listening area for optimum presentation of sound.

They will come to know the functions of each equipment in the audio chain so that they will be able to guide the subordinates while rigging the system.

Course Description: Experiments based upon Basic of miking techniques for outdoor performances, effective sound reinforcement, Speaker calibration, Testing will be dealt with Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14MT2038 COMPUTER ANIMATION Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: To learn the latest animation techniques.

To introduce the history of animation To introduce the modeling methodologies Course Outcome: The students will be able to model their own models.

Latest Modeling techniques will be known to students The making of a complete animation will be clearly understood.

Course Description: The nature of animation – Applications – Basics of Computer Graphics – Movement Control – The Human/ Computer Interface – Hardware Considerations – Software – Language Considerations – State of the art –

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

simulation – Soft Modeling – Synthetic Humans - Introduction to Computer animation – Technical background Interpolating values – Interpolation based animation – Kinematic Linkages – Motion Capture – Physically Based animation – Fluids: Liquids and Gases, Modeling and Animating Human Figures, Facial Animation, Behavioural Animation – Special Modes of Animation.

Reference Books: 1. Rick Parent, Computer Animation: Algorithms and Techniques, Newnes, 2012.

2. Stuart Mealing, The Art and Science of Computer Animation, Intellect Books, 1998.

3. John Vince, 3D Handbook of Computer Animation, Springer,2002.

4. Rick Parent, David S. Ebert, et al., ‘Computer Animation Complete: All-in-One: Learn Motion Capture, Characteristic, Point-Based, and Maya Winning Techniques’, Morgan Kaufmann, 2009 5. Isaac V. Kerlow, The Art of 3D: Computer Animation and Effects, John Wiley & Sons, 2004 6. Frederic I. Parke, Keith Waters, Computer Facial Animation, A K PETERS Limited (MA), 2008.

14MT2039 3D MODELING AND TEXTURING Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: To learn the animation techniques.

To introduce Modeling techniques and the technologies involved To introduce shading and image mapping Course Outcome: The students will be able to model their own models.

Latest Modeling techniques will be known to students The Application of models to texturing will be clearly understand.

Course Description: Introduction to Digital Modeling – Understanding a Modeler’s Role – Preparing for Modeling – Four Fundamentals of a Digital Model – Digital Modeling methods – Professional Modeling practices – Polygon Modeling – Subdivision Surface Modeling – Modeling a stylized character – Modeling for print graphics – Digital Sculpting – Game Modeling – Materials – Shaders – Material creation Interfaces – Image Maps and Procedural Maps - Light Surfaces – Complex Materials – Mapping and Unwrapping – Rendering – Applying the correct Material and 2D texture – Applying 3D textures and Projections – Creating custom connections and Applying color utilitiesAutomating a scene with sampler notes.

Reference Books: 1. William Vaughan, Digital Modeling, New Riders, 2011.

2. Nikos Sarris, Michael G. Strintzis, 3D Modeling and Animation: Synthesis and Analysis Techniques for the Human Body, Idea Group Inc (IGI), 2005.

3. Ami Chopine, 3D Art Essentials: The Fundamentals of 3D Modeling, Texturing, and Animation, Taylor & Francis, 2011.

4. Dennis Summers, Texturing: Concepts and Techniques, Cengage Learning, 2004.

5. Bill Fleming, Mastering 3d Texturing, Elsevier Science & Technology Books, 2006.

6. Lee Lanier, “Advanced Maya Texturing and Lighting, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.

14MT2040 3D LIGHTING Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: To learn the perception of human eye.

To introduce the lighting concepts for animation.

To Introduce the Lighting Techniques.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Outcome: The students will understand different types of lights available for animation The students will be able to light a complete 3D model.

The students will apply photography and cinematography techniques to animation.

Course Description: Nature of Light - The Physiology of Seeing and Perception – Anatomy of the Eye – Light Pathways in the Eye – Processing Visual Information – Sensing Movement – The Seven Eye Movements – The Vestibular System – Monocular Cues – Fundamentals of Photography and Cinematography – Colors and Materials – Computer Graphics – Basic Lighting Techniques – Applied Lighting Techniques – Lighting Situations Reference Books: 1. Arnold Gallardo, 3D Lighting History, Concepts & Techniques, Charles River Media, 2001.

2. Darren Brooker, Essential CG Lighting Techniques, Taylor & Francis, 2003 3. David A. Parrish, Inspired 3D lighting and compositing, Premier Press, 2002 4. Jeremy Birn, Digital Lighting and Rendering, New Riders,2013 5. Johal Gow, 3D Lighting and Rendering: A Professional Approach to Learning 3ds Max, Maya and XSI, Elsevier Science & Technology Books

14MT2041 3D VIDEO AND GRAPHICS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To present concepts required to understand the steps and procedures that lead to the creating a 3D Video It provides complete knowledge on the graphics followed in the 3D Graphics system.

The Video Kinematics will be clearly understood.

Course Outcome: In order to assess the student’s progress towards achieving a 3D Video The students will be able to do professional 3D Video and Graphics.

Make the student industry competent in the 3D film making industry.

Course Description: Introduction to 3D video – Multi camera systems for 3D Video Production – Studio – 3D Video Production – 3D Surface Texture Generation – Estimate of 3D Dynamic lighting Environment with reference objects – Visualization of 3D Video – Behaviour Unit model for Content based Representation and edition of 3D video – Model based complex Kinematic motion estimation – 3D video editing - 3D display systems – 3D Content creation – 3D applications – Advance 3D video streaming applications.

Reference books: 1. Takashi Matsuyama, Shohei Nobuhara, Takeshi Takai, Tony Tung, “3D Video and Its Applications” Springer, 2012.

2. Guan-Ming Su, Yu-chi Lai, Andres Kwasinski, Haohong, “3D Visual Communications”, WangJohn Wiley & Sons, 2012.

3. Steven J. Gortler, “Foundations of 3D Computer Graphics”, MIT Press, 2012.

4. David P. Luebke, “Level of Detail for 3D Graphics”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2003.

5. Jonas de Miranda Gomes, Luiz Velho, Mario Costa Sousa, “Design and Implementation of 3D Graphics Systems”, CRC Press, 2012.

14MT2042 RENDERING TECHNIQUES Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective To enable students to understand the various stages in Rendering.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

To help in understanding the needs for high quality real time rendering.

To help understand the requirements needed to create a realistic virtual environment.

Course Outcome The students will be able to Make the right choice of renderer.

Bring out the best in the renderer to give High quality outputs.

Create the pipeline required for rendering.

Course Description Introduction to realtime and nonrealtime rendering-Graphics Rendering pipeline-Graphics processing unitTransforms-Visual Appearance-Texturing Basics-Advanced Shading-Illumination-image based EffectsNonPhotorealistic Rendering-Polygons & Surfaces Basics-Acceleration Algorithms-Pipeline optimizationIntersection Test methods-Collision detection-Graphics Hardware-NonReal Time Rendering-Setting up the network based renderer-Rendering in Layers and Passes-Production pipeline-Latest Trends in rendering .

Reference Books 1. Tomas Akenine-Möller, Eric Haines, Naty Hoffman, Real-Time Rendering, Third Edition, A K Peters,2008.

2. Jeremy Birn, Digital Lighting and Rendering, New Riders, 2014.

3. Jennifer O'Connor, Mastering mental ray: Rendering Techniques for 3D and CAD Professionals, Sybex, 2010.

4. Markus Kuhlo, Architectural Rendering with 3ds Max and V-Ray: Photorealistic Visualization, Focal Press, 2013.

5. Thomas Driemeyer, Rendering with Mental Ray®,Springer, 2005.

14MT2043 MOTION CAPTURE Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: To learn the latest technologies in animation To understand the detailed animation scenarios.

To introduce the integration of motion capture with animation.

Course Outcome: The students will understand different types of Motion capture applications.

The students will be able to create their own Mocap projects The students will create animations by integrating with Mocap.

Course Description: An overview and History of Motion Capture – Preproduction and preparation of capture – Pipeline – Cleaning and Editing data – Skeleton Editing – Data Application: Props - Data Application : Decomposing and composing motions - Integrating data with character rigs – Hand motion capture – Facial Motion capture – Puppetry capture – Mocap data and Math - The Motion List - Flowcharts And Motion Diagrams -The Motion Database - Directory Structure And Filenaming Convention - Markers And Marker Configuration - Selecting A Motion Capture Studio Motion Performers - Stunt Coordination, And Directing - Final Preparations Before The Capture Session - The Motion Capture Session - Post Production .

Reference Books: 1. Midori Kitagawa, Brian Windsor, MoCap for Artists: Workflow and Techniques for Motion Capture, Taylor & Francis, 2008.

2. Matthew Liverman, The Animator's Motion Capture Guide: Organizing, Managing, and Editing, Charles River Media, 2004.

3. Alberto Menache, Understanding Motion Capture for Computer Animation, Elsevier, 2011.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

4. Aravind Sundaresan, Towards Markerless Motion Capture: Model Estimation, Initialization and Tracking, ProQuest, 2007.

5. Derek Doeffinger, Creative Shutter Speed: Master the Art of Motion Capture, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.

14MT2044 COMPUTER ANIMATION ALGORITHMS Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective To acquire comprehensive knowledge about Computer Animation.

To acquire understanding of Computer Animation Algorithms.

To know the working principle of Animation algorithms.

Course Outcome Students would understand the principles of Computer Animation.

Students will the working principle Computer Animation Algorithms.

Students will acquire the different Animation algorithms.

Course Description Motion perception – The heritage of animation - Animation Production – Technical Background - Interpolation values - Interpolation Based Animation- Kinematic Linkages - Forward Kinematics –Inverse Kinematics- Motion Capture – Physically Based Animation – Fluids: Liquids and Gases - Modeling and Animating Human Figures – Facial Animation – Behavioural Animation – Special Models for Animation.

Reference Books 1. Rick Parent, “Computer Animation Algorithms and Techniques”, Elsevier, 2012.

2. Rick Parent, Morgan Kaufmann, “Computer Animation Algorithms and Techniques”, Elsevier, 2007.

3. Garth Gardner , “Computer Graphics and Animation: History, Careers, Experts Advice”, Garth Gardner Company, Incorporated (GGC), 2002.

4. Kevin Cunningham, “Computer Graphics: From Concept to Consumer” Scholastic Library Publishing, 2013.

5. Martin J. Davis, “Computer Graphics”, Nova Science Publishers, 2011

14MT2045 3D ANIMATION LAB Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To introduce to the students the various aspects of a 3D Animation software.

To make the students understand the process of 3D animation via concepts like kinematics.

To make students adept with all the techniques used in 3D animation process.

Course Outcome: Students will be able to import 3D characters and animate them.

Students will be able to provide behavioural characteristics to the 3D models.

The students will be able to come up with professional grade real time projects.

Course Description: The Experiments will include Maya interface tools rendering camera and animation techniques.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

14MT2046 2D ANIMATION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Course objective: To introduce the user interface and tools of a 2D animation software.

To make the students understand the process of 2D animation via concepts like frame by frame, tweening etc.

To introduce the concept of character rigging via bone tool.

Course outcome The students will be trained in the area of character and concept designing in 2D animation This lab will enable students to gain an expertise in software tool and their interfaces.

This lab will enable students to work upon real time projects of professional quality.

Course Description: Experiments will include Flash Layout, Motion Tween, Shape tweening, Motion guide using Flash Basic effects in Adobe after effects Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14MT2047 JAVA 2D/3D BASED COMPUTER GRAPHICS LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14CS2040 -Programming in Java Course Objective: To make students learn graphical implementation in Java 2D/3D. Providing basic knowledge on creating shapes, polygons and texturing.

Intends to equip students with 2D/3D graphical world representations.

Course Outcome: On completion of the lab, the student will be able design 2D geometrical objects.

The students will be able to create 3D shapes and provide texturing, rotation etc to them.

The students will be able to implement basic animation on java platform.

Course Description: Lab Experiments based upon: Lines, pixel graphics, shapes, polygons, arcs, 3D translation, rotation and texturing, Animation.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14MT2048 3D MODELING AND TEXTURING LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: To present and practice methodologies in 3D Modeling.

To present and practice the methodologies in Texturing.

To demonstrate knowledge and understanding of concepts and terms learned in 3D Modeling.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Outcome: The students will be able to visualize and demonstrate an idea and express it in 3D Graphics.

The students will be able to demonstrate an understanding of principles of design and colors and apply them effectively to various assignments.

The students will have good command over terms and concepts widely used in 3D Modeling and Texturing Course Description: The Lab exercises will include exercises on Creating basic 3D shapes in various modeling techniques such polygon, splines, nurbs etc. The course will be concluded by submission of a project in 3D Modeling and Texturing.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14MT2049 GAME ART Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: This course encompasses the artistic management of the game projects.

This course aims at the production of digital images for universe.

This course discusses character, animation, interface design and execution.

Course Outcome: Students will attractive visuals that allow players to be completely submerged in another universe.

Students will gain a comprehensive understanding in main lines of graphic design production.

Students will grasp the techniques on how to management and game project development.

Course Description: Traditional graphics Anatomy - Graphical research - Study of work of Arts, General culture – Game analysis – intentions – Character design & composition – History of gaming Creation process - support, media, Ergonomics and design of interfaces, 2D Graphics Applications and specific tools - Special effects Assembly – animation – direction, Prototyping Intentions and validation of concepts - Game Design Initiation - Level Design Initiation Reference Books: 1. Chris Solarski, “Drawing Basics and Video Game Art”, Watson-Guptill, 2012.

2. Fred S. Kleiner Gardner's, “Art through the Ages” 2012.

3. Tristan Donovan , “Replay: The History of Video Games”, 2010.

4. David Franson and Andre LaMothe “2D Artwork and 3D Modeling for Game Artists”, 2002.

5. Jesse Schell, “The Art of Game Design”, 2008.

14MT2050 2D GAME DESIGN Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: This course aims at providing students learn how to design, program, and analyze games.

The course provides knowledge on understanding the aesthetics and pre-requisites required for game designing.

This course helps students to understand and utilize physics and mathematical concepts required for game environments and game development.

Course Outcome: The student will have the capability of designing 2D games..

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

With successful completion of the course, students will be able to design and develop 2D games on various platforms.

The student will be able to design 2D sprites and provide them behavioral characteristics to interact in 2D game environment.

Course Description: 2D game engine- design, Directx control, dev projects, 2D Rendering- creating and testing sprites, transparency, Animation- sprites and transforms, Input – keyboard, mouse, Font, Audio- designing and testing, Physics- collisions, Math- angle and velocity, Threading, scripting.

Reference Books: 1. Jonathan S. Harbour, “Advanced 2D Game Development”, PTR Publishers, 2009.

2. Briar Lee Mitchell, “Game Design Essentials”, Wiley Publishers, 2012.

3. Ernest Adams, “Fundamentals of Game Design”, Pearson Education, 2012.

4. Jeannie Novak, “Game Development Essentials: An Introduction”, Delmar Cengage Publishers, 2012.

14MT20513D GAME DESIGN Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: This course aims at providing students learn how to design games.

The course provides information regarding concepts like character creation and game story writing.

This course helps students to understand various techniques involved in designing different game genres.

Course Outcome: The student will be able to design a particular genre of game.

With successful completion of the course, students will be able to apply their skills on concepts like camera movement and dynamics of game designing.

The students will be able to design various levels, sound effects and HUD used in games.

Course Description: Game genres, composing game sounds, game story development, 3 C’s – character, camera and controls, HUD and icon design, elements of combat, getting powers in games, multiplayer games, music notes, cut scenes, designing characters and enemies.

Reference Books: 1. Scott Rogers, “Level Up! The Guide to Great Video Game Design”, John Wiley Publishers, 2010.

2. Jesse Schell, “The Art of Game Design: A book of lenses”, Morgan Kauffman Publishers, 2008.

3. Bob Bates, “Game Design”, Cengage Learning, 2004.

4. Flint Dille, “The Ultimate Guide to Video Game Writing and Design”, Lone Eagle Publishers, 2008.

5. Charles Kelly, “Programming 2D Games”, CRC Press Publishers, 2012.

14MT2052 GAME PROGRAMMING Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: This course aims at providing students learn how to design, program, and analyze games using Action Script 3.0 and Adobe Flash.

The course provides knowledge on understanding the aesthetics and pre-requisites required for 2D game programming.

This course helps students to understand and utilize physics and mathematical concepts required for game environments and 2d game development.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Outcome: The student will have the capability of designing 2D games using Action Script 3.0.

With successful completion of the course, students will be able to develop 2D games on various platforms using Action Script 3.0 programming.

The students will be able to create sprites with animations and interface them in a game with their programming skills.

Course Description: Introduction to Action Script 3.0, buttons, movie clips, loops, game logic, Animations, game plan and implementation, Maths and Physics for Games, realistic movements, Adventure game, High Score Games, sounds, Network programming.

Reference Books: 1. Hamsa Suri, Lakshmi Prayaga, “Beginning Game Programming with Flash”, Thomson core Publishers, 2007 2. Gary Rosenzweig, “Action Script 3.0 Game Programming”, Que Publishers, 2012.

3. Ernest Adams, “Fundamentals of Game Design”, Pearson Education, 2012.

4. Emanuele Feronato, “Flash Game Development”, Packt Publishers, 2011.

5. Charles Kelly, “Programming 2D Games”, CRC Press Publishers, 2012.

14MT2053 ONLINE GAMING Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: This course strives to increase the knowledge of the student regarding online gaming.

Helps to understand the general layout of network based games.

Helps to understand the inner workings of an MMO. Course Outcome: Students will have basic knowledge about online games.

Students will know the basic layout of online based games.

Students will be able to create and host a basic online multiplayer game.

Course Description: Introduction, Evolution of online games, HTML5 games, Flash games, FPS, RPG, MMO, Examples, Basic Internet architecture-latency, jitter, loss and latency compensation, Broad band access networks, game servers, Various characteristics of games, Parts of an MMO, Core Idea generation, Creating the realm for MMO, Compiling, Adding media to the game, Creating actors, Items, Working with the world editor, Post processing, Scripting, Putting all together.

Reference Books: 1. Jason Darby, "Wizards and Warriors: Massively Multiplayer Online Game Creation”, Cengage learning, 2012.

2. Grenville Armitage, Mark Claypool, Philip Branch, “Networking and Online Games: Understanding and Engineering Multiplayer Internet Games”, Wiley publishing inc, 2006.

3. George Skaff Elias,Richard Garfield, ”Characteristics of Games”, MIT,2012.

4. Thor Alexander,”Massively Multiplayer Game Development”, (ver. 1 & 2), Charles River Media, 2003.

5. Aaron C Callahan, “Make Your Own MMORPG Paperback”, Fose Media, 2011.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

14MT2054 GAME ENGINE Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: This course aims at providing students learn how to design and create a video game engine that can be used to create gaming applications on the PC. The syllabus focuses on building a complete game engine, including graphics, physics, programming, audio, AI, data structures, memory management, and more.

This course helps students to understand concepts of developing consoles required for game environments and 3d game development.

Course Outcome: The student will have the capability of designing basic 3D games engines.

With successful completion of the course, students will be able to apply his knowledge and information for developing any type of projects relating 3D game engine design.

The student will be able to script static models and provide them portal rendering systems.

Course Description: Overview of Game engine- game splash screens, User interface- Keyboard, Mouse, Joystick, Developing consoles, Camera and object movement- object animations, shading, texturing, 3D objects- skybox, landscape, particle system, Camera, Artificial intelligence, Game audio- Game physics- vehicle dynamics.

Reference Books: 1. Marshall Harrison, “Introduction to 3D Game Engine Design Using DirectX 9 and C#”, Apress Publishers, 2003.

2. David H. Eberly, “3D Game Engine Design: A Practical Approach to Real-Time Computer Graphics”, Morgan Kauffman Publishers, 2001.

3. Jason Gregory, Jeff Lande, Matt Whiting, “Game Engine Architecture”, CRC Press, 2009.

4. Jeannie Novak, “Game Development Essentials: An Introduction”, Delmar Cengage Publishers, 2012.

14MT2055 DYNAMICS FOR GAME DEVELOPERS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: This course covers the physics that a game programmer would need to develop a professional-game.

This course aims at basic understanding of basic concepts in physics and modeling with physical attributes.

This course discusses about the physics engines.

Course Outcome: Students will understand the concept of basic concepts of physics in games.

Students will gain a comprehensive understanding of how to program a game with application of principles of physics.

Students will grasp the techniques on physics engines on their game development.

Course Description: Basic Newtonian mechanics - basic kinematics – projectiles – collisions – sports simulations – cars and motorcycles – boats and things that float –airplanes – rockets and missiles – physics of solids – explosions – lasers – parabolic and monte carlo simulations.

Reference Books: 1. Grant Palmer, “Physics for Game Programmers”, 2005.

2. David H. Eberly, “Game Physics”, 2010.

3. Ian Millington, “Game Physics Engine Development: How to Build a Robust Commercial-Grade Physics Engine for your Game”, 2010.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

4.

5.

David M Bourg and Bryan Bywalec, “Physics for Game Developers: Science, math, and code for realistic effects”, 2013.

Danny Kodicek and John P Flynt, “Mathematics & Physics for Programmers”, 2011

14MT2056 3D GAME DEVELOPMENT Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: This course aims at providing students learn how to design, program, and analyze games using unity 3d game engine.

The course provides knowledge on understanding the aesthetics and pre-requisites required for 3D game designing.

This course helps students to understand and utilize physics and mathematical concepts required for game environments and 3d game development.

Course Outcome: The student will have the capability of designing 3D games using unity 3D. With successful completion of the course, students will be able to design and develop 3D games on various platforms.

The student will be able to import 3D models into unity and provide them behavioral characteristics to interact in 3D game environment.

Course Description: Overview of Unity engine- views and tools, Game Assets, Terrains – building and painting textures, placing trees and lights, importing textures, prefabs, Importing 3D characters into unity, Scripting- operators, loops and functions, Character and state controller- first person controller, third person controller, Animations in unity 3d, Triggering and collisions, GUI, Audio control, Publishing the game.

Reference Books: 1. Michelle Menard, “Game Development with Unity”, Cengage Publishers, 2012 2. Briar Lee Mitchell, “Game Design Essentials”, Wiley Publishers, 2012.

3. Ernest Adams, “Fundamentals of Game Design”, Pearson Education, 2012.

4. Jeannie Novak, “Game Development Essentials: An Introduction”, Delmar Cengage Publishers, 2012.

5. Sue Blackman, “Beginning 3D Game Development with Unity 4: All-in-one, multi-platform game development”, APress Publishers, 2012.

14MT2057 2D GAME DESIGN LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14MT2050 – 2D Game Design Course Objective: This course aims at providing students learn how to design and program 2D games using action script 3.0 and flash interface.

The course provides in depth and step by step process of game development.

This course helps students to understand and implement important game concepts of physics like collision detection, gravity etc and HUD. Course Outcome: The student will have the capability of developing a 2D game.

With successful completion of the course, students will be able apply his programming skills to develop a game.

The students will be able to design and control characters and provide them artificial intelligence.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Description: Experiments based upon 2D Game design concepts will be dealt with.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14MT2058 3D GAME DESIGN LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14MT2051 – 3D Game Design Course Objective: To learn the fundamental concepts involved in 3D game development techniques.

This course aims at providing students learn how to design and program 3D games using Unity 3d game engine.

The course provides in depth and step by step process of game development using JavaScript programming language. .

Course Outcome: The student will have the capability of developing a 3D game using JavaScript programming skills and Unity 3D interface.

With successful completion of the course, students will be able to create first person and third person shooter game.

The students will be able to design and control characters and provide them artificial intelligence.

Course Description: Experiments based upon 3D Game design concepts will be dealt with.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14MT2059 MOBILE GAMING LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14CS2040 - Programming in Java Course Objective: To learn the fundamental concepts involved in mobile game development techniques.

This course aims at providing students learn how to design and program 2D mobile games using Action Script 3.0 and Flash CS6.

The course provides in depth and step by step process of game development and mobile gestures using Action Script programming language. .

Course Outcome: The student can create 2D games on Android mobile phones.

With successful completion of the course, students will be able to control the sprites with Accelerometer and touch sensors.

The students will be able to design a game and provide behavioral characteristics with gesture controls like swipe, tap, pinch etc.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Description: Experiments based upon 2D Game design concepts will be dealt with.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2001 HISTORY OF ART AND DESIGN Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To introduce the history of art and design.

To understand the evolution of art and design.

To help the students understand the timeline and the development during the past.

Course Outcome: The students will gain knowledge on history of design The design aspects will become appropriate because of learning about great artists and designers.

The students will also be able to apply the aesthetics of visual art.

Course Description: Prehistory of art – ancient styles –middle ages –gothic art forms-the isms – realism – impressionisms- pointillism – baroque- renaissance –pop art. History of design: Contemporary Overview -From Pre-print to Incunabula Incunabula through Renaissance -The Half History - Mass Medium -Font comparison - Art/craft/career - Through New and Nouveau - Rumors of war - Modernizing - The Avant-Garde through The Ring - Bauhaus - The International Style, The Many Moderns - Home growing -50s, 60s, 70s - Public messages, private meanings. Indian arthistory. Students have to create any one of the product design history with timeline.

Reference Books: 1. “History of Graphic Design”- http://www.d.umn.edu.

2. Norman, Donald: “A Design of Everyday Things”, MIT Press, 1990.

3. Papanek, Victor; “Design for the Real World”, Thames and Hudson, London, 1995 4. Meggs, Philip; “A History of Graphic Design”, John Wiley & Sons, 1998 5. Trivedi, Kirti (ed.); “Indian Symbology”, IDC, 1987 6. Raizman, David; “History of Modern Design”, Publisher: Prentice Hall, 2004

14VC2002 MEDIA ORIENTATION LAB Credits: 0:0:1 Course Objective: To understand the basic elements of Media Organizations and institutions.

To understand the media culture and its structure and way of functioning.

To learn to differentiate various media and their scope Course Outcome: The students will be able to relate media institutions and media industries.

The students learn the skills to approach various media as a profession.

The students will be able to assess the effects of media on public.

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes to study about media organization structure and function.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 6 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2003 MEDIA AND COMMUNICATION Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: To Obtain the knowledge about the basics of media and communication To understand the various aspects related to communication and various media.

To gain the insight into the paradigm of communication.

Course Outcome: To present a overall view about media and communication To expand the knowledge about the concepts related to media and communication To explore about the importance of media and communication Course Description: Communication – Process – Settings – Characteristics – Models – Emerging Trends – Perspectives – Historical and Cultural Context – Role of media in Newspapers – magazines – Books – Radio - Motion Pictures – Broadcast Television – Cable, Satellite and Internet Television – The Internet and the World Wide Web – Newsgathering and Reporting – Public Relations – Advertising – Regulations of Media – Ethics – Impact of Media – Social Effects of Mass Communication – Future of Media and Communication – The More You Know, The More You See. Reference Books: 1. Joseph R. Dominick, “The Dynamics of Mass Communication”, 10th edition, McGraw Hill Higher Education, 2008 2. Paul Martin Lester,“Visual Communication: Images with Messages”, Cengage Learning, 2013 3. Keval J. Kumar, “Introduction to Mass communication”, Jaico Publishing House, 1999.

4. Linje Manyozo, “MediaCommunication and Development”: Three Approches,Sage Publication, 2012.

5. Paddy Scannell, “Media and Communication”, Sage Publications, 2007.

14VC2004 FILM STRUCTURE AND EMOTION SYSTEM Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To teach the various modes of discourse in film To imbue the structural characteristics of films To understand the psychological connections with films through emotion system Course Outcome: The student will possess an overall understanding on the structure of film narration The student will have a thorough knowledge on the narrative aspects of film The students will be able to connect psychologically with the films Course Description: The screen research and development - The screen story – essence of screen story – the log line – conflict – form, format and formula. – the structure of screen play – the three act screenplay – the screen – plot points – the character – plot vs character – characteristics – action speak more than words – character types – the dialogue – functions of dialogue – voice over – sub plots – flashbacks – theme breaking the rules – how screen writers break them and why genre – script to screen analysis

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Reference Books: 1. Greg M. Smith, “Film Structure and the Emotion System”, Cambridge University Press, 2. 2003.

3. David Bordwell & Kristin Thompson, “Film Art An Introduction”, 8 th edition, McGraw 4. Hill, 2008.

5. Sarah Casey Benyahia, Freddie Gaffney & John White, “As Film Studies The Essential 6. Introduction”, Routledge, 2006.

7. Nitzan Ben Shaul, “Hyper-Narrative Interactive Cinema”, Rodopi, 2008.

8. James Monaco, “How to read a film”, Oxford University Press, 2009.

14VC2005 SOUND: THEORY AND PRODUCTION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To teach the very fundamentals to understand sound.

To teach in detail the sound reinforcement techniques.

To introduce to the students the latest trends in Sound reinforcement.

Course Outcome: This course will enable the students to become proficient with all the sound engineering concepts.

The student will become creative and skillful in handling of all audio equipments.

The student will know the latest trends in sound reinforcement.

Course Description Sound theory - Analog audio - Microphones - Electronic level control - Signal processors- Dynamic processors Effect processors - Audio lines and Patch bays - Analog Recording devices and systems - ATR - The fundamentals of Magnetic Digital Audio– Analog vs Digital – ADC/DAC - Digital mixers - Basics of live sound engineering Basic PA systems - Full Range sound Reinforcement systems - Choice of Equipment - Signal flow - FOH - MOH – MIDI – Latest trends in Sound reinforcement.

Reference Books 1. Ken Pohlmann, “Principles of Digital Audio”, 3rd edition, McGraw-Hill, 2010.

2. David Simons, “Analog Recording”, 3rd Edition, Backbeat Books, 2006.

3. Paul White, “Basic Live Sound”, Sanctuary Publications, 2003.

4. F. Alton Everest, “Master Handbook of Acoustics”, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill Publishing, 2001 5. Frederick N Martin, John Greer N Clark, “Introduction to Audiology”, 9th Edition, 2003 6. Michael Talbot-Smith, “Sound Engineering Explained”, 2nd Edition, Focal Press, 2002.

7. Douglas Self, Richard Brice, Ben Duncan, John Linsley Hood, Ian Sinclair, Andrew Singmin, Don Davis, Eugene Patronis, John Watkinson, “ Audio Engineering”, Focal Press, 2009.

14VC2006 BASIC COMPUTERS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: This course aims at providing students learn the basics of computer science and its components.

The course provides knowledge on understanding the basic concepts of computer organization and networking.

The course provides information regarding basic concepts of Photoshop 6 Course Outcome: With successful completion of the course, students will be able to apply their skills on concepts like operating systems and computer security.

The students will be able to able to solve real world implementations using Photoshop skills

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Description Introduction, data storage, computer organization, computer networks, operating systems, data structure, data compression, security, theory of computation, artificial intelligence, exploring Photoshop 6, workspace, basics, making selections, retouching , painting, creating good images : RBG, histogram, adjusting curves and mid-tones, layers, filters, creating images for web and video: adding text, styles, slices and attributes.

Reference Books: 1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Foundations of Computer Science”, Cengage Learning Publishers, 2007.

2. Jennifer Smith, “Adobe Photoshop CS6 Digital Classroom”, Wiley Publishers, 2013.

3. Nell Dale, “Computer Science Illuminated”, Jones & Bartlett Publishers, 2012.

4. WAGmob, “Computer Science- simpleNeasyBook”, WAGmob Publishers, 2013.

5. J. Glenn Brookshear, “Computer Science: An Overview”, Addison Wesley Publishers, 2008.

14VC2007 TYPOGRAPHY Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To impart the knowledge of typography.

To understand the basic anatomy of types.

To help the students work with types.

Course Outcome: The students will gain knowledge in typography design The type design aspects will become appropriate.

The students will also be able to apply the typography in their production.

Course Description: Study of Typography - History - Classification - Anatomy and usage of various letterforms. Theoretical and applicable principles of letterforms - Expressive Typography - Compositions with type - spacing- Study of Indian language scripts- Calligraphic experiments in Indian Langauge scripts. Typography in different contexts: New media – Posters – Signage – Books – Mailers -Motion graphics etc. Study of grids and layouts.

Students have to create abooklet with typography concept.

Reference Books: 1. Ruegg, Ruedi&Frohlich, Godi: “Basic Typography”, ABC edition, Zurich.1972 2. Schmid, Helmut; “Typography Today”, SeibundoShinkosha, 1980.

3. Naik, Bapurao.S; “Typography of Devanagari”. Directorate of Languages, Bombay. 1971 4. McLean, Ruari; “Manual of typography”. Thames and Hudson.

5. Lupton, Ellen; “Thinking with type : a critical guide for designers, writers, editors, and students”. New York : Princeton Architectural Press 2004.

14VC2008 TYPOGRAPHY LAB Credits 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2007 TYPOGRAPHY Course Objective: To help the student understand and see the endless possibilities available in representing letters in artistic forms.

To enable students to create animations with stylized text to get various messages across to the audience in an effective manner.

To help students create truly unique text representations.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course outcome: The artistic use of text by the student will be better.

The Creative placement of the text in the project will be better.

The quality of projects will be better owing to a better understanding of the text forms.

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes designing letters, fonts in a unique way of representation by applying creativity.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2009 INTRODUCTION TO ANIMATION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To learn the process of animation techniques.

• To make the students understand about the traditional and modern animation production techniques.

• To understand various types of animation production.

Course Outcome: • The students will have sound knowledge about animation genres.

• They will learn preproduction skills for animation production.

• The students will be introduced to the basic techniques of animation.

Course Description: History of Animation: Legends of Animation productions - Evolution of Animation – Types and Styles of animation an overview –Difference between animation and video - Scripting & screenplay for animation - famous Characters in animation movies – the influence of cultural and social set up in animation – 2d and 3d animation – Special Effects – software packages for Animation - Animation industry – Latest trends in animation – technological development in the field of animation.

Reference Books: 1. Steve Roberts, “Character Animation Fundamentals, Developing Skills for 2D and 3D Animation”, , Focal Press, 2011.

2. Harold Whitaker, John Halas, “Timing for Animation, Second Edition”, Focal Press, 2009.

3. Mark Simon, “Producing Independent 2D Character Animation”, Focal Press.

4. 4.Jayne Pilling, “Animation and Beyond, Rotovision – September 2010.

5. Mark T Byrne, “Animation the art of layout and storyboarding”, Mark T Byrne publication , 2009.

14VC2010 VISUAL ARTS LAB – 1 Credits: 0:0:4 Course Objective: •To develop the ability of sketching skills.

•To help the students in their visual arts production.

•To provide hands-on experience in visual arts.

Course Outcome: •The students will improve their drawing skillsthrough learning by doing.

•The students will be able to work with types of medium.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

•The students will be able to sketch and paint fluently at the completion.

Course Description: Types of exercise will be assigned on various topics of visual arts.

The students have to produce a document on visual arts.

14VC2011 VISUAL ARTS LAB – II (ANIMATICS) Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2010 VISUAL ARTS-I Course Objective: To develop the sketching ability of human forms.

To enrich the animation sketching skills.

To provide hands-on experience in animatic.

Course Outcome: The students will understand the concept of animation drawing.

The students will be able to transfer their sketching skills in to animation production.

The students will become specialist in animation sketching.

Course Description: Types of exercise will be assigned various topics on human forms & animation sketching .

The students have to produce a document on Visual Arts -II .

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2012 STOP MOTION ANIMATION Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2014-Photography Basics Course Objective: To impart the techniques of Stop-motion animation.

To make the students understand the conceptsinStop-motion animation.

To provide practical experience in producing Stop-motion animation.

Course Outcome: The students will understand the concept of Stop-motion animation.

The students will be able to photography in animation.

The students will become familiar with the production of Stop-motion animation.

Course Description: Types of exercise will be assigned on the topic.

The students have to produce stop-motion animation film.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2013 PRINCIPLES AND TECHNIQUES OF DESIGN Credits: 2:0:0 Course Objective: To understand the principles of design.

To ensure effective usage of principles of design.

To enrich the skill level of graphic design through the topic.

Course Outcome: The students would apply principles of design appropriately.

The study would enrich student’s creative component.

It helps the students to increase their designing skills Course Description: Elements of Design : Line-Shape-Direction-Size-Texture-Colour- Value- Concepts of Layouts: Hierarchy-Centre of visual Impact-Organization-Contrast –Colour- Typography – Unexpectedness-Rules – Consistency .Intro to designPrinciples : Balance-Rhythm-proportion-Dominance-Unity – Emphasis-Harmony-Opposition-Variety- DepthRepetition-Motion Introduction to semiotics-analysis-aspects of signs and symbols- the sign and meanings- description of signsdenotations and connotations- paradigmatic and syntagmatic aspects of Signs- Signs and Codes.

Reference Books 1. Lauet, David. “Design Basics”. Harcourt College Publishers, 2000 2. White, Alexander W. “The Elements of Graphic Design”. Allworth Press 2002 3. Muller, Josep. “Grid Systems in Graphic Design”.

4. Zelavski, Paul and Pat Fisher, Mary. “Design Principles and Problems” Oxford Univ. Press..

5. Dondis, Douis A. ‘A Primer of Visual Literacy” MIT Press, 1973.

6. Gavin Ambrose, Paul Harris , “The Fundamentals of Graphic Design”AvA publishing ,2009

14VC2014 PHOTOGRAPHY BASICS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: Leads through the evolution of photography over the centuries.

Helps students to understand the basic concepts of photography.

Gives an overview of various photographic equipments.

Course Outcome: The students will learn how the camera works & to use it.

They will come to know various accessories available for photography.

They will understand the basic techniques of taking good photos.

Course Description: The art & science of photography – The history of photography – Human Eye - Cameras, Film & Chemical processing – Camera Accessories – Lighting for photography – Colour Concepts – Colour Temperature - Lens, focus & focal length – Film Speed, Shutter & Aperture – Filters – Electronic Flash - Digital Photography – Image Sensors - Basic controls and functions of a camera – Grammar of good photography – Composing, Framing, Depth of Field, Rule of Third – Camera Shots & angles – Creative techniques – Photo Printing – Digital storage medium & file formats.

Reference books: 1. John Hedgecoe, “The Book of Photography”, Dorling Kindersley, 2005.

2. John Hedgecoe, “The Art of Digital Photography”, Dorling Kindersley, 2006.

3. Kirk Tuck, “Minimalist Lighting”, Amherst Media, 2009.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

4.

5.

Tomang, “Digital Photography Essentials”, Dorling Kindersley, 2011.

Ralph E. Jacobson, Sidney F. Ray, Geoffrey G. Attridge, Norman R. Axford – “The Manual of Photography”, Focal Press 2001

14VC2015 SCREENPLAY AND SCRIPT WRITING Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To make the students conceptualize and develop the art of writing creatively To teach script writing, the most basic and important aspect of film and video production To develop a strong foundation in the area of writing for film and video Course Outcome: The students will master themselves in the art of writing script for film and video The students will practice writing screenplay for different genre of scripts The students will be qualified as professional screenwriters Course Description: What is A ScreenPlay? – The Subject – Creation of Character – Building a Character- Story and Character – Endings and Beginnings – Setting Up The Story – Plot Points – The Scene – The Sequence – Screenplay Form – Writing the Screenplay – Adaptation –The proposal outline – Visual Treatment – Film Treatment – The Shooting Script – Writing Narration – The Story Treatment – The Art of Confrontation – Confrontation Dynamics – Dialogue Devices – Master Scene Script – The story board – Story Outline – Proposal Outline – Script Discussion – Characterization – Story Treatment Reference Books: 1. Syd Field, “Screenplay”, Delta Trade Paperback, 2005.

2. Laura Schellhardt, “ Screenwriting for Dummies”, Wiley Publishing, 2008.

3. Sir William K. Coe, “The Screenwriting Bible”, 2005.

4. Dwight V Swain, “Film Scriptwriting”, Focal Press publishers, 1998.

5. Thomas Pope, “Good Scripts Bad Scripts”, Three Rivers Press, New York 1998.

14VC2016 DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHY-I Credits: 0:0:2 Core –Requisite: 14VC2020 Creative photography techniques Course Objective: The practical deals with the basic concept of photography using DSLR. It teaches the students to handle a DSLR & its accessories for taking professional photos.

Special emphasis on using the right kind of lighting for various kinds of photos.

Course Outcome: The students will gain confidence in handling a DSLR for basic photo assignments.

They will be able to tweak the adjustments & settings in the camera for special needs.

They will be able to use of artificial & available lighting to create mood in the photograph.

Course Description: The lab exercise will have the photography techniques Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2017 VISUAL EFFECTS FOR ANIMATION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To make the students understand various processes involved in visual effects for animation.

• To learn about compositing for 2d and 3d animation process .

• To learn about special effects in animation.

Course Outcome: • The students will have in depth knowledge about visual effects process in animation.

• The students will be introduced to the various softwares and techniques for compositing and special effects for animation.

• They will have to complete a composited scene with rendered animations.

Course Description: Introduction to Compositing - Camera parameters - Digital Representation - Types of medium for exporting – HDRI - Basic Image manipulation - Geometric Transformations – Alpha masking – Rotoscoping - Compositing techniques – Use of After Effects in Flash animation - Digital compositing with CGI - 3D compositing - digital intermediate process – Stereo compositing – multipass compositing – depth compositing –Visual effects in Animation - Compositing visual effects - particle systems – image blending – exporting in various formats for editing - Animation Editing Reference Books: 1. Ron Brinkmann, “The Art and Science of Digital Compositing”, Morgann Kaufmann, 2008.

2. Tim Jones, Barry J Kelly, albin S Rossen, David Wolfe,“Foundation Flash cartoon animation”, , .

3. Dough Kelly, “Digital Composting in-Depth”, Coriolis, 2000.

4. Lee Lanier, “Digital Compositing with Nuke”, Focal Press, 2012.

14VC2018 FORM AND COLORS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To provide an overview on light and colour theories.

The role of colour and light in media.

To provide knowledge for color usage in visual effects Course Outcome: The students will also apply their knowledge in the area of creative use of light.

The students will also apply their knowledge in media applications.

It also gives the learners the theory and practice in the preparation of color images for reproduction.

Course Description: Experience of colour in media - colour psychology - colour theory - - Art in media - Function of Recording light creative use of colors - color management in digital photography -Color in moving image - Color in feature films Color composition - Color in branding and advertising - color on web, Basics of tonal adjustment - global color corrections - selective color corrections – types forms –forms and colors-selection of forms - color effects - digital painting - Optical illusion - Advancing and receding colours .

References Books: 1. Tom Fraser Adam Banks , “The complete guide to color”, The Illex Press Ltd.,2004 2. Norman Koren, “Color management and color science: Introduction”, 2004.

3. Kelly Dempski & Emmanuel Viale, “Advanced lighting and materials with shaders, Worldware Publishing”, 2005.

4. Bruce Fraser, Chris Murphy and Fred Bunting, “Color Management” , 2003

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

5.

Ralph Donald, Riley Maynard and Thomas span, “Fundamentals of Television Production”, Pearson, 2008.

14VC2019 ELEMENTS OF FILM AND VIDEO Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To understand the aesthetics of film and video production To identify the various elements and aspects of cinematography To understand the continuity of shots To learn the editing principles and post-production techniques Course Outcome: Students will be equipped with the film and video production skills so that they may be able to direct the production The students will know how to make use of each and every element of film and video effectively The students will learn to produce effective video programs Course Description: Film as Art – The Significance of Film Form – Theme and Focus – Fictional and Dramatic Elements – Visual Design – Pre-Production – Scriptwriting – Production – Mise-en-scene – Cinematography –Post-Production – The Relation of Shot to Shot – Editing – Sound in Cinema – Acting – The Director’s Style – Film Genres–Audiences – Film and Society – Image Control – Video Formats – Video transmission methods – Video on the Internet Reference Books: 1. David Bordwell& Kristin Thompson, “Film Art An Introduction”, 8 th edition, McGraw Hill, 2008.

2. Sarah Casey Benyahia, Freddie Gaffney & John White, “As Film Studies The Essential 3. Introduction”, Routledge, 2006.

4. Joseph M. Boggs & Dennis W. Petrie, “The Art of Watching Films”, 7 th edition, McGraw 5. Hill, 2008.

5. Joseph V.Mascelli, “The 5Cs of Cinematography”, Silman-James Press, 2001.

6. Martha Mollison, “Producing Videos”, Allen & Unwin, 2003.

14VC2020 CREATIVE PHOTOGRAPHY TECHNIQUES Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To make students understand the various forms of capturing photographscreatively To enrich the aspects of composing the subjects creatively To kindle the creative instincts among students Course Outcome: The students will be good enough to capture creative photographs The way the students look at objects will be creatively moulded The students will obtain an in-depth cognition on framing divergent images Course Description: Communication through photography –How the Human Eye Sees – Simplicity Vs. Complexity – Visualization – Photographic Looking and Seeing – Photographic Techniques and Artistic Integrity – Photographic Realism, Abstraction, and Art – Thoughts on Creativity – Obstacles to Creativity – Prerequisites for Creativity – Approaching Creativity Intuitively – Understanding and Misunderstanding Intuition – Applying Intuition to Photography

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

(The lab exercises will strictly focus on composing andcapturing images creatively and artisticallyacross various genres) Reference Books: 1. 1.Bruce Barnbaum, “The Art of Photography”,Rockynook, 2010.

2. Michael Langford& Philip Andrews, “Starting Photography”. Focal Press, 2007.

3. Dan Simon, “Digital Photography Bible”, Wiley Publishing, 2004.

4. Scott Kelby, “Digital Photography”, Peachpit Press, 2010.

5. John and Barbara Gerlach, “Digital Nature Photography: The Art and the Science”, Focal Press, 2007.

14VC2021 LENS, LIGHT AND COLORS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To enrich the students with the knowledge oflens, light & colour.

To provide knowledge on the basics of lighting.

To experience the aesthetics of colour psychology.

Course Outcome: The students will understand the various types of lenses and its uses The students will know how to use the types of lighting for better photography.

The students will also appreciate the ways to use colours for their production Course Description: LENS: Types of lenses –wide angle-normal – zoom – telephoto. Lens properties: focal length- aperture- power lenses – convertible lenses – filters and its uses LIGHT: The Physics of Light - Reflection - Refraction - Quality of the Light - Size of the Light Source - Natural Light -Direction of the light- Front Light - Angled or Side Light --Light and Color -Color Temperature - Practical Example: Adding Variety with White Balance - Light Intensity and Metering - Types of Light Sources - Natural vs.

Artificial Light - Light Modifiers --Surface - Design For Fill-Creative Techniques.Colour theory and psychology.

Reference Books: 1. Billy Pegram, “LIGHTING TECHNIQUES”, Amherst Media, Inc., 2009.

2. Christopher Grey, “Masters lighting guide”, AMHERST MEDIA, INC., 2010.

3. John Hedgecoe, “The Art of Digital Photography”, Dorling Kindersley, 2006.

4. Michael Langford &EfthimiaBilissi, “Advanced Photography”, Focal Press, 7th Edition, 2008.

5. Kirk Tuck, “Minimalist Lighting”, Amherst Media, 2009.

14VC2022 TYPES OF ANIMATION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To learn about different types of Animation in 2d and 3D respectively.

• To make the students understand various processes involved in different types of Animation.

• To have sound knowledge of animation in motion.

Course Outcome: • The students will have in depth knowledge about traditional and modern types in animation.

• The students will be introduced to the various techniques for creating animation.

• The students will have better understanding about animation in motion.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Description: Introduction to Animation - Animation Process: Disney animation – Japanese anime – Russian animation –creative aspects of Animation - Comparative study of different classical animation techniques - 2d Animation: Traditional Animation–direct manipulation animation - Cel Animation- Key Frame Animation - Limited Animation - Character animation- Animation in motion 2d- Stop Motion Animation - Graphic animation– Clay animation – Sand Animation - 3d animation: Animatics - Character Animation - Game based animation – Clay animation based animation – Animation in motion 3d.

Reference Books: 1. Chris Webster, “The Animation – the mechanics of motion”, Focal Press, 2005.

2. 3D art Essentials: The Fundamentals of 3D Modelling,texturing and animation by Ami Chopne 3. John Edgar Park, “Understanding 3D animation using Maya”, Springer Science & business Media. Inc, 2005.

4. Marcia Kuperberg, Martin W. Bowman, “Guide To Computer Animation”, Focal press ,2002.

5. Michael O’Rourke, “Principles of Three – Dimensional Computer animation”, 3rd edition, W.W. Norton & company, 2003.

6. 2. John Vince, “Essential Computer Animation”, Springer UK , FirstEdition 2000.

14VC2023 ADVERTISING Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: This subject will introduce the students to the world of advertising.

It discusses the marketing scenario which generates the need for advertising.

It tells how an advertisement is created and displayed, step by step.

Course Outcome: The students will appreciate how advertisement is essential for market economy.

They will know how an advertising agency works and their creative contributions.

The students will learn the procedure of running an advertisement campaign.

Course Description: Role & functions of advertising – Marketing Mix & Promotional mix - Advertising & Promotion – Classification of Advertising – Communication phase in advertising – Consumer, Target Audience & buying behavior Advertising agencies – Audience Research & Planning – Segmentation, Targeting & Positioning – Creative Process & Creative Strategy – Copy writing - Advertising Appeal - Media Planning – Media Objective & Strategies – Advertising in Print, & electronic Media – Planning & Managing advertising campaign.

Reference books: 1. Wells/Moriarty/Burnett, “Advertising – Principles & Practices”, Prentice Hall of India, 2001 2. David Ogilvy, “Ogilvy on Advertising”, Vintage Books, 2000 3. Sangeetha & Raghuvir, “Advertising Planning & Implementation” Prentice Hall of India.

4. Otto Kleppner, “Fundamentals of Advertising”, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2000.

5. Mario Pricken, “Creative Advertising”, Thames & Hudson, 2000

14VC2024 TV PROGRAM PRODUCTION Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: To apply the production techniques involved in the televisionproduction industry.

To acquire the fundamentals of a television workstation.

To understand the process of television production.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Outcome: Students will produce their own television programme.

Students will understand the process of television production.

Students will acquire the fundamentals of a television workstation.

Course Description: Idea-Inspiration- Visual thinkingWriting for television production-Single Camera production-Multi camera production indoor and outdoor studio -Different genre of television productions-Visualisation in singlecamera operationGenre of Studio based productions - target audience. TV production- Music shows -danceshows -reality shows –quiz - personality interview, Political discussion - current affairs -Election Results & analysis- News Presentation- weather report.Genre of Single camera Production- Documentary- Experimental video -Teleserials, Crime subjects enacted.Glossary of TV production-Budgeting Reference Books: 1. David Lusted and Christine Geraghty, “The Television Studies Book”-2009.

2. Herbert Zettl, “Handbook of Television Production”,Cengage Learning,2006.

3. Peter ward “Studio and outside broadcast Camera” Reed Elsevier, 2001.

4. Jim Owens, Gerald Millerson, “Video Production Handbook”, Focal Press, 2012 5. Glen Creeber, “TELEVISIONS: An Introduction to Television Studies” British Film Institute, 2006.

14VC2025 DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHY - II Credits: 0:0:2 Corequisite: 14VC2016-Digital photography-I Course Objective: This practical aims to cater to the needs of advanced users in photography.

It trains the students to use different lenses & special effects to enhance creativity.

It leads the students to digitally manipulate the photographs using special software.

Course Outcome: The student will leave the amateur status and enter into professional photographer realm.

They will be able to create unique pictures using special photo techniques.

They can work on photo manipulation software for colour correction & sfx application.

Course Description: The lab exercise will talk about Digital photography Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2026 LAYOUT AND STORYBOARDING FOR ANIMATION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To impart the techniques of storyboarding.

• To make the students understand the perspective.

• To provide hands-on experience in creating a storyboard for animation .

Course Outcome: • The students will understand the concept of perspective.

• The students will be able to work with the tools and the aspects of sketching.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

•

The students will be able to produce a story board for their project.

Course Description: Equipment of the layout artist. Perspective: one point, two point, three point , forced perspective, aerial – scale in layout – other aspects of perspective– pans- types of pans –composition –thumbnail drawing – conceptual drawings – leading the eye – animating backgrounds- lighting and rendering – staging –character layout– techniques and motifs – scene planning – computers and layout- storyboarding.

Reference Books: 1. Mark T Byrne, “Animation the art of layout and storyboarding”, Mark T Byrne publication , 1999.

2. Joseph D Amelio, “Perspective drawing Handbook”, Dover publication Inc., 2004.

3. David Louis, “Pencil Drawing Techniques”, Watson Guptil publication, 1984.

4. David Howard, “How to build a great screenplay, A Master Class in Storytelling for Film, St. Martin’s Press publishers New York, 2004.

5. William H. Phillips, “Writing Short Scripts”,2nd edition,2000 6. Laura schellhardt,”Screen writing for dummies”, Wiley publishing, 2008

14VC2027 2D ANIMATION TECHNIQUES Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To Introduce the features of Flash .

• To make the students understand the concept of 2D Animation.

• To provide practical experience in flash.

Course Outcome: • The students will understand the concept of 2D animation.

• The students will be able to work with Flash.

• The students will become familiar with the concept of Flash animation and special effects.

Course Description: The Project Plan - Libraries - Storyboards and Animatics - Setting Up Your FLA - Plug-ins and Extensions- Frame

by Frame Animation-Animating With Tweens- Animation Special Effects - Why Use After Effects?-After Effects and Camera Mechanics - Making Flash Not Look Like Flash - Script –Storyboard – Designs - Leica Reel (Animatic) - Pencil Tests (Animation) – Inking - The Principles of Animation and persistence of vision - Squash and Stretch – Kinematics - Choice of character - Character design –Timeline - The walk cycle -Digitizing and compiling the frames – Applications 2D animation.

Reference Books: 1. Tim Jones Barry J. Kelly Allan S. Rosson David Wolfe, “Foundation Flash Cartoon Animation”, Friends O Fed, aprèss company, 2007 2. Richard Williams, “ The Animators survival kit”, Faber and Faber publications.

3. Chris Webster, “Animation: The Mechanics of Motion”, Focal press,2005.

4. Mark T Byrne , “Animation the art of layout and storyboarding”, Mark T Byrne publication , 1999.

14VC2028 EDITING TECHNIQUES Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: To analysis and understand the footage.

To know different techniques of editing.

To acquire comprehensive knowledge about sequencing the film.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Outcome: Student understanding will be increased in analysing of footage.

Student will know different techniques of editing.

Student will acquire the knowledge on sequencing the film.

Course Description: History Of The Film Editing - Silent Period - Experiments in Editing – Alfred Hitchcock - Objective of Editing Editing for the Genre- Understanding of The Footage: Basic Shot Types - Audio Quality - Framing & Composition – 180 Degree Rule- Principles of Editing and Continuity: The Picture Edit and Continuity - Continuity: Continuity of Content – Continuity if Movement – Continuity of Position – Continuity of Sound- Continuity of Dialogue – Continuity of Performance - Timing – Rhythm – Time & Place.The Five Major Categories of Edit Types - Montage – Multi Camera Editing – Sync Sound and Counting Time – Digital Work Flow – Role Assistant Editor - Case Study on best edited films.

Reference Books: 1. Ken Dancyger, “The Technique of Film & Video Editing”, Focal press, 2011 2. Roy Thompson, Christropher J Bowen “Grammar of Edit”, Focal press,2009 3. Walter Murch, “In the Blink of an Eye: A Perspective on Film Editing”, Silman-James Press,2003 4. KarelReisz,Gavin Millar, “Technique of Film Editing”, 2nd Edition, Focal press, 2010 5. Robert M. Goodman,Patrick McGrath, “Editing Digital Video : The Complete 6.Creative and Technical Guide”, McGraw- Hill, 2003 6. Edward Dmytryk,“On Film Editing: An Introduction to the Art of Film Construction”, butterworth Heinemann, 1984

14VC2029 ILLUSTRATION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2013 Principles and techniques of design Course Objective: To create interest in drawing illustrations.

To provide various techniques to convert the ideas into illustrations.

To transform illustrations/exercises into media projects.

Course Outcome: To bring out a media project.

It facilitates out of box thinking.

Creative assignments will be compiled into a project, can be used as students portfolio Course Description: Through illustrations students will convey messages, storytelling through pictures, learning the nuances of sketching while practicing drawing, transferring the messages pictorially Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2030 VIDEO PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Co-Requisite :

14VC2019 Elements of Film and Video 14VC2015 Screenplay and Script writing 14VC2024 TV program production

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course objective: To teach the student the intricate process involved in production of various genres of videos.

To enable the student to choose the right type of shots to get the story across to the audience.

To make a student understand the problems one faces during the creation of a video project help him find solutions.

Course outcome: The students will be able to deliver better projects.

The students will be able to portray the scenes conceived in their mind.

The choice of framing by the students will be better.

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes making a video with a concept such as Documentary, Short film, Advertisements by learning types of shots and angles.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2031 VIDEO POST PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Corequisite: 14VC2028 Editing Techniques 14VC2024 TV Program Production Course objective: To help students learn and develop the editing sense required to create good projects.

To help students identify and rectify problems in the footage.

To help students to learn basic tricks of the edit.

Course outcome: The editing sense of the student will improve, as they would have edited hours of footage.

The students would be able to make use of the software in a professional manner.

The sense of choosing the right transitions would be better.

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes to learn the basic user interface of video editing software and to rough cut the videos and also to add transitions with the footages Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2032 - PHOTOGRAPHY LIGHTING LAB Credits: 0:0:1 Co-Requisite:

14VC2019 Elements of film and video 14VC2020 Creative Photography Techniques

Course Objective: To distribute knowledge on the various lighting techniques in photography to the industry level.

To apply the various lighting techniques for photography.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

To utilize the lighting techniques practically for their photographs.

Course Outcome: The students will get trained up to industrial standards lightings.

Students will learnt and practice on various lighting The students learn the depth knowledge of lighting.

Course Description: The Experiments will include digital photography and lighting Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 6 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2033 3D ANIMATION SOFTWARE Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: To learn the latest animation techniques.

To introduce to various animation software’s.

To introduce the components in each software.

Course Outcome: The students will be able to learn different animation softwares Latest Animation techniques will be known to students The making of a complete animation will be clearly understand.

Course Description: Maya : Workspace – Polygon Modeling – Nurbs, Subdivision Modeling – Shading and Texturing - Animation Lighting – Rendering.

3ds Max: Introducing Objects – Creating shapes with splines – Editing meshes and creating complex objects – Light and Shadow – Enhancing models with materials – Using the camera – Organizing objects and scene management – Animation – Particles and Dynamics – Rigging – Rendering Cinema4D: The fundamentals – Super Modeling – Deformers – Cameras – Lighting – Materials – Rendering – Lighting – MoGraph – Dynamics.

Reference Books: 1. John Edgar Park, “Understanding 3D Animation Using Maya”, Springer 2007.

2. Dariush Derakhshani, “Introducing Autodesk Maya 2013”, John Wiley & Sons, 2012.

3. Catherine Winder, “Producing Animation”, Focal Press, 2011.

4. Jeffrey Harper, “Mastering Autodesk 3ds Max 2013”, John Wiley & Sons, 2012.

5. Simon Russell, “Cinema 4D R14 Cookbook”, Packt Publishing Ltd, 2013.

14VC2034 3D ANIMATION TOOLS AND APPLICATION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To learn tools available in Maya for Animation.

• Toapply Animating skills with the use of Maya.

• To develop Animations using various tools in Maya through studio practices.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Outcome: • The students will have sound knowledge with tools for animation using Maya.

• The students will also develop character animating skills.

• The students will have to create a character animation portfolio using Maya.

Course Description: Basic animation techniques in Maya – Path animation - Character Design – 3D modeling –Skeletons : Joint orientation – Kinematics – inverse kinematics – Spline IK solver – deformers – blending with deformers - Lattice deformers- cluster deformers – Jiggle- non-linear deformers – Sine- Squash - twist- wave - Binding Skeleton: Various techniques – Rigid binding – smooth binding – indirect binding – Animation: Posing - Character sets – control nodes – Constraints – Walk cycle: non-linear animation – Refining motion – Facial Animation – Blend tools – Integration – Rendering .

Reference Books: 1. Brooks, Susan-Belle Ferguson and Lisa Ford, “Character Setup”, version 4, Alias|Wavefront, 2011.

2. Perry Harovas, John Kundert-Gibbs and Peter Lee , “Mastering MAYA Complete 2”, SYBEX, Inc, 2010.

3. Shamus Culhane, “Animation: From Script to Screen”, St. Martin's Press, 2008.

4. Harold Whitaker, “Timing for Animation”, Focal Press 2008 5. Hans Bacher, “Dream Worlds: Production Design for Animation”, 2007.

14VC2035CREATIVE SUIT LAB-I Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2013 Principles and Techniques of Design Course objective: To introduce the creative skills to the students.

To introduce the basics elements of design.

To improve the quality of the design based outputs of the student.

Course outcome: The students would learnt designing software.

The students would be able to efficiently create designs using the software.

Students can produce the desiging package.

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes designing in Software such as photoshop, crowldraw in design/ Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2036 PRINCIPLES OF ANIMATION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To learn principles and techniques of animation.

• To learn skills involving character design and Figurative animation.

• To learn and develop advance skill sets to produce an animation sequence.

Course Outcome: • The students will develop deep knowledge about foundational principles of animation.

• The students will also develop 2d character animating skills.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

•

Every student will have to complete an individual creative flipbook and also a group production creating an animation sequence using frame by frame animation.

Course Description: Basic formation of shapes - Types of animation- Principles: Timing in animation - Laws of motion - Pose-to-pose and straight-ahead - Keys and in-betweens - Overlapping action, follow-through and drag - Arcs and curves, and line of action - Cycle animation - Figurative Animation: four ‘A’s of animation - Walks and runs - Weight and balance – Anticipation – Acting – Characterization - Temperament and pace - Character interaction - Planning a scene - Props and costume – Storyboards - Character design – Design criteria - Animals in Motion - Embedding videoSound Synchronization - Formats : Video or Film.

Reference Books: 1. Chris Webster, “Animation: The Mechanics of Motion”, Focal Press, 2011.

2. Angie Jones, “Thinking Animation”, Thomson, 2006.

3. Tony White, “How to make animated films”, Focal Press, 2013.

4. Webster Chris, Animation: The Mechanics of Motion. Oxford: Focal Press, 2008.

5. Hans Bacher, “Dream Worlds: Production Design for Animation”, Focal Press, 2009.

14VC2037 SOUND FOR ANIMATION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: This course covers the insights of basics of sound theory for animation.

This course aims at basic understanding in dialogue, music, sound effects and Foley.

This course discusses various aspects of sound editing and final mix.

Course Outcome: Students will understand the concept for basics of sound design for animation.

Students will gain comprehensive understanding on various elements of sound in animation.

Students will grasp the techniques on sound editing and final mastering.

Course Description: Sound design theory – classifications, narrative functions, interpreting picture edits, Dialogue – principal dialogue, narration, group ADR and Walla, developing script, casting talent, caricature, recording dialogue, Music – underscore, source music, songs, title, montage and end Credits sequence, Sound Effects – the SFX stem, SFX libraries, developing libraries, Foley – Foley stage, spotting Foley, Foley artist, Foley editing, Sound editing – Synchronization, timing and cutting, fades, compositing, time, pitch, speed, noise reduction- Final Mix- stereo mixmulti channel mix, mastering.

Reference Books: 1. Robin Beauchamp, “Designing Sound for Animation”, Focal Press, 2nd edition, 2013.

2. Rebecca Coyle, “Drawn to Sound: Animation Film Music and Sonicity”, 2010.

3. Emily Angelina Shurtz , "Stopping the Show": Early Sound Animation, Spectacle, and the Cinema of Attractions”, Umi Dissertation Publishing, 2012.

4. Tony Fabbri, “Animation, Games and Sound for the I. B. M. Personal Computer”, Prentice Hall, 1983.

5. Vanessa Theme Ament, “The Foley Grail: The Art of Performing Sound for Film, Games, and Animation” Focal Press, 2009.

14VC2038 VISUAL EFFECTS FOR ANIMATION Credits:3:0:0 Course Objective: This course is designed to prepare technicians with specialized skills, knowledge and attitude to work in Animation

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

field.

Develop and demonstrate their understanding and skillful use of the elements and principles of visual effects Gain skill to use the digital tools as a powerful means of communication for creation, modification & presentation.

Course Outcome: The student will have a solid understanding of basic animation & Visual effects It will help to improve their design skills and techniques using a variety of tools.

To understand the role of Special effects in animation Course Description: Visual Effects- Description- Types - Particles – Animation – Composting – Full 3D composting environment – Advanced visual effects tools – keying, color correction, tracking, grain management - masking Designing Special Effects – Designing effects of Hair and shape – Designing Glow Effects – Designing Fur Effects - Visual Effects Tool and advanced functions– Converting images from 2D to 3D Pictures.

Reference Books: 1. Richard Rickitt, “Special Effects: The History and Technique”, 2nd edition, Billboard Books, 2007.

2. Ron Brinkman,“The Art and Science of Digital Compositing”, 2 nd Edition,Morgan Kaufmann, 2008.

3. Isaac V. Kerlow, “The Art of 3-D Computer Animation and Imaging”, 2012.

4. Isaac V.Kerlow, “The Art of 3D Computer Animation and Effects”, 4 th Edition, 2009.

5. Steve Wright, “ Compositing Visual Effects”, Focal Press, 2012.

14VC2039 ANIMATION IN ADVERTISING Credits:3:0:0 Course Objective: This course will enhance skill development in modeling, materials development, camera placement, lighting, effective composition, storyboarding, and animation.

Students will get experience in a number of specific animation methods.

Students will learn drawing techniques appropriate to the industry need.

Course outcome: The students to become a master the art of animation in advertising industry.

Students can develop of their own unique creative voice in a future-facing environment.

Course will also bring the confident to run their own industry.

Course Description: Introduction to Animation-story-storyboard design -character and properties development -background designcolour-layout-scene planning- animation principals and techniques used to create 2D and 3D animation, while synchronizing image and sound-CGI production-types of animation-production phases-understanding of advertisinganimation need in advertising-understanding of product-audience selection-target audience-selection of script – utilization of animation –understanding of industry need.

Reference Books 1 Pricken, “Visual Creativity: Inspirational Ideas for Advertising, Animation and Digital Design”, Thames and Hudson, 2004 2. Jean Ann Wrigh , “Animation Writing and Development: From Script Development to Pitch”,focal press2010.

3. Kathy Furgan, “ Careers in Digital Animation” , focal press2010.

4. Nik Mahon, “Basics Advertising 02: Art Direction”,AVApublishing,SA 2010.

5. John Vince, “Essential Computer Animation”, Springer UK , FirstEdition 2000.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2040 2D ANIMATION PRODUCTION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To Introduce the features of Flash .

• To make the students understand the concept of 2D Animation.

• To provide practical experience in flash.

Course Outcome: • The students will understand the concept of 2D animation.

• The students will be able to work with Flash.

• The students will become familiar with the concept of Flash animation and special effects.

Course Description: The Project Plan - Libraries - Storyboards and Animatics - Setting Up Your FLA - Plug-ins and Extensions- Frame

by Frame Animation-Animating With Tweens- Animation Special Effects - Why Use After Effects?-After Effects and Camera Mechanics - Making Flash Not Look Like Flash - Tips and Tricks -The Principles of Animation and persistence of vision - Squash and Stretch – Kinematics - Choice of character - Character design – Anticipation Straight Ahead and Pose to Pose - Follow through and overlapping action – Timeline - The walk cycle -Digitizing and compiling the frames – Applications 2D animation.

Reference Books: 1. Tim Jones Barry J. Kelly Allan S. Rosson David Wolfe, “Foundation Flash Cartoon Animation”, Friends O Fed, aprèss company, 2007 2. Steve Roberts, “Character Animation: 2D skills for better 3D”, Focal Press, 2007.

3. Chris Webster, “Animation: The Mechanics of Motion”, Focal press, 2005.

4. Catherine Winder , “Producing Animation”, Focal Press, 2011.

5. Angie Jones, “Thinking Animation”, Thomson , 2006

14VC2041 LIGHTING AND TEXTURING Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: To learn the perception of human eye.

To introduce the lighting concepts for animation.

To Introduce the Lighting Technoques Course Outcome: The students will understand different types of lights available for animation The students will be able to light a complete 3D model.

The students will apply photography and cinematography techniques to animation.

Course Description: Nature of Light - The Physiology of Seeing and Perception – Anatomy of the Eye – Light Pathways in the Eye – Processing Visual Information – Sensing Movement – The Seven Eye Movements – The Vestibular System – Monocular Cues – Fundamentals of Photography and Cinematography – Colors and Materials – Computer Graphics – Basic Lighting Techniques – Applied Lighting Techniques – Lighting Situations - Materials – Shaders – Material creation Interfaces – Image Maps and Procedural Maps - Light Surfaces – Complex Materials – Mapping and Unwrapping - Rendering Reference Books: 1. Emalee Beddoes, “3ds Max Projects”, 3D Total Publishing, 2014.

2. Lee Lanier, “Advanced Maya Texturing and Lighting”, Wiley Publishing, 2008.

3. Lee Lanier, “Maya Studio Projects: Texturing and Lighting”, Sybex , 2011.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

4.

5.

Jeremy Birn, “Digital Lighting and Rendering”, New Riders, 2013 Ami Chopine, “3D Art Essentials: The Fundamentals of 3D Modeling, Texturing, and Animation”, Taylor & Francis, 2011.

14VC2042 RENDERING TECHNIQUES

Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To understand and learn rendering techniques in Maya.

• To learn various techniques of rendering for various medium from Maya.

• To expertise in Renderingthrough practical practices.

Course Outcome: • The students will learn have sound knowledge Shading and texturing in Maya.

• The students will also be capable to develop various scenarios of Lighting.

• The students will go through rendering practices using Maya.

Course Description: Rendering: Basics of Rendering - Rendering an Object: the Camera and the Resolution -Creating, Connecting,&Accessing nodes – RenderMenu – EditingRenderingAttributes – RenderGlobal – HardwareRendering Attributes - Working in the Render ViewMenus – Interactive Photorealistic Rendering (IPR) - Shading the Object SurfaceRendering - Convert ToFile Texture - MaterialAttributes – SurfaceMaterials - Displacement Material – CreatingBackgrounds – Depth of Field - Partial Image Rendering -LayeredTextures – Utilities: Glow, Color, Switch - Batch Rendering– Different Passes for Final composition Reference Books: 1. Jeremy Birn, “Digital Lighting and Rendering”, 3rd edition, New Rider, 2013.

2. Tomas Akenine-Moller, Eric Haines and Naty Hoffman, “Real-Time Rendering”, 3rd edition, 2008.

3. Roger Cusson, Jamie Cardoso, “Realistic Architectural Rendering”, Focal Press, 2009.

4. Wolfgang Engel, “ GPU Pro 4: Advanced Rendering Techniques”, Taylor & Francis, 2013.

5. Brian Bradley, “Photographic Rendering with V- Ray for sketch up”, Packt, 2014.

14VC2043 3D MODELING Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To learn tools for modeling using Maya.

• To learn various techniques for modeling with polygon, NURBS and Sub Division surfaces.

• To understand and to develop modeling skills through modeling exercises.

Course Outcome: • The students will learn have sound knowledge 3D modeling using Maya.

• The students will also be capable to develop various styles of modeling.

• The students will have to create a 3D modeling portfolio.

Course Description: Modeling Basics:Pick-Masking – Snapping - Freeze Transformations– Primitives - NURBS Modeling:Curve and Surface - Editing Curves: Creating Surfaces – Lofting- Extrude - Planar, Text, and Bevel – Boundary - Editing Surfaces: - Attach and Detach - Isoparms and Aligning Surfaces - Extend and Offset Surfaces - Trim and Round Round and Fillet - Polygon Modeling: Faces - Solids, Shells, and UV - Extruding and Duplicating – Boolean Combining, Extracting, and Separating – Splitting - Smoothing and Sculpting - Introduction – basic interface - the fundamentals of 3D modeling – polygons – NURBS – sub division surface – character set up – Basic texturing.

Reference Books: 1. Perry Harovas, John Kundert-Gibbs and Peter Lee , “Mastering MAYA Complete 2”, SYBEX, Inc, 2000.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

2.

3.

4.

5.

Ami Chopne, “ 3D art Essentials: The Fundamentals of 3D Modelling,texturing and animation” Taylor & Francis, 2011 William Vaughan, “Digital Modeling”, New Riders, 2011.

Nikos Sarris, Michael G. Strintzis, “ 3D Modeling and Animation: Synthesis and Analysis Techniques for the Human Body”, Idea Group Inc (IGI), 2005 5 John Vince, “3D Handbook of Computer Animation”, Springer,2002

14VC2044 3D ANIMATION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite : 14VC2033 3D Animation Software Course Objective: To train the students in the area of 3D Animation and its software application.

To make the students understand the process of 3D animation production in studios.

The students will be trained in the area of character designing and concept designing in 3D Animation.

Course Outcome: Students will be well equipped with all the basic animation concepts practically which helps them in doing character modelling, lighting, texturing and animations Students will gain hands on experience in the use of Maya for animation.

They will learn 3D animation and advanced modelling and rendering techniques.

Course Description: The Experiments will include maya interface tools rendering camera and animation techniques.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2045 2D ANIMATION LAB Credits:0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2040 2D Animation Production Course objective: This course introduces students to digital 2D animation techniques and processes through hands-on lab projects.

This course emphasis is on creative content, experimentation, and critical thinking Course outcome Through a series of experiments, this class will explore contemporary trends in animation and character design, This lab exposes students to tools such as Adobe After Effects and Flash.

Course Description: Experiments will include Flash Layout ,Motion Tween ,Shape tweening Motion guide using Flash Basic effects in Adobe after effects Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2046 CINEMATOGRAPHY Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To teach the students with the 5C’s of Cinematography To enrich knowledge to the students on the aesthetics of Cinematography To keep the students updated with the latest techniques in Cinematography Course Outcome: The students will master the time tested concept of applying 5 Cs in their production thatHollywood follows in their film making techniques The students will get trained to industry standards in cinematography Professional cinematographers withsound knowledge are produced Course Description: Camera Angle – Scene, Shot & Sequence –Types of Camera Angles – Subject size, Subject Angle & Camera Height – Scene requirements Continuity – Cinematic Time & Space – Filming the Action – Scene Direction – Different types of Action Axis – Cutting – Types of Editing – Sound Flow – Close Ups – Extreme, Over the Shoulder, Types of close ups – Composition – Still vs. Motion Picture Composition – Composition Rules –Balance, Unity & Eye Scan – Framing Reference Books: 1. Joseph V.Mascelli, “The 5Cs of Cinematography”, Silman-James Press, 2001.

2. Ivan Cury, “Directing & Producing for Television”, Focal Press, 2007.

3. David Stump, “Digital Cinematography Techniques”, Focal Press, 2014.

4. Kris Malkiewicz, “Cinematography”, Simon & Sehuster, 2005.

5. Sonja Schenk & Ben Long, “The Digital Filmmaking Handbook”, Course Technology, 2012.

14VC2047 FILM APPRECIATION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To understand the art of watching and appreciating films To imbue insights on analysing different genres of films To practice the art of culling out films and appreciating the various aspects of it Course Outcome: The students will be thorough with the art of appreciating and analysing films The students will become good learners of films The students will acquire high skill on knowing film theories and the art of watching films Course Description: Film Appreciation – Social, Political, Economic, Cultural, Technical and Aesthetic aspects of Film – Characteristics of Films –Appreciation of Film Genres – Appreciation of Mise-en-Scene in Films – Appreciation of Italian Neorealism – Appreciation of German Expressionism – Appreciation of French New Wave – Appreciation of Soviet Montage – Appreciation of works of International filmmakers (The lab exercise will focus on appreciating selected films on various genres from popular international and national filmmakers) Reference Books: 1. David Bordwell& Kristin Thompson, “Film Art An Introduction”, 8th edition, McGraw Hill, 2008.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

2.

3.

4.

5.

James Monaco, “How to read a film”, Oxford University Press, 2009.

Maria Pramaggiore& Tom Wallis, “ Film A Critical Introduction”, 2 nd edition, Pearson, 2008.

James Donald, Micheal Renov, “The SAGE Handbook of Film Studies”, Sage Publications, 2008 .

Wheeler Winston Dixon, “Cinema at the Margin”, Anthem Press, 2014.

14VC2048 PERFORMING ART Credits 3:0:0 Course objective: To understand the basic elements of Stage performances process and various skills needed for it.

To understand the research mechanism and treatment of ideas in develop script for stage production To learn the techniques of making the production.

Course Outcome: The students are able to understand the various formats and learn to make value based productions to create greater social impact\ The students obtain the skills to plan and implement various stages of production.

The students get the skills to evaluate the production design.

Course Description: Fundamentals of Production – Telling story in images–subjectivity-Using sound to tell story- Explore characterization- Dramatize the story – Writing short screen play – Developing substance and style- Visualizing strategies- Dramatic strategies.-Approaches to Plot - – Camera and lighting Equipments – Sound Equipments planning – – Art and set preparations - Casting – Art direction- shooting preparation – – Camera features – continuity Shooting techniques – Nonlinear editing.

Reference Books: 1. Martin Esslin , “Theatre of the Absurd”, , Blumsbury publications 2003 2. Zetti , “Video Production techniques”, Focal Press ,2002 2. Joseph V. Mascelli, “ The five C’s of Cinematography”, , Silman James press2000 3. Pat cooper and Ken Dancyger, “ Writing the Short film”, Focal Press 2005 4 Ken Dancyger, “The Technique of Film and Video editing” Focal Press Vth edit 2011 5. Paul Wheeler, “High Definition Cinematography”, Focal Press, 3 rd edit (2009)

14VC2049 TYPES OF PHOTOGRAPHY Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: Teaches the division of photography – Many categories, many with sub-categories.

Discusses various techniques and skill used for each types of photography.

Explains the special purpose of each type & application.

Course Outcome: The students can realize what type of photography appeals to them.

They can fine tune their interest in those types either as a hobbyist or as a professional.

They will learn the skills & find equipments needed for creating various types of photos.

Course Description: Various applications in photography – Action, Ariel, Architectural, Astronomical, Black & White, Candid, Children, Event, Forensic, Fashion, Food, Glamour, Infrared, Landscape, Long Exposure, Macro, Micro, Medical, Model, Nature, Night, Panoramic, Portrait, Street, Still Life, Sports, Spy, Time-Lapse, Travel, Table Top, Industrial, Ultra Violet, Under-water, Wildlife, Wedding Photography – Challenges & Constraints in each type – Special

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

photographic equipment & accessories needed – Legal & ethical issues – Ways to market photographs.

Reference books: 1. Daniel Lezano, “Photography Bible”, Focal Point, 2001.

2. Tom Ang, “Digital Photography Master class”, DK publication, 2008 3. Scot Kelby, “ Digital Photography Book – Part 2 ”,Kindle Edition, 2010 4. David Bailey, George Hughes, “Book of Photography”, Kindle Edition, 2010 5. Michel Freeman, “The Pro Photographer’s D-SLR Handbook, Atlantic Publishers,

14VC2050 LIVE SOUND Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: The course portrays how indoor & outdoor public address system functions in different environments.

The behavior of sound in varied situations and the techniques for efficiently handling sound to give the best speech & music performance are discussed.

Details on microphones, audio amplifiers & loudspeakers are provided with minimum amount of technicalities that are just sufficient for the students of this course.

Course Outcome: The students will be able to plan and execute a sound reinforcement system for a variety of occasions.

They will be able to deliver good quality audio to the audience by choosing the right equipments & tweaking the listening area for optimum presentation of sound.

They will come to know the functions of each equipment in the audio chain so that they will be able to guide the subordinates while rigging the system.

Course Description: Sound Reinforcement System Basics – Public Address System requirements – Miking Techniques used – Mixers used for LSR – Amplifier Specification and selection – Signal Processors used for LSR – Loudspeaker Specification and Selection – Stage Miking – Instrument Miking - Stage Rack – Cabling – Mixing for LSR – Monitoring – Speaker Calibration – Handling Feedback – Introduction to Line Array Systems Reference Books: 1. Paul White, “Basic Live Sound”, Sanctuary Publications, 2003.

2. Gary Davis, Ralph Jones, “Sound Reinforcement Handbook”, Hal Leonard Corporation, 2 nd Edition, 2000 3. F. Alton Everest, “Master Handbook of Acoustics”, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill Publishing, 2001 4. Frederick N Martin, John Greer N Clark, “Introduction to Audiology”, 9th Edition, 2003 5. Michael Talbot-Smith, “Sound Engineering Explained”, 2nd Edition, Focal Press, 2002.

6. Douglas Self, Richard Brice, Ben Duncan, John Linsley Hood, Ian Sinclair, Andrew Singmin, Don Davis, Eugene Patronis, John Watkinson, “ Audio Engineering”, Focal Press, 2009.

14VC2051 WRITING DIRECTING AND PRODUCING DOCUMENTARY FILM Credits 3:0:0 Course objective: To understand the basic elements of Documentary Storytelling, the various approaches involved in Documentary structure.

To understand the research mechanism and treatment of ideas to transform into script To learn the techniques of Documentary production and editing.

Course Outcome: The students understand and apply the various formats make Professional Documentary to create social impact

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

The students will be efficient in documentary production.

The students will be enabled to evaluate documentary films.

Course Description: Documentary writing - subset of Non-fiction film and video –subjectivity in story telling-story basics- Dramatic story-telling- Documentary story – Evaluation Story ideas – Developing the story – shots for documentryApproaches in documenting –Archival Film making – Docu-Drama – 3act structure – applying film structure – Documentary research basics –Types of researches – Casting – Hosts and Narrators – Documentary proposal writing– Outlining the cast – Treatment of roles – Basic Equipments– Camera features – camera shots-shooting with story in mind -Documentary Sequence – Imagination and editing– Principles of Documentary editing.

Reference Books: 1. Sheila Curran Bernard, “Documentary Storytelling” , Focal Press , (2007) 2. Keb Dancyger , “The Technique of Film and Video editing”, Focal Press Vth edit(2011) 3. Paul Wheeler , “Digital Cinematography”, Focal press (2005) 4. Paul Wheeler , “High Definition Cinematography”, Focal Press IIIrd edition (2009) 5. Joseph V Mascelli, “Principles of cinematography”.Silman James press,2000

14VC2052 INDIAN CULTURE AND LIBERAL ARTS Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: To develop an understanding about liberal arts.

To understand liberal arts in Indian cultural context.

To study the changes occurred in media in today’s context.

Course Outcome: To develop the knowledge about liberal arts.

To understand the amalgamation of Indian culture and liberal arts.

To understand the influence of culture in media.

Course Description: Reason and Speech – Intellectual Inquiry and Social Engagement – Liberal Arts and Moral Improvement – Land and People – Values and Attitudes – Customs and Traditions – Family – Timeout – Communicating – Media Development and Mixed Messages – Liberalization, Diversity and the Age of Television – Digital India: Software, Services and Cyber Cultures – Media Provision and Soft Power.

Reference Books: 1. 1.Bruce A. Kimball, “The Liberal Arts Tradition: A documented History”, University Press of America, 2010.

2. Becky Stephen, “India – Culture Smart: The Essential Guide to Customs and Culture” Kuperard, 2010 3. Adrian Athique, “Indian Media: Global Media and Communication”, Polity, 2012.

4. De Fleur, Melvin L., Dennis, “Understanding Mass Communication”: A Liberal Arts Perspective, Huoghton Mifflin, 2001.

5. Mark William Roche, “Why Choose the Liberal Arts?” University of Notre Dame Press, 2010.

14VC2053 FILM TECHNIQUES AND AESTHETICS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To impart the knowledge of film techniques.

To provide the basics of filming.

To help the students understand the aspects of film production.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Outcome: The students will gain knowledge on, how film is being produced.

The studentsinspiration level of becoming a film maker would increase.

The students will also be able to work in a systematic way for their production.

Course Description: The Shot: Mise-en-Scene-Aspects of Mise-en-Scene -Setting - Costume and Makeup-Lighting . Staging: Movement and Performance -Mise-en-Scene in Space and Time- Space - Time - Narrative Functions of Mise-en-Scene. The Shot: Cinematography -The Photographic Image.Framing : Angle, Level, Height, and Distance of Framing - The Mobile Frame. Duration of the Image: The Long Take . Editing: Dimensions of Film Editing - Graphic Relations Rhythmic Relations - Spatial Relations - Temporal Relations Between– ContinuityEditing. Spatial Continuity: The 180" System -Crosscutting .Temporal Editing: Order, Frequency and Duration. SoundinCinema:The Powers of Sound - Fundamentals of Film Sound -Dimensions of Film Sound.

Reference Books: 1. David Bordwell Kristin Thompson , “FILM ART AN INTRODUCTION”, Eighth edition, McGraw Hill,2008 2. Andrew H. Utterback, “Studio Television Production And Directing”, Focal Press, 2007.

3. Jeremy Orlebar, “DIGITAL TELEVISION PRODUCTION”, Arnold publishers, 2002.

4. David Bordwell& Kristin Thompson, “Film Art An Introduction”, 8 th edition, McGraw Hill, 2008.

5. Maria Pramaggiore& Tom Wallis, “ Film A Critical Introduction”, 2nd edition, Pearson, 2008.

14VC2054 LIGHTING FOR DIGITAL VIDEO Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To enrich the students with the knowledge towardslighting equipment.

• To provide knowledge on the basics of digital video lighting.

• To experience the lighting for video production.

Course Outcome: • The students will understand the various types lighting equipment.

• The students will know how to use the types of lighting for production.

• The students will also get practical experience in setting up the lights for video production.

Course Description: Importance of lighting for Television and Video: Exposure- Contrast- Human Vision, the Camera, and ExposureControlling Contrast- Controlling Color-The Kelvin Scale-Volts, Amps, and Watts - Determine the Load- Standard Connectors. Lighting Instruments- Lensed - Fluorescent –Soft lights-Cookies and Snack Boxes -Lighting Controls and Uses –Gels- Diffusion Materials- Nets and Silks. Basic Lighting Techniques :Interview Setups- Basic ThreePoint Interview Setup-Different Color Temperatures in the Scene-Studio Lighting-Advanced Lighting SetupsLighting Darkness-Lighting Low-Budget Locations- Specialized Lighting -Product Shots- Food Shots-Automobile Interiors-Bluescreen and Greenscreen-Lighting the Background& Foreground- Imagination and Invention.

Reference Books: 1. John Jackman, “LIGHTING for DIGITAL VIDEO & TELEVISION”, CMP books, 2005 2. Billy Pegram, “LIGHTING TECHNIQUES”, Amherst Media, Inc., 2009.

3. Christopher Grey, “Masters lighting guide”, AMHERST MEDIA, INC., 2010.

4. R.Craig Wolf & Dick Block , “Scene Design and Stage Lighting”, Wadsworth, 10th Edition, 2013.

5. Des Lyver,Graham Swansong, “Basic of the video lighting”, Elsevier, 2005.

6. Blain Brown,“Cinematography: Theory and Practice: Image Making for Cinematographers and Directors”, Focal Press, 2012.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2055 VISUAL EFFECTS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To provide students with an understanding of the fundamental issues, technologies and techniques involved in post production work.

To enable students to appreciate the complexities of integrating computer generatedimages and animations with real footage.

To provide students with the necessary knowledge and skills to undertake corecompositing work.

Course Outcome: Students will gain an applied understanding of the principles of composite work It creates the ability to apply and justify the use of common compositing techniques to create animation/video sequences To obtain the knowledge of the concepts behind current compositing approaches.

Course Description: Special effect categories - In the camera effects - Physical effects. Visual effects - Make-up effects - Atmospheric effects - Miniature effects - Computer generated effects -Color and contrast change - Slot gags – sharp – dissolve corner pins- wraps and 2D morphs - Particle and fluid simulation –Elements of Design - Depth of Field - Keying Concepts Continued Grouping - Subcomps and Rendering Techniques Reference Books: 1. Steve Wright “Compositing Visual Effects”, 3rd Edition, 2010 2. Steve Wright “Digital Compositing for Film and Video”, 3 rd Edition, 2010.

3. Filming the Fantastic: A Guide to Visual Effects Cinematography, Second Edition by Mark Sawicki 4. Shilo T. McClean , “Digital Storytelling: The Narrative Power of Visual Effects in Film , 5. Jeffrey A. Okun and Susan Zwerman, “The VES Handbook of Visual Effects”

14VC2056 DIRECTION Credits 3:0:0 Course objective: To understand the basic elements of Direction To understand the essentials and learn the skills of direction To learn the professional techniques of Direction Course Outcome: The students will be able to understand the role and responsibility of direction The students learn the skills and approaches of the direction as a profession.

The students will be able to assess the various types of directors and their styles Course Description: Direction – action techniques – elements of direction. – principles of direction. Planning and performance- roles and responsibilities of direction- skills and techniques related to performance and direction- rehearsal – location scouting- evaluation of different styles of direction. Ethics and moral responsibility in direction- Artistic identity and drama – Screencraft – The story and its development – Aesthetics and Authorship – What Do Directors Direct?

– How to Direct the Eyes? – How to Convey and Suggest Meaning Reference Books: 1. Michael Rabiger, “Directing, Fourth edition”, Focal Press, 2008.

2. Francis Glebas, “Directing the Story”, Focal Press, 2009.

3. Nicholas T. Proferes, “Film Directing Fundamentals”, Third edition, Focal Press, 2008.

4. Eden H. Wurmfeld & Nicole Shay Laloggia, “Independent Filmmaker’s Manual, Second edition”, Focal

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

5.

Press, 2004.

Ken Dancyger, “The Director’s Idea – The Path to Great Directing”, Focal Press, 2006.

14VC2057 VISUAL EFFECTS

LAB

Credits 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2055 Visual Effects Course Objective To develop in students the foundation skills of the tools and techniques used in the visual effects industry, Specializing in the creation of 2D/3D computer animated elements for digital visual effects Both 2D and 3D tracking of live action and CGI elements Course outcome: Students will use advanced CG tools to create preliminary 3D CG representations of environments, visual effects.

To create motion picture sequences that is visually and technically representative of final production imagery.

Course Description: The Experiments will include vfx trends and techniques which is used in industry.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2058 TELEVISION PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:1 Co-Requisite: 14VC2046 cinematography Course objective To Study and training in basic television studio production . .To Emphasis on producing and directing with training in various studio, control room, and functions.

Students are encouraged to do various television programmes.

Course outcome Students will learn an understanding of operating television studio cameras.

Students will earn an understanding of the duties of a technical director and basic responsibilities of a director Students will demonstrate of operating an audio board and testing microphones.

Course Description: Experiments based upon Elements of television production and TV Production Lab. Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 6 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2059 SOUND IN MEDIA Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To make students understand the significance of sound in media productions.

To enable students to creatively chose the sound requirements for different types of media.

To bridge the gap between technology and talent.

Course Outcome: This course will enable students to understand the fundamental requirements for various types of audio in media.

This course will enable students to creatively envision production approaches for different types of audio production.

This course will enable students to respect technology and revere talents.

Course Description: Sound and Hearing - Basic Considerations while miking speech: Acoustics in Speech Studio, Microphones for speaking voice – Voice Over’s and Narration: Voice Acting, Recording Voice Overs, Narration – Recording Dialogue in muti and single camera production - Recording Dialogue in the field – Production Recording – Automated Dialogue Replacement – Miking for Interviews – Miking for News programs, Panel and Talk programs – Miking for Dramas – Sound for ENG – Sports broadcast – Music Underscoring – Music Recording – BGM Reference Books: 1. Stanley R Alten, “Audio in Media”, Cengage Learning, 9 th Edition, 2011 2. Frederick N Martin, John Greer N Clark, “Introduction to Audiology”, 9th Edition, 2003 3. Michael Talbot-Smith, “Sound Engineering Explained”, 2nd Edition, Focal Press, 2002.

4. Douglas Self, Richard Brice, Ben Duncan, John Linsley Hood, Ian Sinclair, Andrew Singmin, Don Davis, Eugene Patronis, John Watkinson, “ Audio Engineering”, Focal Press, 2009.

5. Stanley R Alten, “Recording and Producing Audio for Media”, 1 st Edition, 2012

14VC2060 INTRODUCTION TO SOUND DESIGN Credits 3:0:0 Course objective: To teach the students the fundamental concepts of sound design.

To help them understand the interplay of frequencies which result in the creation of tones.

To teach them the basics help them design basic sounds required to accompany the on screen visual.

Course Outcome: Students would have understood the basic concepts of sound design.

Will possess the understanding for designing the necessary basic sound effects to complement the Video.

Would have understood the various stages of sound design.

Course Content: Introduction to sound design, Script analysis, Listen for objects, actions, environments, emotions and transitions, Picture edit analysis, experimenting and inventing original sounds, Sound and narrative analysis, From vibration to sensation, From Sensation to perception, creating the space, time and tone characteristics, Inventing sound objects with spatial and temporal dimentions, Character identification, Case study of a Movie.

Reference book: 1. David Sonnenschein, “Sound Design: The Expressive Power of Music, Voice and Sound Effects in Cinema”, Michael Wiese productions, 2001.

2. Stanley R. Alten, “Audio in Media, Cengage Learning”, Ninth Edition, 2011.

3. Jay Beck, Tony Grajeda,Lowering the Boom: “Critical Studies in Film Sound Hardcover”, University of

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

4.

5.

Illinois, 2008.

Martin Russ , “Sound Synthesis and Sampling”, Focal Press, Third Edition, 2009.

Michel Chion, Claudia Gorbman, “Audio-Vision: Sound on Screen”, Columbia University press, 1990.

14VC2061 VOICE IN CINEMA Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To help students understand the steps involved in recording voice.

To enable the students to capture voice with all its character.

To enable students to edit and process the voice so that it will add to the film’s value.

Course Outcome: Students would have understood the stages of recording a voice.

Students would be able to capture and process the voice of the artist.

Students would have learnt the current ways of doing ADR in the film industry.

Course Description: Introduction to Dialogues, analyzing the script, miking for recording dialogues, setting optimal levels, Voice acting, voiceovers, Narration, Recording dialogue in the field, Role of an editor in the Filming process, Screening and spoting sessions, Dialogue editing, Image , Depth, Perspective, damage repair, adding production FX, ADR, Syncing audio and video Preparing for the Mix, mixing, Film analysis-Terminator 2, Beauty and the Beast.

Reference Books: 1. John Purcell, “Dialogue Editing for Motion Pictures”, Focal Press, 2007.

2. Tom Kenny , “Sound for Picture: Film Sound Through the 1990s”, Mix Books,2000.

3. ALTEN, “Audio in Media, Cengage Learning”, Nineth edition, 2011.

4. Jeffrey Fisher, Soundtrack Success: “A Digital Storyteller's Guide”, Cengage learning, 2012.

5. Harland Hogan and Jeffrey P. Fisher, “Voice Actor's Guide to Recording at Home and On the Road”, cengagae Learning, 2009.

14VC2062 RADIO PROGRAMPRODUCTION Credits: 3:0:0 Course objective: To teach the students the fundamentals of Programproduction for radio.

To help them understand the Stages of content creation involved Radio.

To teach them the importance of Script for producing a quality radio Programproduction.

Course Outcome: Students would have understood the basic concepts of Programproduction.

Students will possess the understanding to create quality scripts for radio.

Students will be able to Create and produce a Radio programme.

Students will also possess the skills necessary to manage a small radio broadcast setup.

Course Content: Introduction to Radio as a Mass Medium – AM, FM, Online Radio, Visual radio, Satellite radio, Community Radio, Concept & Importance, Production elements of Radio programmes, Scriptwriting, Writing for Radio, Gathering, reporting and Compilation of News, Program styles, Radio Presentation Skills: Voice over techniques, Radio Production Techniques: Nature of sound, Sound recording techniques, Equipments, Post-production techniques on voice, music and effects, Computer in automation, Broadcasting Techniques, Production of radio content, Programcontent evaluation, Technical evaluation, Thematic evaluation, Radio marketing strategies.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Reference Books 1. Mencher. M., “Basic News Writing”, Sharma Books, 2008.

2. Jim Beaman, Program“Making for radio”, 2006.

3. Robert McLeish, “Radio Production”, 2005.

4. Lesiler &Flat lay, “Basic Business communication”. Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2004.

5. Peter Stewart, Essential Radio Skills: “How To Present A Radio Show”, A&C Black, 2006.

6. Carl Hausman, Frank Messere, Lewis O'Donnell, Philip Benoit, Modern Radio Production: “Production Programming & Performance”, Cengage Learning, Ninth Edition, 2013.

14VC2063 SOUND FOR INTERACTIVE MEDIA Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: This course covers the insights of basics of sound theory for interactive media.

This course aims at basic understanding in music theory, and principles of sound design.

This course discusses various aspects of sound in various environments.

Course Outcome: Students will understand the concept for basics of sound design for interactive media.

Students will gain comprehensive understanding on sound design in various interactive media.

Students will grasp the techniques on streaming and MIDI. Course Description: Music Theory for Sound Designers – music theory by design, fundamentals of music, major and minor scales, Principles of sound design – sound and image, impact of sound on image, the ear, sound perception and sensation, sound design pre-production, Sound design for web – audio on web, audio assets, audio implementation, Streaming and MIDI – media streaming, Introduction to MIDI, Sound in Various Environments - Virtual Sound Environments, Far Cry Game Editor, DirectMusic Producer.

Reference Books: Joseph Cancellaro, “Exploring Sound Design for Interactive Media”, 2005.

Anthony Helmstetter and Ron Simpson, “Web Developer's Guide to Sound and Music”, 1996.

William Duckworth, “Virtual Music: How the Web Got Wired for Sound”, 2005.

G.W. Childs, “Creating Music and Sound for Games” 2006.

Aaron Marks, “The Complete Guide to Game Audio: For Composers, Musicians, Sound Designers, Game Developers” 2008.

14VC2064 SOUND EFFECTS AND FOLEY Credits: 3:0:0 Course objective: To teach the students the optimal miking techniques for recording and editing Sound effects.

To help them understand the working and optimal use of recording setups to effectively capture the required sounds.

To teach them the basics of mixing and mastering the effects track.

Course Outcome: Students would have understood the basic requirements for creating sound effects.

Will possess the understanding for to create the necessary effects to complement the Video.

Would have understood the various stages of foley creation.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Description: Introduction to sound effects, Sound effect creation types, Choice of Microphones, Microphone accessories, Choice of recording Equipment, Safety takes, Recording Ambiences, Handling noise, Recording a Stereo pass-by, Foley, Roles of the individuals, Setting up a Foley Stage, Foley pits, Walking in their Shoes, Performing Props, Cloths, Sync for Foley, Foley Mixer, Editing and Mixing Foley, Final Postproduction, Movie Samples.

Reference book: 1. Ric Viers, “The Sound Effects Bible: How to Create and Record Hollywood Style Sound Effects” , Michael Wiese Productions, 2008.

2. Vanessa Theme Ament, “The Foley Grail: The Art of Performing Sound for Film, Games, and Animation”, Focal Press, 2009.

3. David Lewis Yewdall, “Practical Art of Motion Picture Sound”, Focal Press, Fourth Edition, 2012.

4. Paul Virostek, “Field Recording: from Research to Wrap: An Introduction to Gathering Sound Effects”, Airborne publications, 2013.

5. Tomlinson Holman, “Sound for Digital Video”, Focal Press, 2005.

14VC2065 MUSIC FOR MOTION PICTURE Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: This course covers the insights of basics of music for film and TV. This course aims at basic understanding in various film-scoring techniques.

This course discusses on the symbolic language of film.

Course Outcome: Students will understand the concept for basics music composition for film and TV. Students will gain comprehensive understanding on various strategies in music composition.

Students will grasp the techniques in film scoring.

Course Description: Film and music - Phases of the writing process - The interval relationship of different moods - Action music – Suspense - Special genres - Synchronization techniques - Dialogue and sound effects - The function of the human voice - Cinematic devices - Ethnic and period music - Beginnings, connections, and endings, Different genres – Studio - composer relationships - Fantasy for screenplay and orchestra - Coda.

Reference Books: 1. Lalo Schifrin, “Music Composition for Film and Television”, 2011.

2. Kathryn Kalinak, “Film Music: A Very Short Introduction”, 2010.

3. Bob Nickas, Bruce LaBruce, Peter Halley and Wendy, “Index A to Z: Art, Design, Fashion, Film, and Music in the Indie Era. 4. Larsen and John Irons, “Film Music”, 2008.

5. Richard Davis, “Complete Guide to Film Scoring: The Art and Business of Writing Music for Movies and TV” 2010.

14VC2066 BASIC ACOUSTICS Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: • This subject explains the behaviour of sound in an enclosed space.

• It deals on Humans hearing capabilities & psychoacoustics.

• The subject identifies the problems sound could create in an untreated listening room.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Outcome: Students will understand that a room created for studio or listening should undergo acoustic treatment for good sound output.

They will anticipate the problems in a poorly treated room and offer remedies to cure them.

They will be able to choose the cost effective right materials to treat a room for making it acoustically right.

Course Description: Sound, Audio & Acoustics - Sound wave and propagation – How humans perceive hearing – Sound measurement parameters - Psychoacoustics – Behaviour of sound in a closed space & in an open space – Problems in using acoustically poor room – Sound absorbing & reflecting materials – Coefficient of absorption – Acoustic treatment designs – Planning considerations for construction of a listening room – Placement of microphones in a recording room - Placement of speakers for proper listening – Sweet spot – Ear safety.

Reference Books: 1. F.Alton Everest, “Master Handbook of Acoustics”,McGraw Co.Ltd., 2001 2. Francis Rumsey & Tim McCormic, “Sound & Recording”,Focal Press 2005 3. Michel Talbot & Smith ,”Sound Engineering Explained”, Focal Press 2002 4. Bobby Owsinski, “The Mixing Engineers Handbook” , Mix Book 2005 5. Doughlas, Brice, Duncan, Hood, Sinclair, Singmin, Davis, Patronics & Walkinson “Audio Engineering – Knowing it all”,– Newnes, 2002

14VC2067 AUDIO POST PRODUCTION TECHNIQUES LAB Credits:0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2059 Sound in media Course Objective: To understand and create various sound effects in audio production.

To explore the basic principle of making sounds techniques using computer.

To introduce the various aspects of sound designing.

Course Outcome: A student will understand the concept and craft the sound through computer codes.

A student can able to analyse and understand the audio recording, editing and processing.

Students will be able to create their sound effects techniques on various types of production situations and equipments handling.

Course Description: The Experiments will include the Sound in media Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2068 AUDIO FOR VIDEO LAB Credits:0:0:4 Co-Requisite: 14VC2061 Voice in cinema Course objective: To teach the students the optimal mike techniques for recording Dialogues.

To help them understand the working and optimal use of sound effects.

To teach them the basics of foley and sample recording.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Outcome: Students will be able to create unique foley effects for the Video.

Student will be able to record realistic stereo samples for use in the video.

Students will be able to do ADR with proper sync between the audio and video.

Course Description: The Experiments will include the recording audio and working with dialogues

14VC2069 VISUAL DESIGN AND CULTURE Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: To understand the basics of visual design and culture.

To perceive the design in creative manner.

To learn and understand the designs effectively and meaningfully.

Course Outcome: The course provides aspects related to visual design and culture.

It helps to visualize the designs in cultural aspects.

It provides insights into how to understand the audience.

Course Description: Design Elements – The Act of Perception – What we Can See Easily – Structuring Two Dimensional Space – Color – getting the Information: Visual Space and Time – Visual Objects, Words and Meaning – Visual and Verbal Narrative – Creative Meta Seeing – The Dance of Meaning – Practice of Looking – Viewers Make Meaning Spectatorship, Power and Knowledge – Reproduction of Visual Technologies - The Mass Media and Public Sphere – Consumer Culture and Manufacturer of Desire - Post Modernism and Popular Culture – Global Flow of Visual Culture.

Reference Books: 1. Colin Ware, “Visual Thinking for Design”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2008.

2. Martin Sturken, Lisa Cartwright, Practice of Looking: “An introduction of Visual Culture”, Oxford University Press, 2001.

3. Alan Hashimoto, Mike Clayton, “Visual Design Fundamentals: A digital approach”, Cenage Learning, 2009.

4. Richard Howells, Joaquim Negreiros, “Visual Culture”, Blackwell Publishers, 2003.

5. Nicholas Mizoeff, “An Introduction to Visual Culture”, Routledge Publications,2009.

14VC2070 ERGONOMICS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To introduce the aspects of ergonomics.

To provide the basics of visual study.

To help the students understand the human perception of the visual.

Course Outcome: The students will gain knowledge on, how a visual is perceived.

The representation of graphic elements in design will become appropriate.

The students will also be able to sort out the readability issues.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Description: Investigation of human physical characteristics - limitations with respect to the environment -text and graphics Ergonomics as applied to visual-legibility studies. Use of eye movement in visual analysis. Environmental conditions of illumination- study of figure and ground relationships. Ergonomics of readability issues with respect to static and dynamic text at short and long viewing distance. Ergonomics related to readability issues on display devices.Research methods in ergonomic data generation. Human Perception related to Visual Design applications..

Reference Books: 1. Woodson Wesley E, “Human Factors Design Handbook”, McGraw Hill Co. 2. Norman, Donald: “A Design of Everyday Things”, MIT Press, 1990.; 3. Visual Intelligence: “Perception, Image, and Manipulation in Visual Communication”, State University of New York Press, 1997 4. Martin Sturken, Lisa Cartwright, Practice of Looking: An introduction of Visual Culture, Oxford University Press, 2001.

5. Alan Hashimoto, Mike Clayton, Visual Design Fundamentals: A digital approach, Cenage Learning, 2009.

14VC2071 PHOTO JOURNALISM Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: It describes a form of journalism that creates images in order to tell a news story.

It defines the ethical framework which demands impartiality whilst telling the story.

It deals with different situations a photojournalist has to works in as a professional.

Course Outcome: Students’ with liking in photography will know how they will suit as a Photojournalist.

They will know how the skills to create pictures that contribute to the news media.

They will discover the demands of work as a honest and impartial journalistic.

Course Description Photo journalism: Nature and scope – Origins in World war - Qualities of a photo journalist – Coverage of spot news, General news, Political News - Sports, War – News Value of Pictures – Techniques -Timeliness, Objectivity & Narrative - Photo Essay – Photo Feature – Assignments & Image Holes - Photo Editing – Principles and Techniques – Professional Organization - The Nature of Wedding Photojournalism – Preparation and The Wedding Day – Sting Operations - Ethical & Legal Considerations – Impact of Competition - New Technologies.

Reference Books 1. Kenneth Kobre, “Photo Journalism – The Professional’s approach”, Focal Press 2003 2. Brian Hortan, “Guide to Photo Journalism”, AP associated Press, 2005 3. Blair Howard, “The Photo Essay - The How to Make Money with Your Camera. Guide for Writers and Photographers”, Kindle Edition 4. Terry Hope, “Photo Journalism: Developing Style in Creative Photography (Black & White Photography)”, RotovisionSA, 2001 5. Bill Hurter, “Wedding Photojournalism”, Amherst Media, 2 nd Edition, 2010.

6. John Loengard, Amelia Weiss, Arleen Lee, “Life Photographers: What they saw”, Life Magazine Publications, 2000

14VC2072 TRAVEL PHOTOGRAPHY Credits 3:0:0 Course objective: To understand the basic elements of photography and travel photography

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

To understand the the skills needed for planning and making travel photography To learn the techniques of production of travel photography.

Course Outcome: The students are able to understand the essentials of travel photography The students obtain the skills to plan and make various stage travel photography.

The students get the skills to make travel photography album.

Course Description: Overview of photography - Basic elements of travel photography –Designing principles- technical aspects of travel photography album – planning and organizing travel photography - Lighting techniques –Comparative study of various travel photographs - production of travel photography album - The Photographer – The Camera – The Client –On Location – Composition Reference Books: 1. Mukesh Srivastava, “Digital Photography”, unicorn books 2012.

2. Tom Carter , “China: A portrait of A people” 2004 3. Mathew Bamberg, “ Digital Photography for Dummies” , 2006.

4. Dan Simon, “ Digital Photography Bible”,Wiley Publications 2004.

5. John Hedgecoe, “The Book of Photography”, Dorling Kindersley, 2005

14VC2073 MACRO PHOTOGRAPHY Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: It teaches a branch of photography that deals with extreme close-ups.

The special photographic equipment needed for creating extreme close-ups is discussed.

Lighting for shooting indoor & outdoor macro photographs are detailed in this topic.

Course Outcome: Students will be able to take macro photographs using special lens & accessories.

They will learn to use special lighting gear for exposing a macro photo.

Students will be able to independently handle macro photo shoot and create output.

Course Description: What is Macro - Macro vs Micro Photography – Achieving 1:1 Magnification - Special Equipments needed for Macro Photography – Macro Photo Techniques - Macro Lens, Close up filter, Lens extension rings, Bellows, Lens Reversal, – Problems in Macro photography – Extreme shallow DoF, Poor Lighting – Ring flash Lighting – Special Camera mount – Macro Photo applications and advantages.

Reference books: 1. Paul Harcourt Davies, “A Complete Guide to Close up & Macro Photography”, David & Charles, 2001.

2. T.Hallett, “Close-Up & Macro Photography”, Ammonite Press, 2003 3. Ross Hoddinott, “Digital Macro & Close-Up Photography”, Ammonite Press, 2002 4. Harold Davis, “Photographing Water drops, Exploring Macro World”, Focal Press, 2000 5. John Humphrey, “Close-Up & Macro Photography-Art & Techniques”, Focal Press, 2005

14VC2074 FASHION AND WEDDING PHOTOGRAPHY LAB Credits 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2016 Digital Photgraphy-I 14VC2025 Digital Photgraphy-II

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course objective: To understand the basic elements of Fashion and wedding photography To understand the functioning and making of fashion and wedding photography To learn to differentiate various media and their scope in fashion and wedding photography Course Outcome: The students will be able to relate fashion industries.

The students learn the skills to approach various techniques of fashion photography.

The students will be able to learn skills to make fashion and wedding photographs.

Course Description: Fashion photography- wedding events – skill in planning and execution photographs- exercises related to various fashion events and wedding to be photographed.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2075 SETS AND COSTUME FOR PHOTOGRAPHY Credits 3:0:0 Course objective: To understand the basic elements of stage background designing To understand the tools and materials used for sets and costume making To learn the techniques of making the background settings for theatre and stage performance Course Outcome: The students are able to understand the background designing for stage The students obtain the skills to plan and make various sets and properties The students get the skills to evaluate various stage sets and properties Course Description: Overview of Theatre and stage - Basic elements of Background Design –Designing principles- technical aspects of theatre production - sets and props constructions- Scene design - Background designing for theatre film and television – Grip hardware-tools and materials - shop matt - Lighting techniques - Physical manipulation of stage – Comparative study of various stage designs- Stage management –Background design applications.

Reference Books: 1. J. Michael Gillette, “ Theatrical Design and production”, seventh edition, Mcgrow Hill,2012 2. Paul Carter and George, “ Backstage Handbook”, Chiang Stagecraft text book (1994) 3. Thomas A .Kelly Back, “ Backstage Guide to stage Management”, Stage Books (2005) 4. Daniel Lonazzi, “ Stage Management Handbook”, F and Media .Inc (2011) 5. John Hollowy, “Illustrated Theatre Production Guide”, Focal Press (2010) 6. Bill Raoul, “ Stock Scenery Construction: A Handbook”, Stagecraft text book (2000)

14VC2076 ADVERTISING PHOTOGRAPHY LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2014 Photgraphy Basics Course Objective: To equip the students with the knowledge of Photography for Advertising.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

To make students understand the use of light for creative photography.

To train the students on the recent trends in Ad Photography.

Course Outcome: The students will be able to perceive the needs for making the right photo for Advertising.

They will be able to use the right photographic equipments & lighting for Ad. Photography.

The students will learn the skills of a professional in Advertising Photography.

Course Description The Experiments for the lab includes areas on developing concept for advertisements and ad making with a creative features Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2077 COMPOSITION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2016 Digital Photgraphy -I 14VC2025 Digital Photgraphy -II Course Objective: To learn the art of photographic composition To disseminate the most important aspect of photography To master the art of composing images Course Outcome: The students will acquire a wholesome knowledge on composing images The students will be thorough with the principles of composition The student will be skilful in composing images using the various elements of composition Course Description: The lab exercises will precisely focus on capturing images using the rules of composition and elements of composition such as colour, line, texture, shape, perspective, form.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2078 OUTDOOR PHOTOGRAPHY TECHNIQUES Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To make students understand the various forms of capturing photographsoutdoors To enrich the cognition of the students in composing images pertinent to outdoors To give an in-depth knowledge on the usage of lenses To disseminate knowledge on the various lighting techniques in outdoor photography Course Outcome: The students will get trained up to industrial standards with regard to lighting Students will have a thorough knowledge on lighting subject outdoors

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

The students will obtain an in-depth wisdom on all the technical terms related to exposure for outdoor subjects Course Description: Exposure Essentials – Using Lenses Effectively – Composing a shot Outdoors – Shooting with natural light – Common outdoor lighting situations – Augmenting nature light – Photographing People – Photographing Sports – Photographing Nature – Photographing Landscapes – Photographing Travel Destinations – Photographing Closeups and Macro – Shooting Outdoors like a Pro Reference Books: 1. Matthew Bamberg, “Digital Art Photography for Dummies”, Wiley Publishing, 2006.

2. Brenda Tharp, “Creative Nature and Outdoor Photography”, Amphoto books, 2010.

3. Scott Kelby, “Digital Photography”, Peachpit Press, 2010.

4. John and Barbara Gerlach, “Digital Nature Photography: The Art and the Science”, Focal Press, 2007.

5. Michael Langford, “Advanced Photography”, Focal Press, 7 th edition, 2008.

14VC2079 PORTRAIT PHOTOGRAPHY LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2074 Fashion And Wedding Photography Course Objective: To teach the techniques of photography in the field of portraiture To inculcate knowledge on the various genres of portraiture To train the students technically in portrait photography Course Outcome: The students will excel in the various genres of portrait photography The students can groom themselves with the technical nuances of Portrait Photography Students will be confident with the necessary gears to start their own portrait studio Students will have a rigorous knowledge in indoor lighting for portraiture Course Description: The lab exercises will consist of capturing different types of portraits such as formal portraits, fashion portraits, outdoor portraits, black and white portraits, dramatic portraits, group portraits, informal portraits, lighting for portraits, self-portraits.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2080 PHOTO DOCUMENTATION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2074 Fashion And Wedding Photography Course Objective: To learn the art of Photo documentation To understand the various genres of photo documentation To learn the purpose of photo documentation and master it Course Outcome: The students will successfully master documenting through photographs

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

The students will know the various genres of documenting still images Skilful and creative photographers on photo documentation are produced Course Description: The lab exercises will focus on documenting various genres of themes or societal issues using still images with the aid of proper framing and composition Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2081 - DIGITAL IMAGE MANIPULATION LAB Credits: 0:0:4 Co-Requisite: 14VC2074 Fashion and Wedding Photography 14VC2072 Travel Photography Course Objective To make students understand the various forms of image manipulation To enrich the cognition of the students in composing on images t To give an in-depth knowledge imge manipulation Course Outcome: The student gets all trained up to become a professional editer in image The student will know how to do correction on their Digital image Student will qualify as a professional photographer with strong knowledge on composition Course Description: The Experiments for the lab will include digital photography,lighting techniques.

14VC2082 PHOTOGRAPHY LIGHTING TECHNIQUES LAB Credits: 0:0:1 Co-Requisite: 14VC2072 Travel Photography Course Objective: • To distribute knowledge on the various lighting techniques in photography to the industry level.

• To apply the various lighting techniques for photography.

• To utilize the lighting techniques practically for their photographs.

Course Outcome: The students will get trained up to industrial standards lightings.

Students will learnt and practice on various lighting The students learn the depth knowledge of lighting.

Course Description: The Experiments will include digital photography and lighting Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 6 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

14VC2083 ADVANCED TYPOGRAPHY Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To create research aspects of typography.

• To ensure effective usage of typography.

• To help the students understand print and digital media.

Course Outcome: • •The students will be able to apply typography for graphic design.

• •The type design experiments enrich students typography skills.

• •The students will also be able to apply new possibilities of typography in their design.

Course Description: Advanced Typography- Development of typography as a discipline: an overview of historical, technical, and aesthetics issues- Typography for the print and the digital media - Effect of technology on changing practice of typography and the role of typographers - Typography as communication - Experimental typography and the need for experiments - Digital Typography: emerging directions and new possibilities. Typography for Indian languages and scripts - Issues of bi-lingual and multi-lingual typography.

Reference Books: 1. Ruegg, Ruedi&Frohlich, Godi: “Basic Typography”, ABC edition, Zurich.1972 2. Schmid, Helmut; “Typography Today”, SeibundoShinkosha, 2003.

3. Naik, Bapurao.S; “Typography of Devanagari”. Directorate of Languages, Bombay. 1971 4. McLean, Ruari; “Manual of typography”. Thames and Hudson.

5. Lupton, Ellen; “Thinking with type : a critical guide for designers, writers, editors, and students”. New York : Princeton Architectural Press 2004.

6. Weingart Wolfgang, “Typography”, Lars Muller Publishers, 2000.

7. Friedl, Friedrich; Ott, Nicholas and Stein, Bernard; “Typography-an encyclopedic survey of type design and techniques throughout history”.

14VC2084 COMMUNICATION DESIGN Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To learnCommunicational Design methodology for various stages of design process.

• To learn different methods of research analysis, conceptualization, creation and evaluation of communicational design.

Course Outcome: • The students will learn Communicational Design methodology.

• The students will also be capable doing research analysis, conceptualization, creation and evaluation of communicational design.

• The students will have to perform Communication design process as a team and submit their evaluations.

Course Description: Communication design - problem structuring methods – Application of design methods - methods of primary and secondary research - Methods of data analysis - problem identification - Role of creativity - Brain & Body storming - methods of concept generation - Prototyping and Evaluation Methodologies - Presentation and documentation - generation of symbolic form - Realization - Mental visualization - Projection of the visualization Enhancement of the image - Form creation algorithm - Evaluation.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Reference Books: 1. Jorge Frascara, “Communication Design: Principles, Methods and Practice”, Allworth press, 2005.

2. Dan M. Brown, “Communicating Design”, New Rider, 2010.

3. Maggie Macnab, “Decoding Design”, HOW books, 2008.

4. Andew V. Avela, “Advanced Presentations by Design”, Pfeiffer, 2008.

5. Bruno Munari, “Design As Art”, Penguin Global, 2009.

14VC2085 PACKAGE DESIGNING LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2088 Printing Technology Course Objective: To trigger the creative instincts of students through package designing To apply the various designing principles practically through package design To study the existing brands and the packaging strategies implemented Course Outcome: The students will become successful package designers The students will come up with extensive creative techniques and strategies for designing package The students can come up with new designing strategies for packaging for existing as well as new brands Course Description: The lab will contain exercises on applying the principles of design in packaging strategies Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2086 GRAPHIC DESIGN Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To imbue the basic principles of design To teach the drawing techniques pertinent to designing To produce professional and quality designers Course Outcome: The students will have a thorough knowledge with regard to designing The quality of designing and drawing skills of the students will be enhanced The craftsmanship of students pertaining to designing will get professional Course Description: Design Analysis- understand a current brand situation by reviewingthe business / strategy-design tocreate visual, verbal, and experiential tools-Image Analysis: The review of the current company, product, or service -audienceConcepting /Ideation-find creative design and marketing solutions-Design Presentation: Illustrating concepts to effectively communicate marketing.

Reference books: 1. Debra J. Dewitte, “Gateways to Art: Understanding the Visual Arts”, Thames & Hudson, 2011.

2. Hugh Honour, “The Visual Arts: A History, Revised Edition”, 7 th edition, Pearson, 2009.

3. Jean Robertson, “Themes of Contemporary Art: Visual Art after 1980”, 3 rd Edition, Oxford University Press, 2012.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

4.

5.

William Lidwell, Kristina Holden & Jim Butler, “Universal Principles of Design”, 2010.

Colin Ware, “Visual Thinking for Design”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2008.

14VC2087 VISUAL ARTS AND PRINICIPLES OF DESIGN Credits 3:0:0 Course objective: To understand the basic elements of Visuals and Visualization.

To understand the various techniques involved in Visual structure and design.

To understand the tools and mechanism and treatment of ideas to transform into design Course Outcome: The students are able to understand the various formats The students will be able to make Visual design productions The creative aspect of design will be clearly understood.

Course Description: Fundamentals of Visuals - Visual thinking–Design techniques-Concept development- composing –using objectstexture – color – space- lines- typography concepts – color for print – interactive – web media - structural elements of design- the expressive content or the message- Balance - Proportion - Rhythm - Emphasis - Unity The history of art and design. Changes in subject matter since the mid-19th century- The Development of Photography Colonialism and the Influence of Non-European Cultures - The Development of Psychoanalysis- Critical visual methodology- Semiotic analysis- Psychoanalysis- Castration complex- Visual pleasure analysis- Sociological analysis-Base and super structure analysis-Post Modernism Visual analysis.

Reference Books 1. David Cohen, “A Visual language elements of design”, Scott Anderson, 2007.

2. William Lidwell, “Universal Principles of Design”, Rockport Publishers, 2006.

3. Graeme Sullivan, “Art Practice as Research: Inquiry in Visual Arts”, Sage publications, 2010.

4. Hugh Honour, John Fleming, “The Visual Arts: A History”, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2009.

5. Debra J. DeWitte, Ralph M. Larmann, M. Kathryn Shields, “Gateways to Art: Understanding the Visual Arts”, Thames and Hudson, 2011.

14VC2088 PRINTING TECHNOLOGY Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: This course deals in the process of mechanical printing for publications.

It teaches the steps followed in printing press for creating multicolor outputs.

The course covers various types in inks & paper grades used in printing.

Course Outcome: Students will be able to create documents for printing, with confidence.

They will be able to choose the type of printing required for each application.

They will be able to follow up printing process at every stage for meeting deadlines.

Course Description: Printing Process – Graphic Arts - History of printing – Hand Composing – Page Making & Stone Room - Point, Type & font, Linotype Composing – Block Making - Conventional printing technology – Mono & multi colour printing - Printing Ink – Printing Paper: Grades – Newsprint - Letter Press: Treadle Press - Cylinder Press – Flexography – Gravure – Offset – Web offset – Screen Printing – Relief printing - Inkjet, Laser, Thermal printing Digital printing, 3D Printing – Plate Making for offset - Book Binding.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Reference books: 1. Niir Board, “The Complete Book on Printing Technology”, Asia Pacific Business Press Inc, 2009.

2. Niir Board, “Handbook on Printing Technology”, Jain books, 2011.

3. “Hand Book of Offset Printing Technology”, Engineers India Research In., 2005.

4. Uri Levy, Gilles Biscous, “Digital Printing The reference handbook”, 3rd edition, Interquest, 2005.

5. Tamara D. Pope, Gilles Biscous, “Paper and Digital Printing”, Interquest, 2007.

14VC2089 COMPOSITION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2086 GRAPHIC DESIGN Course objective: To understand the basic elements of Composition in Photography and art.

To understand the research mechanism and treatment of ideas in develop photo production To learn the techniques of making the production.

Course Outcome: The students are able to understand the various formats and learn to make perspective based productions.

The students obtain the skills to plan and implement various stages of production.

The students get the skills to evaluate the production design.

Course Description: The lab exercise will provide the wisdom of production design and compositions Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2090 INTERACTIVE DESIGN Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To learn interactive Design process for Human – Computer interaction.

• To learn different conceptualization in interactive design.

• to learn prototyping techniques of Interactive designs.

Course Outcome: • The students will learn interactive Design methodology.

• The students will also be capable doing research analysis, conceptualization, creation and evaluation of Interactive design.

• The students will have to perform interactive design process as a team and submit their evaluations.

Course Description: Interaction Design Process - Design Methodology - Design brief - Physical, Cognitive and Social Computing environments. - User Centered Design Process - Information Structuring and Mappings - Participatory DesignIdeation and Brain and Body Storming, Linear and Animatic Storyboarding - Soft Physical Prototyping Techniques - Collaboratively design an interactive product or environment.

Reference Books: 1. Ben Shneiderman: Designing the User Interface: Strategies for Effective Human-Computer Interaction, Addison-Wesley Publishing Co.,Third Edition.

2. Kevin Mullet and Darrell Sano.Designing Visual Interfaces: Communication Oriented Techniques. Sunsoft

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

3.

4.

5.

Press.

Stansberry, Domenic. Labyrinths: The Art of Interactive Writing & Design. New York: Wadsworth Publishing Company.

Tay Vaughan, “Multimedia: Making it Work”, Seventh Edition, McGraw Hill Osborne Media, 2006.

John Henry Merryman, Albert Edward Elsen, “Law, Ethics, and the Visual Arts”, Kluwer Law International, 2002.

14VC2091 PRINT PRODUCTION

Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: To understand the basics of print production.

To explore the types of print process.

To acquire knowledge about color, film, plates and paper related to print production.

Course Outcome: To enable the students to gain through knowledge in print production To understand the flow of printing and its influence in graphic production It helps to understand the importance of print production which serves as base for other types of production in print industry.

Course Description: Production flow – Historical Perspective – Organization and PrePress - Chromatics – Images – Documents – Reviewing – Proofing and Plate Makeing –Film and Plates – Paper – Types of Paper – Potential Problems with Paper - Ink - Type - Printing Processes – Offset Lithography - Digital Printing – Gravure – Screen Printing – Letter Press – The Environment – Working with Printer – Folding and Binding - legal Consideration – End Matter.

Reference Books: 1. David Bann, “The All New Print Production Handboook”, Watson-Guptill, 2007.

2. Kaj Johansson, “A Guide to Graphic Print Production”, Wilery, 2011.

3. Mark Gatter, “Production for Print”, Laurence King Publishing, 2010.

4. Gavin Ambrose, “The Production Manual” Fairchild Book,2008.

5. Brian P. Lawler, “Print Publishing Guide” Adobe Press, 2005.

14VC2092 ADVERTISING PRODUCTION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2010 Visual Arts lab-I 14VC2011 Visual Arts lab-II (Animatics) Course Objective: To implement the creative concepts visually through print advertisements To apply the various designing principles practically To produce print advertisements for various print mediums Course Outcome: The students will become successful print advertisement designers The creative quotient of the students will improve significantly The students will be professionally well qualified to become print ad designers Course Description: The lab will contain exercises on creating print advertisements for newspapers, magazines using proper visual design elements

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2093 CREATIVE SUITE LAB -II Credits 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC2035 Creative Suit Lab-I Course objective: To sharpen the creative skills of the students.

To introduce the basics of software based designing.

To improve the quality of the design based outputs of the student.

Course outcome: The students would master designing software.

The students would be able to efficiently create designs using the software.

Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes designing in Software such as Illustrator, Page maker and In Design.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC2094 DESIGN AND ANIMATION LAB Credits 0:0:1 Co-Requisite: 14VC2090 Interactive design Course Objective : Combining the theory and content to produce a logo design.

To work on designs based on concepts.

To apply the fundamentals principles of design practically Course Outcome : Students will be capable of designing anything for any given concept creatively Course Description: The Experiments which the lab includes conventional paper based design and finally digitized with given application.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 6 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC3001 3D VIDEO AND GRAPHICS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To present concepts required to understand the steps and procedures that lead to the creating a 3D Video

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

It provides complete knowledge on the graphics followed in the 3D Graphics system.

The kinematic motion estimation concepts must be clearly understood.

Course Outcome: The student will gain in-depth knowledge in the field of 3D video and graphics.

The students will be able to do professional 3D Video and Graphics.

Make the student industry competent in the 3D film making industry.

Course Description: Introduction to 3D video – Multi camera systems for 3D Video Production – Studio – 3D Video Production – 3D Surface Texture Generation – Estimate of 3D Dynamic lighting Environment with reference objects – Visualization of 3D Video – Behaviour Unit model for Content based Representation and edition of 3D video – Model based complex Kinematic motion estimation – 3D video editing - 3D display systems – 3D Content creation – 3D applications – Advance 3D video streaming applications.

Reference books: 1. Takashi Matsuyama, Shohei Nobuhara, Takeshi Takai, Tony Tung, “3D Video and Its Applications” Springer, 2012.

2. Guan-Ming Su, Yu-chi Lai, Andres Kwasinski, Haohong, “3D Visual communications”, WangJohn Wiley & Sons, 2012.

3. Steven J. Gortler, “Foundations of 3D Computer Graphics”, MIT Press, 2012.

4. David P. Luebke, “Level of Detail for 3D Graphics”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2003.

5. Jonas de Miranda Gomes, Luiz Velho, Mario Costa Sousa, “Design and Implementation of 3D Graphics Systems”, CRC Press, 2012.

14VC3002 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To learn the evaluating methods and researching tools available in media field.

To analyse data relevant to media research To understand the statistical research tools and techniques.

Course Outcome: After learning this paper the students will be able to apply the researching methods The course gives a Statistical reporting in media projects.

The students gains an in-depth knowledge in analyzing the statistics and data used in media projects.

Course Description: Research Methods-limitations of effects research - basic parameters of media related studies - Qualitative Research Methods-tools for data collection- Sociometric- Content Analysis - Construction and Standardization of Tool.Variables- Scales of Measurement- Nominal, Ordinal, Interval and Ratio Scales-Sampling techniques and research hypotheses-Sampling Method-Hypotheses-Advanced Statistical Techniques For Research - Meaning, Scope, Importance and Limitations of Statistics and Data - Univariate Analysis- Bivariate Analysis Computer Application And Report Writing-Statistical Package for Social Sciences (SPSS) - Report writing.

Reference Books: 1. David Machin, Simon Cottle, Anders Hansen, Media and Communication Research methods: An Introduction”, MacMillan, 2013.

2. Bonnie S. Brennen, “Qualitative Research Methods for Media Studies”, Routledge, 2013.

3. Arthur Asa Berger, “ Media and Communication Research Methods: An Introduction to Qualitative and Quantitative Approaches”, Sage Publications, 2013 4. Susanna Hornig Priest , “Doing Media Research, An Introduction”, , 2009 5. Roger D. Wimmer and Joseph R. Dominick, “Mass Media Research”, Wadsworth Learning, Ninth edition, 2011.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

14VC3003 MARKETING MANAGEMENT Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: Teaches the environment of marketing & the conduct of consumers.

Gives an overview of the product & pricing strategies.

This course enables the students to understand the functions and behavior of channel management Course Outcome: The students will be able to apply the theory of market behavior to while creating a new product / service for the consumers.

They will be able to develop a strategy for promoting the product among competition.

The students will gain the knowledge on branding and packaging.

Course Description: Marketing management- Marketing environment – Marketing mix – Understanding the consumer - Marketing segmentation – Targeting – Positioning - Promotion –Communication Objective – Developing effective communication –Promotional budget – What is a product – Product development – Product mix strategy – Product life cycle strategy – Product levels, product lines, Branding, packaging, labeling - Pricing – Factors to consider for pricing –Methods of pricing – Adopting the price - Marketing channels – Nature, functions and types – Channel design management – Channel behavior – Organization and conflict.

Reference Books: 1. Marketing Management, Philip Kotler, “Pearson Education India”, 2009 2. Text and cases , “Marketing Management”-, Excel Books India, 2004 3. Philip Kotler and Gary Armstrong,” Principles of Marketing”, Pearson Education, 2008 4. Kotler, “Specifications of Marketing Management – A South Asian Perspective”, 14th Edition, Dorling Kindersley, 2012.

5. Kiefer Lee & Steve Carter, Global Marketing Management, Oxford University Press, 2012

14VC3004 PRINCIPLES OF CINEMATOGRAPHY Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To teach the students with the 5C’s of Cinematography.

To enrich knowledge to the students on the aesthetics of Cinematography.

To keep the students updated with the techniques in cinematography.

Course Outcome: The students will master the time tested concept of applying 5 Cs in their production that Hollywood follows in their film making techniques The students will get trained to industry standards in cinematography.

Sound knowledged professional Cinematographers are produced.

Course Description: Camera Angle – Scene, Shot & Sequence –Types of Camera Angles – Subject size, Subject Angle & Camera Height – Scene requirements Continuity – Cinematic Time & Space – Filming the Action – Scene Direction – Different types of Action Axis – Cutting – Types of Editing – Sound Flow – Close Ups – Extreme, Over the Shoulder, Types of close ups – Composition – Still vs. Motion Picture Composition – Composition Rules –Balance, Unity & Eye Scan – Framing Reference Books: 1. Joseph V.Mascelli, “The 5Cs of Cinematography”, Silman-James Press, 2001.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

2.

2.

3.

4.

Ivan Cury,“Directing & Producing for Television”, Focal Press, 2007.

Joseph M. Boggs & Dennis W. Petrie, “The Art of Watching Films”, 7 th edition, McGraw Hill, 2008 “ David Bordwell & Kristin Thompson, “Film Art An Introduction”, 8th edition, McGraw Hill, 2008.

Sonja Schenk & Ben Long, “The Digital Filmmaking Handbook”, Course Technology, 2012.

14VC3005 LIGHTING TECHNIQUES Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: To study the nature and quality of light.

To know the basic structure of studio lighting.

To know how consoles and accessories works.

Course Outcome: Student understanding will be increased in analyzing perception of light.

Student will know the basic lighting.

Student will acquire the knowledge about lighting on location.

Course Description: Nature of lights – Physics of light - Perception of eye - color theory -Lighting Variables - Basic Lighting Triangle Ratios in the Lighting - Other Lighting Objective - Lighting Instruments and Accessories - Mounts and Connectors for Lighting Equipment, Light Control – Consoles - Safety and Efficiency - Artistic or Mood Lighting Ray Tracing Techniques - Ray tracing algorithm - backward ray tracing - extending ray tracing algorithm - Real time raytracing Reference Books: 1. Kelly Dempski and Emmanuel Viale, “Advanced Lighting and Materials with Shaders”, Worldware Publishing, 2005.

2. Ralph Donald, Riley Maynard and Thomas Spann, “Fundamentals of Television Production”, Pearson, 2008.

3. Gerald Millerson,“Lighting for TV and Film”, Focal Press, 2013.

4. Des Lyver,Graham Swainson, “Basic of the video lighting”, Elsevier, 2005.

5. Blain Brown,“Cinematography: Theory and Practice: Image Making for Cinematographers and Directors”, Focal Press, 2012.

14VC3006 MEDIA CULTURE AND COMMUNICATION Credits 3:0:0 Course objective: To understand the basic elements of Media industries and institutions and various approaches involved in Media structure and operations To understand the media culture and Globalization.

To learn the elements of media content and cultural identity.

Course Outcome: The students will be able to relate media institutions and global reality of media industries.

The students learn the skills to evaluate the media content and cultural identity The students will be able to assess the effects on media audience Course Description: Fundamentals of media industry and institutions – Context of media institutions and Globalization – media ownership and functions – origin and development of media institutionsMedia and society – social responsibilities of the media institutions – media and culture- Popular culture – cultural imperialism – gender and media – Media and the audience – audience and technological changes – Dominant

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

culture.

Reference Books: 1. James Watson, “Media Communication”, Focal Press , 2007 2. Richard Campbell, Christopher R. Martin, Bettina Fabos, “Media & Culture: Mass Communication in a Digital Age”, 9th Edition, Associated Press, 2013.

3. Paul Hodkinson, “Media, Culture and Society”, Sage Publications, 2010.

4. Meenakshi Gigi Durham, Douglas M. Kellner, “Media and Cultural Studies”, Wiley, 2006.

5. Paddy Scannell, “Media and Communication”, Sage Publications, 2007.

14VC3007 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY LAB Credits 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC3002 Research Methodology Course objective: To understand the methods of Research.

To equip the students with Media Research.

To obtain the media knowledge in various research aspects.

Course Outcome: The students will gain knowledge in Research oriented Segments in media The students will do research on Media with a Creative knowledge It enables the students to work on new research project Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes areas such as Reviewing the publications, Analyzing the methodology and tools in research.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC3008 CINEMATOGRAPHY LAB Credits 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC3004 Principles of Cinematography Course objective: To understand the basic camera handling.

To learn the various option available in camera.

To learn basic shots and angles.

Course Outcome: The students will be able to use any kind of camera.

The students will access towards the way of handling.

It provides a key role in movie making.

Course Description The Experiments for the lab includes areas such as single camera setup, multiple camera setup, Camera handling method with different types of shot and angles.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC3009 AD FILM MAKING LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course objective: To learn the basic aspects available in Advertisements To create an advertisement with different features To obtain the media knowledge in film making Course Outcome: The students will make advertisements in various media The students will make ads with a Creative knowledge It makes to develop a concept by the students to create an ad film.

Course Description The Experiments for the lab includes areas on developing concept for advertisements and ad making with a creative features.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC3010 EVENT AND MEDIA MANAGEMENT Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To understand the importance of professionally managing an event • To understand the importance and handle the audience in the corporate & entertainment world.

• To learn the steps involved in planning, implementing & controlling major events in media industry.

Course Outcome: • The learners will acquire knowledge on the requirement of managing big events.

• They will be able to foresee constraints and plan for contingency.

• They will understand the media management techniques.

Course Description: Introduction to entertainment and society : Characteristics of Mass Mediated Entertainment - Narrative Theory Dramatic Theory - Understanding and analysing Entertainment Audiences - Regulations - Interactive Media – Event management characteristics - Qualities of event managers -Planning and Event team creation - budgeting the event - Execution - Evaluation - Managing the media Coverage- promotional materials - advertising campaign Sponsorship - Image/ Branding - Public Relations - Types of events - Event planning and operation - Event budget and safety measures Reference Books: 1. Anton Shone, Bryn Parry, “Successful event management - A Practical Handbook”, Cengage Learning EMEA, 2004.

2. B.K Chaturvedi, “Media Management”, Global Vision Pub House ,2009 .

3. Lynn Van Der Wagon,“Event Management for tourism, culture business and sporting events”, Pearson Hospitality Press, 2008.

4. Robert Wollan, Nick Smith, Catherine Zhou, “The Social Media Management Handbook”, John Wiley &

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

5.

Sons, 2010.

Dimitri Tassiopoulos, “Event Management: A Professional and Developmental Approach”, Juta and Company Ltd, 2005.

14VC3011 AUTHORING AND VIRTUAL REALITY Credits 3:0:0 Course objective: This course is used to understand Concept of Authoring, the basic elements of Multimedia.

To understand the mechanism in development of Virtual reality environment To understand the application of Authoring the Virtual reality Course Outcome: The students are able to gain knowledge on Authoring system and its environment.

To develop the skills in Authoring and virtual Reality To enable students to apply it to various fields Course Description: Introduction to Authoring- Different authoring styles-authoring environment – Authoring software-cross platform capabilities- Authoring tools- HTML language- Designing and production – Definition of Virtual Reality – Augmented and Non augmented reality – VR terminologies – Immersive and non immersive – Virtual Reality application to various fields.

Reference Books: 1. Tay Vaughan, “Multimedia making it to work”, Tata Mc Graw Hills, 2008.

2. James E Shuman, “Multimedia in Action”, Vikas Publishing House, 2006 3. Ranjan Parekh “Principles of Multimedia”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 2006.

5. Oliver Balet, Gerard, “Virtual Story-telling”, Subsol Patrice Torguest, 2007.

6. David Hillman, “Multimedia Technological Implications”,Galgotia Publications,2010.

14VC3012 DOCUMENTARY PRODUCTION Credits 3:0:0 Course objective: To understand the basic elements of Documentary Storytelling, the various approaches involved in Documentary structure.

To understand the research mechanism and treatment of ideas to transform into script To learn the techniques of Documentary production and editing.

Course Outcome: The students understand and apply the various formats make Professional Documentary to create social impact The students will be efficient in documentary production.

The students will be enabled to evaluate documentary films.

Course Description: Fundamentals of Documentary - subset of Non fiction film and video –subjectivity in story telling-story basicsDramatic story-telling- Documentary story – Evaluation Story ideas – Developing the story - Approaches in documenting –Documentary - Archival Film making – Docu-Drama – 3act structure – applying film structure – Documentary research basics – Advisors – Types of researches – Casting – Hosts and Narrators – Documentary proposal writing– Outlining the cast – Treatment of roles – Basic Equipments– Camera features – shooting with story in mind -Documentary Sequence – Imagination and editing– Principles of Documentary editing – Nonlinear editing – Nonlinear editing

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Reference Books: 1. Sheila Curran Bernard, Documentary Storytelling , Focal Press , (2007) 2. Keb Dancyger ,The Technique of Film and Video editing Focal Press Vth edit(2011) 3. Paul Wheeler , Digital Cinematography, Focal press (2005) 4. Paul Wheeler , High Definition Cinematography, Focal Press IIIrd edition (2009) 5. Joseph V Mascelli, Principles of cinematography.Silman james press,2000

14VC3013 SPORTSCASTING Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To present concepts required to understand the steps and procedures that lead to the sports casting of an event This course makes students understand the role of media in sportscasting It enables to gain knowledge on different Interviewing techniques.

Course Outcome: In order to assess the student’s progress towards achieving a active sports cast/ The students will be able to do professional sportscast and gain basic knowledge about the advanced techniques involved.

The students overcomes the basic aesthetics over sportscasting Course Description: Sports Organiztion – Historical Development of Sports and Sports Casting – The Economics – Audiences – Role of Media – Socio cultural Perspectives – Practicum – Future Concerns and Considerations – Preparation – Radio Play

by Play – Television Play by Play – Hockey, Golf, Tennis, Soccer and Olympic sports – Interviewing Techniques – Jocks in the booth – Talking Sports – The 6 & 10 Sports / Sports center – Getting the job – Making the tape .

Reference books: 1. Linda K Fuller, “Sports casters / Sports Casting, Principles and Practices”, Taylor and Francis, 2008 2. Marc Zumoff, Max Negin, “Total Sportscasting”, Focal Press, 2014.

3. Stuart Hyde, Diana A. Ibraham, “Television and Radio Anchoring”,Pearson, 2013.

4. Brad Schult, “Sports Broadcasting”, Focal Press, 2002.Michael Teitelbaum, “Sports Broadcasting”, Cherry Lake Publishing, 2008.

14VC3014 ADVANCED ANIMATION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To present concepts required to understand the steps and procedures that lead to the completion of a fully rendered 3 Dimensional computer animation.

The transformations and modeling techniques will be well established The essentials are 3D animation will be well understood.

Course Outcome: In order to assess the student’s progress towards achieving the learning Outcome, a number of assignments may be assigned periodically.

The students will be able to do basic 3D animation and gain basic knowledge about advanced modeling and rendering techniques.

An architectural walkthrough can be made by the students

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Description: Introduction – Storyboarding – character and model design - sound design –technical tests –Production scheduling Modeling basics Introduction –polygonal modeling –splines and patches –coordinate systems –viewing windows – Geometric primitives –transformations –common modeling techniques –hierarchies –Booleans and trims - The camera –Lights –Surface characteristics –shading algorithms –rendering algorithms –background images –Surface texture mapping –solid texture mapping –final rendering –Key framing –interpolations –parameter curve editing – dope sheet editing –kinematics –motion plans –shape deformations –camera animation –animating lights and surface properties –pose based animation - Virtual sculpting –hair and fur –texturing polygons –cloth dynamics – facial animation- compositing –Editing.

Reference books: 1. John Vince, “Essential Computer Animation”, Springer UK , 2007.

2. Marcia Kuperberg, Martin W. Bowman, “Guide To Computer Animation”, Focal press, 2006.

3. Alan H. Watt, Mark Watt, “Advanced Animation and Rendering Techniques, ACM press, 2002.

4. Preston Blair, Foster, “Advance animation”, Focal Press, 2010.

5. Tony white, Animation from Pencils to Pixels,” Classical Techniques for the Digital Animator” 2006

14VC3015 SOCIAL MARKETING Credits 3:0:0 Course objective: To understand Social Marketing and basic elements of Social context of Marketing To study the various approaches involved in Social Marketing and structure of Social Campaign.

To understand the research mechanism and development of Social Campaign Course Outcome: The students are able to understand the various Social Marketing Promotional techniques to create Public service social Marketing.

To develop the skills in Authoring and virtual Reality To enable students to apply it to various fields Course Description: Fundamentals of Social marketing and business - Social marketing and social change tools - Principles of marketing- Differences between commercial and social marketing - Social marketing and the environment principles of campaigns Rossiter's and Percy's six-step model - Cognitive process model- Diffusion theoryResearch and evaluation - Planning and developing social marketing campaigns and Program - Campaign versus programme- Programplanning models- Lawrence Green' model- Overall goals of the pilot campaign - Campaign goals - Criticisms of social marketing- Advertising- Publicity- Edutainment. Pilot campaign evaluation Reference Books: 1. Donovan Rob, “ Principles and Practice of Social Marketing” ,Cambridge University press , 2010 2. Gerald Hastings “Social Marketing in 21st Century”,. Buttleworth Heinemen Publication 2007 3. Michael T.Ewong , “Social Marketing “, Routledge Publications 2007 4. Dan Zarrella, “The Social Media Marketing” , O’Reilly Media Publication, 2009 5. Caroline Risi, ”Social Media Field guide”, Harquis press, 2013.

14VC3016 DOCUMENTARY FILM LAB Credits 0:0:2 Co-Requisite: 14VC3012 Documentary production Course objective:

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

To understand the Documentary production.

To equip the students with Media Research.

To develop a concept for issues and can make into a documentary.

Course Outcome: The students will gain knowledge in research The students will do a documentary video on a concept It enables the students to work on Documentary production Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes areas such as writing for documentary, producing and finishing through Production.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14VC3017 DIGITAL MUSIC PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course objective: To create a Music album To learn the basic softwares on audio production.

To use the DAW in MIDI Course Outcome: The students will gain knowledge in Audio Production The students will learn the music production methods It enables the students to work on creating variety of musics Course Description: The Experiments for the lab includes areas such as creating music with MIDI interface, recording music instruments and micing techniques.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester. .

14VC3018LIGHTING AND PRODUCTION DESIGN LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: To learn the fundamentals of lighting techniques.

To set up the location.

To lit the set location.

Course Outcome: The students would gain an expertise in creative lighting for different moods and locations.

The students would be able to do creative set-up for different types of productions.

The students would gain a wholesome understanding of production design for different locations and mood.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Description: The experiments for the lab include different lighting techniques and production design for different locations.

Experiments: The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of experiments and get the approval of HoD/ Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

2014 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

LIST OF SUBJECTS Sl.No 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Sub. Code 15VC3001 15VC3002 15VC3003 15VC3004 15VC3005 15VC3006

Name of the Subject Technical Writing Media Writing Lab World Cinema Media Psychology Semiotics and Rhetorics Acting and Directing Lab

Credits 3:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2

15VC3001 TECHNICAL WRITING Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To infuse the students with knowledge on technical writing To emphasise the importance of writing for various media domains To make students understand the role of writing, which forms a basis for pre-production Course Outcome: The students will gain knowledge on various aspects of technical writing The students will master themselves in writing for media The students will understand how writing forms the backbone for pre-production Course Description: Scope of technical writing – Technical writing and other forms of writing – Qualifications of a technical writer – Technical reports – Creating a technical document – Technical writers as professionals – A team work – Testing and revising – Client approval – Principles of technical writing – Styles in writing – The writing process – Use of graphic and illustrations – The technical editing process – Language style and usage – Online editing Reference Books: 1. Gerald J Alred, Charles T. Brusaw& Walter E. Oliu, “Handbook of Technical Writing”, St. Martin’s Press, 10th edition, 2011.

2. Basu B.N., “Technical Writing”, PHI, 2007.

3. James Glen Stovall, “Writing for the Mass Media”, Pearson,8th edition, 2011.

4. Charles Marsh, David W. Guth& Bonnie Poovey Short, “Strategic Writing”, Pearson, 3rdediton, 2011.

5. Anthony Friedmann, “Writing for Visual Media”, Focal Press, 4th edition, 2014.

2015 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

15VC3002 MEDIA WRITING LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: To bring out the writing skills of the students To train the students in the aspect of writing for various genres of media programmes To enhance and mould the creative skills of the students with regard to writing for media Course Outcome: The students will possess all the required skills to become a creative writer for media The students will know all the basics and nuances of creative writing The students will adapt themselves in writing for various genres of media programmes Course Description: The faculty will frame exercises on technical as well as creative writing pertinent to media. The general areas include advertising, designing, screenwriting for television and films.

2015 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

15VC3003 WORLD CINEMA Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To provide an overall knowledge on the maturation of world cinema from its inception To bring forth research scholars in the area of film studies To provide a detailed cognition on the evolution of films and film technology across the globe Course Outcome: The students will acquire a wholesome cognition on the emergence of cinema across nations and the people who contributed to it This will enable the students to master in the area of film studies Budding researches and academicians will be created in the field of cinema Course Description: Silent cinema (1895 – 1930) – The Rise of Hollywood – The World-wide Spread of Cinema – Cinema and Avant-Garde – National Cinemas – Sound Cinema (1930 – 1960) – Censorship and Self-Regulation – Genre Cinema –The modern cinema (1960 – 1995) – Cinema In The Age Of Television – New Technologies – Cinema Verite and the New Documentary – Art Cinema – Cinemas Of The World – International films – International filmmakers Reference Books: 1. Geoffrey Nowell-Smith, “The Oxford History of World Cinema”, Oxford University Press, 2006.

2. “The Rough Guide to Film”, Rough Guides, 2007.

3. T. Jefferson Kline, “Unraveling French Cinema”, Wiley-Blackwell, 2010.

4. CarylFlinn, “The New German Cinema”, University of California Press, 2004.

5. James Monaco, “How to read a film”, Routledge, 5thedition, 2010.

2015 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

15VC3004 MEDIA PSYCHOLOGY Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To provide the students with the essential knowledge to know and understand the psychology of media viewing habits of the individual and its repercussions To make students realise the importance of research and the various rubrics plausible in the area To study the nature of media users and audience Course Outcome: The students interested in pursuing research in the area of media will be highly benefitted by the course content The students can carry out pilot studies on media audience based on the knowledge imbibed from the subject The subject will suffice the students in understanding the target audience and thereby prepare themselves to step in the media industry Course Description: Media psychology in context – What Is Media Psychology, and Why Do We Need It? – Research Methods In Media Psychology – Analysis of Media Texts – Discourse Analysis – Psychological effects and influences of media – The Effects of Media Violence – Media and Prosocial Behavior – The Role of Psychology in Advertising – Developmental issues in Media Psychology – The Psychology of The Media Audience – Genres – The Viewer as Psychologist: Identification and Parasocial Interaction – The future of Media Psychology – Psychology in the Media Reference Books: 1. David Giles, “Media Psychology”, Taylor & Francis, 2008.

2. Richard Jackson Harris, Fred W. Sanborn, “A Cognitive Psychology of Mass Communication”, Sixth Edition, Routledge, 2014.

3. Karen E. Dill, “The Oxford Handbook of Media Psychology”, Oxford University Press, 2013.

4. Virginia Nightingale, “The Handbook of Media Audiences”, Wiley – Blackwell, 2011.

5. Philip M. Napoli, “Audience Evolution: New Technologies and the Transformation of Media Audiences”, Kindle edition, 2010.

2015 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

15VC3005 SEMIOTICS AND RHETORICS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To provide immense knowledge on the basics of signs and visual language To make students understand the usage of semiotics in every aspect of media To assist the students to better themselves in visual thinking Course Outcome: The students will get a thorough knowledge on semiotics and its usage in media The students will acquire sufficient skills for visual thinking The students will possess enough ideas to develop concepts related to media with the aid of semiotics and rhetorics Course Description: What is Semiotics – Basic Sign Theory – Body Signs – Visual Signs – Language – Metaphor – Semiotic Principles – Dimensions of Semiotic analysis – Multimodal Cohesion– Semiotics for design – Preliminaries: Semiotics and Poetics – Foundations: Signs in the theatre – Theatrical Communication – Dramatic Logic – Dramatic Discourse – The Psychology of Rhetorical Images – The Rhetoric of Visual Arguments – Framing the Fine Arts through Rhetoric – Defining Film Rhetoric – Framing the study of Visual Rhetoric Reference Books: 1. Ryan Hembree, “The Complete Graphic Designer”, Rockport publishers, 2011.

2. Marcel Danesi, “Messages, Signs, and Meanings”, Canadian Scholars Press, 3rd edition, 2004.

3. Keir Elam, “The Semiotics of Theatre and Drama”, Routledge, 2005.

4. Theo Van Leeuwen, “Introducing Social Semiotics”, Routledge, 2005.

5. Janice M.Lauer, “Invention in Rhetoric and Composition”, Parlor Press, 2004.

6. Charles A.Hill& Marguerite Helmers, “Defining Visual Rhetorics”, Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Publishers, 2008.

2015 Department of Electronics and Media Technology

15VC3006 ACTING AND DIRECTING LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: To equip the students with knowledge on acting and its prospects To bring out the hidden artistic talents of the students through acting To inculcate an insight on the role of artists and the importance of acting skills To equip the students with in-depth knowledge on directing To inculcate an insight on the role and significance of directors Course Outcome: The students will have a thorough knowledge on the qualities to possess to become a professional actor The student will acquire the required skills for acting The student will understand the necessitate of possessing acting skills The students will have a complete knowledge on the requisites to become a successful director The student will acquire the complete set of skills to direct a film The student will possess a thorough cognition on the overall workflow of directing process Course Description: The faculty will frame acting and directing exercises based on different genres and the lab will be completely activity based.

2015 Department of Electronics and Media Technology